549300OWFMSO9NYV4H90-2024-03-31-T01

Non-financial information statement

Our integrated approach to reporting means that we address the requirements of the Non-Financial Reporting Directive through the

Strategic report.

The overall strategy of British Telecommunications plc (“BT plc” or the “Company”) is part of that of BT Group plc which is outlined in BT

Group plc’s Annual Report 2024, which does not form part of this report.

How we're organised

BT plc is the principal trading subsidiary of BT Group plc ("BT Group"), which is the ultimate parent company.

BT Group is made up of customer-facing, technology, and corporate units. In line with regulations, our Openreach customer-facing unit

operates independently. The rest of the group operates through an integrated model. We share resources like our mobile network,

technology, shared services such as billing and procurement, personnel and brands to deliver the best outcomes for customers.

Customer-facing units

Our three customer-facing units (CFUs) design, market, sell and service tailored solutions to different market segments. By delivering

excellent customer service and differentiated solutions, they earn revenue and drive growth. This year we merged Enterprise and Global

into Business to better serve our business customers. Business formally began reporting as a single unit from 1 April 2023.

Consumer helps individuals and households communicate, study, work, learn, play and be entertained.

Business serves more than 1m organisations in the UK and 1,000 multinational corporates and government customers globally.

Openreach runs BT Group’s fixed access network infrastructure autonomously, in line with the Commitments. It connects millions of UK

homes, businesses, government sites and mobile masts, while building the next generation full fibre network.

Technology units

Our technology units (TUs) build, maintain, and run our networks, platforms and digital assets, except fixed infrastructure assets which

Openreach operates and commercialises. They're also modernising our business through innovation, research and development (R&D),

helping us be more agile, efficient and deliver better outcomes for customers. Our two TUs are:

Digital delivers our IT and digital platforms and upgrades the technology underpinning the products and services our customers need

now and in the future.

Networks designs, builds, runs and secures the mobile, core and global networks, enabling seamless connectivity for BT Group and all our

customers.

Corporate units

Our corporate units (CUs) support the CFUs and TUs, driving efficiency across the group through centralised platforms, capabilities, and

shared services. They also facilitate overall group-level direction setting, governance and coordination - crucial for aligning business

activities.

Strategic report

Key performance indicators

We use eight KPIs – five operational and three financial. We continue to monitor and evolve our KPIs to ensure those reported are the best

measures against our strategy. During FY24 we have updated our KPIs to more accurately reflect our strategic priorities.

We now recognise 'units on legacy' as a KPI, which monitors customer migration from legacy to our strategic network platforms. We no

longer recognise the cumulative number of people trained on digital skills as a KPI, but we still recognise it as an important metric and

track progress.

Adjusteda EBITDA margin has been discontinued as a KPI, although revenue and adjusteda EBITDA remain KPIs. We reconcile adjusted

financial measures to the closest IFRS measure on page 145. Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 145

for more information.

Operational

BT Group Net Promoter Score (NPS)

This tracks changes in our customers’ perceptions of BT Group since we launched the measure in April 2016. It’s a combined measure of

‘promoters’ minus ‘detractors’ across our business units. BT Group NPS measures the net promoter score in our retail businessb and net

satisfaction in our wholesale business.

BT Group NPS increased by 1.0 point, (FY23: down 1.0 point) as we continue to focus on creating standout customer experiences with

perceptions improving for Consumer, Business and Openreach.

Total Openreach FTTP connections

This tracks how many premises are connected to Openreach’s full fibre (FTTP) network.

4.7m customers were connected to Openreach’s FTTP network at 31 March 2024 (FY23: 3.1m). Openreach’s full fibre footprint reaches

nearly than 14m homes with a further 6m where initial build is underway, and we’re heading towards 25m premises by the end of 2026.

Total 5G subscriptions

This measures the number of BT retail customers who have a 5G subscription.

11.1m BT retail customers are able to connect to our 5G network at 31 March 2024 (FY23: 8.6m). We continue to expand our 5G network

which now covers 75% of the UK population.

Percentage reduction in carbon emissions intensity

This measures performance against our target to cut carbon emissions intensity by 87% by the end of March 2031 compared to FY17

levels. It’s measured by reference to tonnes of CO2e (carbon dioxide equivalent) per £m value added (adjusted EBITDA plus employee

costs).

Against our carbon emission intensity reduction target this year we achieved a 61% reduction from our baseline year (FY17) (FY23c:

55%).

Units on legacy

This tracks customer migrations from legacy to strategic network platforms, which enables our legacy platforms to be decommissioned. A

‘unit’ is a circuit within, or a connection to our network.

Since announcing our transformation in FY20, we have reduced the number of legacy connections by nearly 60%, to 6.5m units (FY23:

10.6m), by migrating customers to Digital Voice, 4/5G and Fibre broadband.

Financial

Reported revenue

This is our revenue as reported in our income statement.

Reported revenue was £20,797m (FY23: £20,681m). The increase was driven by price increases and fibre-enabled product sales in

Openreach, increased service revenue in Consumer with annual contractual price rises being aided by higher roaming and increased FTTP

connections, partly offset by legacy product declines and a one-off revenue adjustment in Business.

Adjusteda EBITDA

This measures our earnings before specific items, net finance expense, taxation, depreciation and amortisation and share of post tax

profits or losses of associates and joint ventures.

Adjusteda EBITDA was £8,102m (FY23: £7,930m ). The increase was primarily due to revenue flow through and cost control more than

offsetting cost inflation and one-off items; Openreach and Consumer delivered strong EBITDA growth, partially offset by EBITDA decline

in Business due to increased input costs and legacy high-margin managed contract declines.

Reported capital expenditure

This measures additions to property, plant and equipment and intangible assets during the year.

Reported capital expenditure was £4,880m (FY23: £5,056m). The decrease was the result of lower networks spend despite higher FTTP

build in the year due to reduced unit costs and efficiencies.

a Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 145 for more information.

b Includes our Consumer brands as well as Business unit excluding Wholesale.

c Restated from 56% as presented in the FY23 Annual Report following review of our carbon emissions.

Strategic report continued

Group performance

Summarised income statement (reported measures)


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Revenue	20,797	20,681
Operating costs	(13,183)	(13,242)
Depreciation and amortisation, including impairment	(5,398)	(4,818)
Operating profit	2,216	2,621
Net finance expense	(298)	(447)
Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures	(21)	(59)
Profit before tax	1,897	2,115
Tax	(331)	176
Profit for the year	1,566	2,291

Alternative performance measures

We assess the performance of the group using various alternative performance measures. As these measures are not defined under IFRS

they are termed ‘non-GAAP’ or 'alternative performance' measures. We reconcile these to the nearest prepared measure in line with IFRS

on page 145. The alternative performance measures we use may not be directly comparable with similarly-titled measures used by other

companies. Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 145 for more information.

Revenue

Reported revenue was £20,797m, up 1% due to fibre-enabled product sales and price increases in Openreach, increased service revenue

in Consumer driven by contractual price rises, partly offset by the prior year removal of BT Sport revenue and legacy product declines and

a one off revenue adjustment in Business (see note 5 to the consolidated financial statements).

You can find details of revenue by CFU in Note 4 of the consolidated financial statements. Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements

shows a full breakdown of reported revenue by all our major product and service categories.

Operating costs

Reported operating costs were £18,581m, up 3% year-on-year due to goodwill impairment (see note 12 to the consolidated financial

statements), excluding this costs are flat with tight cost control and the removal of BT Sport rights and production costs, partly offset by

cost inflation and one-off items.

We have now achieved our £3bn cost savings target 12 months early at a cost to achieve of £1.5bn, £0.1bn lower than target (FY23:

achieved gross annualised savings of £2.1bn and costs of £1.1bn).The cumulative cash costs incurred amount to £1.5bn (FY23: £1.1bn).

Note 6 to the consolidated financial statements shows a detailed breakdown of our operating costs.

Adjusteda EBI1DA

Adjusteda EBITDA of £8,102m increased by 2%, primarily driven by revenue flow through and cost control more than offsetting cost

inflation and one-off items; Openreach and Consumer delivered strong EBITDA growth, partially offset by EBITDA decline in Business due

to increased input costs and legacy high-margin managed contract declines.

Profit before tax

Reported profit before tax of £1,897m was down 10%, primarily due to impairment of goodwill and increased depreciation and

amortisation, partially offset by adjusteda EBITDA growth and decreased net finance expense.

Specific items

As we explain on page 145, we separately identify and disclose those items that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by

virtue of their size, nature or incidence. We call these specific items. Specific items are used to derive the adjusteda results as presented in

the consolidated income statement. Adjusteda results are consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management

and assists in providing an additional analysis of the reported trading results of the group.

Specific items resulted in a net charge after tax of £963m (FY23: £253m). The main components were goodwill impairment of £488m

(FY23: £nil), restructuring charges of £388m (FY23: £300m), and interest expense on retirement benefit obligation of £121m (FY23:

£18m); partly offset by a tax credit on specific items of £145m (FY23: credit of £308m).

Note 9 to the consolidated financial statements shows the full details of all revenues and costs that we have treated as specific items.

Taxation

The effective tax rate on reported profit was 17.4% (FY23: negative 8.3%) which is lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 25%

primarily due to the UK patent box regime, which taxes some of our UK profits at 10%. the FY23 rate was lower due to the previous super

deduction regime, the non-taxable gain on the revaluation and disposal of BT Sport business and the lower UK corporation tax rate of

19%.

The effective tax rate on adjusteda profit was 20.7% (FY23: 4.9%) for the same reasons.

At the end of FY24, we had c.£11bn of carried forward UK tax losses. We made income tax payments of £59m (FY23: £136m refund).

Our tax expense recognised in the income statement before specific items was £476m (FY23: £132m). We also recognised a £678m tax

credit (FY23: £642m tax credit) in the statement of comprehensive income, mainly relating to the increase in our IAS 19 deficit.

We expect our sustainable effective tax rate before specific items to be around the UK rate of corporation tax, as we do most of our

business in the UK.

Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements shows further details of our tax expense, along with our key tax risks.

a Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 145 for more information.

Strategic report continued

Dividends

In FY24 dividend of £850m was paid to the parent company, BT Group Investments Limited (FY23: £850m).

Capital expenditure

Capital expenditure was £4,880m (FY23: £5,056m), down 3% primarily driven by lower network spend despite higher FTTP build in the

year, due to reduced unit costs and efficiencies.

Capital expenditure contracted but not yet spent was £1,049m at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1,480m).

Cash flow

Net cash inflow from operating activities was £5,953m, down 11% (FY23: £6,725m).

Summarised balance sheet


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Intangible assets	12,928	13,695
Property, plant & equipment	22,562	21,667
Right-of-use assets	3,642	3,981
Derivative financial instruments	1,070	1,479
Cash and cash equivalents	409	384
Investments	14,028	14,493
Trade and other receivables	4,230	3,590
Preference shares in joint ventures	533	555
Contract assets	1,740	1,934
Deferred tax assets	1,048	709
Other current and non-current assets	1,209	1,208
Total assets	63,399	63,695
Loans and other borrowings	18,526	18,521
Derivative financial instruments	539	383
Trade and other payables	6,960	7,402
Contract liabilities	1,081	1,052
Lease liabilities	4,955	5,359
Provisions	649	598
Retirement benefit obligations	4,882	3,139
Deferred tax liabilities	1,533	1,620
Other current and non-current liabilities	92	82
Total liabilities	39,217	38,156
Total equity	24,182	25,539

Pensions

The IAS 19 gross deficit has increased from £3.1bn at 31 March 2023 to £4.9bn at 31 March 2024 mainly due to the increase in real

interest rates and narrowing of credit spreads over the period, partly offset by our scheduled contributions.

The BT Pension Scheme (BTPS) hedges inflation and interest rate risk with reference to the funding deficit, which has resulted in the BTPS

being over hedged on an IAS 19 measure. In addition, the IAS 19 liabilities are set by reference to corporate bond yields. The increase in

real yields and narrowing of credit spreads over the period have therefore led to an increase in the IAS 19 deficit, partly offset by

scheduled contributions of £0.8bn. The impact of these factors is different for the funding valuation deficit.

The 2023 BTPS funding valuation included a future funding commitment for BT to provide additional deficit contributions should the

funding deficit be more than £1bn behind plan at two consecutive semi-annual assessment dates. At the 31 December 2023 assessment

date, the funding position was within this limit.

Strategic report continued

Our stakeholders

Colleagues, customers, shareholders, the communities we do business in, suppliers, UK Government and regulatory bodies are all key

stakeholders. We connect with them at all levels of our business. That includes frontline operations, CFUs, CUs and TUs, senior leadership,

the BT Group Executive Committee and the BT Group plc Board and its Committees.

We engage with them in lots of different ways – from meetings and conferences to reviews, forums and webcasts. To understand how well

we’re engaging with different groups, the BT Group plc Board and its Committees get regular updates from relevant parts of the business

and from stakeholders themselves. They use them to make better decisions, give feedback and constructively challenge activities,

programmes and initiatives being considered.

Colleagues

To create a culture where colleagues can be their best and contribute to our purpose, ambition, strategy and success, they need to be

engaged. So we must provide work environments that help them flourish, give them flexible and agile ways of working, deliver brilliant

training, development and career opportunities, and reward performance with fair and competitive pay and benefits.

How we engage with colleagues

The BT Group plc Board gets regular updates from the Chief Executive and Chief Human Resources Officer. Topics range from people

strategy initiatives to culture and overall sentiment in the organisation.

This year the BT Group plc Board used both our Colleague Board and our Designated Non-Executive Director for Workforce Engagement

to engage with our workforce (under the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018).

The results

In September 2023, we changed the way we measure engagement. We did this to bring it up to date with best practice and give us better

external benchmarks for BT Group and our units.

We introduced quarterly colleague engagement surveys. And to compare old and new surveys we asked both old and new engagement

index questions in the first September survey. Engagement scored pretty consistently between old and new measures – at 72% and

71% respectively.

Across the year engagement improved 2 points. We closed the year on 75% in line with our target. The measure ‘Getting things done here

is straightforward’ is not making enough progress. We’re investigating why.

Initiatives to improve our colleagues’ experience seem to be making a difference. We’ve focused on leadership, making things simpler for

colleagues and inclusion and diversity. We’ll continue with this in the coming months.

Inclusion, equity and diversity

We’re encouraging more inclusive thinking through understanding barriers to inclusion and taking action to make sure all our people can

be their best at work. Our Manifesto has bold targets for diversity. While we’re making progress in ethnic minority representation, there’s

much more to do in other areas.

Our UK declaration rates are now 81%. More colleagues are feeling comfortable to declare their personal information, giving us better

demographic data to help us focus on areas of concern.

Our 2025 Manifesto targets for gender, ethnic minority and disability at various levels of the organisation are listed in the table opposite

against the progress made in FY24.

Whilst we have made progress towards some of our goals, we have work to do to make BT Group a more inclusive workplace for everyone

as we strive to achieve our inclusion, equity and diversity ambitions. We are focused on improving inclusion in the way our jobs are

designed and how our workplaces operate, underpinned by an unwavering focus on inclusive leadership capability – all of which are

required for BT Group to have a workforce that reflects our customers and the communities we operate in.

More diversity in digital skills will drive productivity, innovation and growth in our business and for the whole of the UK. Our focus on

targeting underrepresented ethnic minority communities in the UK meant that in FY24 29% of new UK-based roles in Digital were filled

by people from ethnic minority backgrounds.

We have a broad ecosystem of partners (including Career Returners, Code First Girls and 10,000 Black Interns) to help us reach into the

community, create awareness, and invest in, develop and open up opportunities for future digital talent. We have engaged with

colleagues through the Colleague Board and we have worked with our highly active and award-winning People Networks. These

colleague-led groups raise awareness and advocate for change inside and outside BT Group.

Occupational health and wellbeing

Absences across BT Group from sickness fell to an average of 3.67% calendar days lost per colleague (down from 3.87% last year). And

when our colleagues need extra help getting back to work, our fully funded rehabilitation programme for musculoskeletal and mental

health services returns 97% of them to full duties.

Strategic report continued

Today’s world is psychologically challenging. In a Volatile Uncertain Complex Ambiguous world we continue to be at the forefront of

innovative approaches to improve the wellbeing of our colleagues and help them maintain optimum mental health. We continue to

promote our Employee Assistance Programme and CBT Mental Health Service as well as online guided self help modules.

We’ve been getting more sophisticated insights from our health and safety data. We have moved from reactive use of data to earlier and

more active intervention.

The insights are helping us understand where to best focus our attention to make sure everyone at BT Group can work safely, and return

home safe at the end of the day. In response to rising musculoskeletal related absences in our Openreach field engineering colleagues,

using a data led, evidence-based approach we launched two new clinical intervention pilots this year to optimise colleagues’ health – the

Musculoskeletal Specialist Assessment and Medical Assistance Programme.

In FY24 we reduced musculoskeletal-related absences by around 24,000 days equating to £500,000 in savings.

Customers

We want our customers to have standout experiences. For that, we must deliver outstanding service and differentiated solutions and

outcomes.

We have a large and diverse customer base, from individuals to multinational businesses and governments. And they all need different

things. So engaging with our customers is critical to properly understand those varied current and future needs.

Our customers want us to:

– give them an outstanding experience and deliver outcomes that match their needs

– deliver consistent, high-quality solutions to keep them connected

– protect their security and data

– offer all the above at a price that’s great value for money.

How we engage with customers

Our service, sales, and contact centre colleagues regularly talk to customers to understand what they need and help them stay connected.

Our insight centre of excellence gives us a deeper understanding of our customers’ needs through research techniques and extensive

internal and external data sources.

Our CFUs, BT Group plc Executive Committee and the BT Group plc Board monitor how well we’re providing standout customer

experiences by regularly reviewing metrics like NPS.

Our Chief Executive, the BT Group plc Executive Committee and senior leaders regularly review and discuss customer complaints.

Our Customer Fairness Panel, Customer Inclusion Panel, Security Advisory Board and Global Advisory Board help us better understand

customers’ needs and experiences through direct conversations with them.

Openreach makes sure every CP gets equal access to our fixed network by engaging them through a transparent and compliant

consultation process.

The results

We’re simplifying our contract communication and charges by expressing changes in pounds and pence instead of percentages, making

it clearer for customers.

We’re visiting every UK region to raise awareness and to make sure all customers understand the simple steps needed to make the move

to Digital Voice.

Communities

We make a significant economic contribution to the UK communities we serve. But we’re also at the heart of those communities, helping

to bring them together.

We need communities to trust us. Without that we couldn’t deliver our growth plans or our purpose – to connect for good.

The communities we serve want us to:

– give them reliable and secure connections

– help local people and businesses get more from the digital world

– provide direct and indirect employment

– do business ethically and responsibly and protect the environment.

How we engage with communities

Community members use our products and services as part of their daily life and work.

We provide support through retail stores and contact centres – and through home visits to set up, install and maintain our services.

Our digital inclusion and wider societal programmes bring digital skills training to millions of UK people (including children, older and more

vulnerable groups, and small businesses).

We use customer surveys and reputation tracking to understand community perceptions of us and inform our focus areas and targets. The

BT Group plc Executive Committee reviews this feedback monthly and it’s shared with the BT Group plc Board quarterly.

The Responsible Business Committee oversees our societal programmes – tracking feedback and performance through a dashboard

discussed at each meeting.

Strategic report continued

The results

Based on a report commissioned in 2023, in one year we spent more than £9.3bn with UK-based suppliers, we supported £1 in every £80

of UK Gross Value-Addeda and supported a total of 284,000 UK full-time jobs indirectlya.

We’re one of the UK’s biggest private sector apprenticeship employers. We’ve hired over 3,000 apprentices and graduates over the past

five years and we’re planning to hire over 500 more in 2024. In 2023, we were ranked second in the UK’s Top 100 Apprenticeship

Employers.

We’ve expanded our full fibre network to 3.9m rural homes and businesses as part of our 6.2m aim by December 2026. We’re extending

4G coverage to rural areas through the shared rural network initiative. And we aim to reach 90% of the UK’s geography with our 5G

network by 2027.

We give extra support to around 1m low income and vulnerable customers through our social tariffs and subsidised products.

Our gift-in-kind contributions, colleague fund-raising and donations provided over £134,000 to our charity partners Home-Start UK, to

support the most socially excluded UK households.

We helped fund UNICEF’s ‘digital learning passport’ tech platform, while colleagues raised over £35,000 to support their Children’s

Emergency Fund and other humanitarian relief programmes.

Colleagues donated over £1.3m to more than 1,100 charities through payroll giving and volunteered more than 53,000 hours of their time

to our charity partners and communities – including sharing skills and expertise through mentoring and digital skills training programmes.

We also support communities through our Manifesto commitments. They include our digital skills goal, which this year reached a further

3.7m people and has helped a total of 23m people since FY15.

Suppliers

Good supplier relationships are essential for our success. They help us deliver the solutions and propositions that create standout

customer experiences.

Our suppliers want us to:

– pay them in line with our agreed terms

– help them optimise their own supply chains and cash flow management

– act ethically and transparently.

How we engage with suppliers

We need to know who we’re doing business with and who’s acting on our behalf. So we:

– select suppliers based on principles around acting ethically and responsibly

– do due diligence on suppliers before and after we sign a contract – covering financial health, anti-bribery and corruption and whether

they meet our standards on areas like quality management, security and data privacy

– check the things we buy are made, delivered and disposed of in a socially and environmentally responsible way

– measure suppliers’ energy use, environmental impact and labour standards – and work with them to improve these.

Operating from its Dublin base since April 2021, BT Sourced is our standalone procurement company. It’s focused on challenging the

traditional ways of buying goods and services by simplifying processes, introducing new technology and working more in partnership with

suppliers and start-ups.

BT Sourced delivered some key initiatives this year:

– With start-up Nnamu we developed and piloted a ‘negotiation bot’ based on game theory. It recommends optimum negotiation

strategies and tactics, and negotiates autonomously.

– Autonomous AI-powered platform Globality is being widely adopted. Its generative AI features are speeding up our scoping processes

and streamlining how we define what we need. Plus its new E-Negotiation and online NDA features are simplifying the whole sourcing

process.

– Specialist macro risk partner PRISM has developed a digitised platform. It shares risk reports, giving us instant access to strategic risk

information and a useful archive. It’s a valuable resource which is helping us make better, faster procurement decisions.

– Our in-house negotiation analytics team continued expanding their AI and machine learning capabilities. To give us a 360-degree view

of our suppliers, they combined existing internally developed solutions with summaries of earnings reports, news feeds, projected spend

and ESG position.

– Responding to inflationary challenges, we strengthened our partnership with C2FO to give suppliers better access to competitive

working capital. We also made C2FO’s early payment solution more widely available to thousands of our suppliers.

– As part of BT Group’s ESG supply chain assurance, we worked with Labor Solutions to run a ‘worker’s voice’ survey with five key Asia-

based suppliers. Supported by strong identity safeguards, the survey got around 1,500 responses. For more on ESG, see the ESG

Addendum (bt.com/esgaddendum).

The results

Partnering with start-ups like Nnamu will help us scale our digital procurement innovations and benefit stakeholders, buyers and suppliers.

Buyers have so far launched more than 1,000 projects on the Globality platform, with a total spend of roughly £7.9 billion. In December

2023, the platform hit a 1.1 working day time-to-market, a big improvement on the typical 7-10 working days with traditional sourcing

processes.

Findings from our ‘worker’s voice’ survey gave no major concerns. But they did give us the chance to strengthen relationships with the

suppliers we surveyed. We will continue and expand the programme into FY25.

More than 1,000 of our suppliers have signed up to C2FO, including many small and medium-sized businesses. In 2023 we facilitated

£1.25bn in early payments.

We’re building a more resilient supply chain by adding our new supplier management risk framework (including internal controls) into our

wider group key controls framework.

Responding to changing geopolitics, we’re improving our crisis management capabilities. We’re also investing in risk intelligence to help

us get a clearer view of the macroeconomic landscape to inform our decisions

a Taken from ‘The Economic Impact of BT Group plc in the UK’ report 2023 at bt.com/economic-impact, commissioned every two years.

Strategic report continued

UK Government

We added more than £24bn to the UK economy based on a report commissioned last yeara, supporting critical services and working with

more than 1,100 public sector customers.  

Our networks support vital public services like welfare, tax, health, social care, police and defence – while protecting citizens’ personal

data.

Our relationship with Government bodies underpins our three strategic pillars and lets us contribute to policies and initiatives that

promote the best results for stakeholders.  

Government stakeholders want us to:

– keep investing in our network infrastructure

– provide the fastest, most reliable and secure connection possible, to the widest possible range of communities

– invest in the best products and services, at fair prices, with high levels of customer service

– support vulnerable customers through tough economic times.

How we engage with the Government, and the results

Our policy and public affairs team manages our relationships with Government and other politicians. We operate part of the UK’s Critical

National Infrastructure and support national security, and our Business unit delivers and looks after public sector contracts like the

Emergency Services Network.

Under the Communications Act 2003, the government can ask us (and others) to run or restore services during disasters. The Civil

Contingencies Act 2004 also says that they can impose obligations on us (and others) in emergencies, or in connection with civil

contingency planning.

We keep an open dialogue with Government through our Chairman, Chief Executive and senior leaders – as well as through consultation

responses and cross-industry initiatives. Through those conversations we build support for policies that will deliver good results for the UK

and our shareholders.  

The BT Group plc Board comments on discussions with Government through updates from the Chairman, Chief Executive and BT Group

plc Executive Committee members. 

Our public policy work with Government covers everything from infrastructure investment to national security, from regulating online

harms to trade and economic policy. 

This year, we contributed to government initiatives including its wireless infrastructure strategy, supply chain resilience, data policy,

drones, quantum technologies and AI.  We’ve given input and evidence into legislation including the Digital Markets, Competition and

Consumer Bill, Data Protection and Digital Information, and Online Safety Bill.  

Regulators

Regulation helps protect consumers and promote healthy competition.

Our main regulatory relationship is with Ofcom who regulate UK communications and TV services. We also work with other regulatory

bodies like the Financial Conduct Authority, Competition and Markets Authority and the Information Commissioner’s Office.

Our regulators want us to:

– act fairly and transparently with customers

– compete fairly in the markets we operate in

– invest in the UK’s critical digital infrastructure

– promote investment and innovation.

How we engage with regulators:

We have a constructive, open dialogue with Ofcom through the BT Group plc Chairman, Chief Executive and senior leaders.

Conversations focus on how regulation can support investment in world class digital infrastructure, while keeping the market competitive

and fair.

At a working level we regularly engage with Ofcom and other regulators through industry consultations and information requests –

helping them analyse and understand the impact of proposed regulatory changes.

The results:

In 2017, we put the Commitments in place. They give Openreach a degree of strategic and operational independence. We regularly

engage with Ofcom and other CPs to reassure them that we’re following the letter and spirit of the Commitments.

During the year, and on the BT Group plc Board’s behalf, the BT Compliance Committee monitored compliance with the Commitments

through both our culture and colleagues’ behaviour. Ofcom and other stakeholders attended BT Compliance Committee meetings by

invitation. The responsibilities previously held by this Committee have transitioned to both the Audit & Risk and Responsible Business

Committees for FY25 onwards.

a ‘The Economic Impact of BT Group plc in the UK’, Hatch – 2023 Edition, based on FY22 data.

Strategic report continued

The BT Group Manifesto

Launched in 2021, BT Group’s Manifesto is our plan to accelerate growth through responsible, inclusive and sustainable technology.

Our Manifesto is rooted in our purpose, to connect for good. And it will help us achieve our ambition – of becoming the world’s most

trusted connector of people, devices and machines. It combines a clear commercial agenda with measurable promises to make a bigger

positive impact on people and planet.

Responsible: new tech must earn people’s trust and transform lives for the better

Applying responsible tech principles across our value chain

We apply our responsible tech principles across our value chain. They help us consider how to minimise harm and benefit people every

time we develop, buy, use or sell tech. They’re grounded in the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights, and are part of our

risk management framework.

Our responsible tech principles are:

For Good: We design and deliver tech to empower people and improve their lives.

Accountable: We’re accountable for our actions and take care to avoid, and protect against, tech misuse.

Fair: We work hard to ensure everyone is treated fairly and with respect.

Open: We listen, collaborate and are transparent about our actions.

Our Responsible Tech and Human Rights Sub-Committee oversees how we implement the principles. This year it continued looking at

emerging risks and strategic growth areas. We used external experts to help define our approach on topics like high-risk markets, AI and

new products and innovation.

Developing new tech

We apply the principles right from the start when we design and develop new tech. This year we:

– completed a human rights impact assessment of wi-fi controls to help us identify, understand and assess the risks of the product

– conducted user research to understand how our responsible tech principles could build trust and differentiate us

– published our approach to children’s digital rights.

Buying tech

Our procurement company, BT Sourced, has responsibility and sustainability criteria set into its processes. They give our buyers clarity on

supplier risks and opportunities. This year we:

– reviewed human rights risks in our supply chain, to better understand these risks and identify any gaps in our policies and processes

– launched a ‘worker’s voice’ pilot in five supplier factories, to understand the experience of people working in our supply chain

– carried on doing due diligence on our direct tier 1 manufacturing supply chain (visit bt.com/modernslavery for more).

Using tech

We want to make sure our products and services are used for good. So we focus on protecting privacy and free expression and preventing

online harms.

This year we published an AI standard for colleagues, to ensure our use, development, purchase and sale of AI is consistent with the

responsible tech principles, thereby helping to reduce risk at every stage of the AI life cycle.

Selling tech

We sell to customers around the world. This year we:

– enhanced sales due diligence in Business by adding checks for negative media coverage. This helps us assess any potential human rights

risks through the life of a customer’s contract

– conducted a human rights impact assessment in a high-risk country, which we’ll use to steer future business strategy.

The 2023 Global Child Forum Benchmark Report looked at companies’ policies, approach and commitment to children’s rights. It rated

BT Group as one of Europe’s top performing companies and as a global leader in the telecoms sector.

Inclusive: The future of tech must be diverse and inclusive for everyone to benefit

Championing digital inclusion

Embracing inclusion, equity and diversity is core to our people strategy and key to our growth. We want to be champions for digital

inclusion too.

Many families and vulnerable groups have been badly hit by the cost of living increases of recent years. We want to support them.

We’re market leader in social tariffs, currently helping around 1m low-income and vulnerable customers through affordable fibre

broadband and calls. And we’ve frozen these tariffs this year to protect them from inflationary price rises.

Our Home Essentials social tariff gives discounted broadband to customers on Universal Credit. Our EE Basics tariff does similar for

eligible mobile customers. And Openreach’s ‘Connect the Unconnected’ scheme waives connection fees for vulnerable customers, via

their CP.

Working with charity partner Home-Start UK, we’re also supporting the most socially excluded households through gift-in-kind

contributions, fundraising and donations, which totalled more than £134,000 this year. And our digital skills help is giving more people the

benefits of being online – particularly vulnerable groups in society, like children and over 65s.

We’re developing the right digital infrastructure so no one gets left behind. Our full fibre broadband already passes 13.8m homes and

businesses, including 3.9m in rural areas. Our 4G mobile network reaches 99% of the UK population, while our 5G network now reaches

75%, as we continue the rollout of 5G across the country.

Strategic report continued

Help with digital skills

This year we helped 3.7m more UK people and businesses improve their digital skills. Since FY15, the total is 23m people. And we’re on

track to hit our target of 25m by the end of FY26.

Tackling online hate

Hope United is part of EE’s ongoing commitment to deliver positive societal change. It features a team of elite professional football

players – representing all four home nations – coming together to tackle online hate.

So far, it’s helped educate 10.9m people on being good digital citizens.

During the 2023 Women’s Football World Cup, the ‘Play on’ campaign reached 3.5m people, encouraging young people not to drop out

of sport due to hate. One of the EE Hope United squad also visited 10 Downing Street to support amendments to the Online Safety Bill,

helping to protect women and girls.

Supporting small businesses

Our free digital skills programme helps businesses unlock their potential. This year we reached 200,000 more business owners and

employees. We gave them:

– help on everything from digital marketing and social media to GenAI via our LinkedIn Live webinar series with partner Upskill

– practical tips and advice from successful entrepreneurs through our ‘Let’s Talk About’ video series

– access to live webinars, recordings and in-person mentoring through our partnership with the National Start-up and Great British

Entrepreneur Awards

– a UK-wide tour, webinars and mentoring sessions (working with Small Business Britain).

Employability and digital skills for young people

We’re bridging the gap between education and employment by making sure children and young people are part of the UK’s digital skills

agenda.

Over 1,000 secondary school children from disadvantaged backgrounds came to our ‘Get Work Ready’ days at our UK workplaces. The

days gave a window into the types of STEM roles and skills needed in modern business – linking what they were learning at school to the

skills employers look for.

With the national STEM Learning Centre and seven state schools in the Bristol Education Partnership, we helped launch the ENTHUSE

programme. It supports teachers with essential continuous professional development and industry insights – and with workplace events to

inspire students to consider roles in data, digital, engineering, innovation and technology.

We’re lead sponsor of the FastFutures programme to promote and grow digital talent in support of the Government’s skills agenda.

Partnering with Avado and other businesses, we’re helping a diverse range of 18-24 year olds get into digital roles. So far, we’ve helped

over 7,400 young people build their networks, get experience and accelerate their careers. We’re currently funding two cohorts – a total of

500 learners – on a Digital Analyst Boot Camp. 87 BT Group colleagues were actively involved in mentoring 138 learners this year.

We also support the National Cyber Security Centre’s CyberFirst programme. Aiming to encourage school pupils into cyber and tech

careers, the programme hosted events for more than 2,000 pupils last year.

And it’s our 24th year organising and sponsoring the BT Young Scientist & Technology Exhibition, which is now one of Europe’s leading

science and technology exhibitions, celebrating STEM research and innovation. This year’s event included 550 projects from more than

1,100 students from 219 schools across Ireland.

Child online safety

We’re helping to protect children online through a number of initiatives. This year we:

– relaunched PhoneSmart with better new functionality to help minimise online harm risks, as more and more youngsters own mobile

phones

– launched GameSmart – featuring online safety information for parents on their child’s use of games and gaming devices

– ran a campaign with Internet Matters for parents of under-fives on healthy technology use

– launched an online safety hub on the Internet Matters website.

– Senior skills

We have a long-standing history of helping UK citizens learn new digital skills. But today 7% of the population are still offline.

Older people are one of the key groups in this population. They’re also more likely to suffer from social isolation, worries around living

costs and losing their landline in the Digital Voice switchover.

So far, in partnership with AbilityNet, we’ve helped around 3,000 digitally excluded over-65s build their confidence and develop digital

skills. Together, we ran several ‘BTea Room’ sessions across the UK this year. Hosted in cafes, these free digital skills workshops covered a

range of skills – from getting started with devices, to social media and staying safe online.

We teamed up with lexicographer Susie Dent to create a Digital Dictionary. It breaks down common digital terms that younger people

take for granted but that are often confusing for older people.

Strategic report continued

And we’ve also been targeting the networks of older and digitally excluded people to encourage them to help get their loved ones more

online.

India skills partnership

Since 2019, BT India, with partner the British Asian Trust, has helped around 1.1m young people with digital skills, STEM career guidance

and job opportunities. This year they launched an Outdoor School for Girls, which will provide digital, life, sustainability and

entrepreneurial skills to 180,000 girls over the next three years.

With our support, education company Katha is working with the Municipal Corporation of Delhi to teach more than 4,000 girls, through

setting up robotics labs, refurbishing IT labs and training teachers.

Sustainable: tech must accelerate our journey to net zero emissions and to a circular economy

We’ve led on climate action for more than 30 years. We’ve been ‘A’ rated on climate by CDP for the past eight years running. But as the

climate crisis worsens, we all need to speed up the transition to a low carbon economy.

This year we refreshed our Carbon Reduction Plan. It provides stakeholders with a clear view of the actions we’re taking to shift BT Group

and our value chain to a net zero economy.

We’ll be net zero for our operations by the end of March 2031 – and for our full value chain by the end of March 2041. We also aim to help

customers avoid 60m tonnes of CO2e and build towards being a circular business by the end of March 2030.

Reducing carbon emissions in our operations

We’ve cut our carbon emissions intensity by 61%. This is against our science-based target of an 87% cut by the end of March 2031

(compared to FY17 levels).

All of the electricity we purchase to power our buildings estate, shops and networks worldwide is certified as renewablea through our

procurement of energy from sources that include power purchase agreements (PPAs) and green tariffs, supported by renewable energy

certificates (RECs).

Long term renewable PPAs met 24% of our UK electricity demand this year, supporting additional renewable electricity infrastructure

across the UK grid. Where we don’t control the supply of electricity or where we can’t guarantee the origin of the electricity, we purchase

additional RECs to cover the proportion of our consumption (for example, at landlord controlled sites).

We have more to do to get to net zero. But we know how to get there – by electrifying our vehicle fleet, decarbonising our estate and

building more energy-efficient networks.

Switching our vehicle fleet to electric

Nearly 80% of our operational emissions (Scopes 1 and 2) come from our commercial fleet of over 33,000 vehicles.

We’re working hard and investing to convert the majority of this fleet to electric or zero emission vehicles by the end of FY31. In total we

have over 4,100 electric vehicles (EVs) in our fleet, including more then 1,700 that we added this year.

As a founding member of the UK Electric Fleets Coalition, we’ll keep on pushing for policy measures to drive a UK EV switch. This year, the

coalition published a new document to encourage more policy momentum on EVs.

Our start-up and digital incubation arm, Etc., has developed an EV charging unit built from a street cabinet (traditionally used to store

broadband and phone cabling). We’re exploring the potential to turn up to 60,000 cabinets into EV charging points. This would increase

the availability of charging infrastructure on the UK’s roads and support Government sustainability targets and plans to decarbonise the

UK transport system.

This year, we introduced a salary-sacrifice scheme for UK colleagues to buy EVs through personal lease arrangements. And for colleagues

in India, we’re introducing EVs as part of our transport and shuttle passenger services. Today there are 94 EVs in use and we’ll keep

growing that number.

Decarbonising our buildings estate

We cut our global energy consumption by around 140GWh this year – a 4% drop on FY23. This was mainly achieved through rationalising

and upgrading our buildings and networks, and reducing our fuel consumption as we continue to migrate our fleet to EVs.

Our Better Workplace Programme is consolidating hundreds of BT Group buildings to around 30. The new or refurbished buildings have

environmental impact firmly in mind. New builds meet the BREEAMb- Excellent standard.

Building energy efficient networks

We’re building more energy-efficient fixed and 4G/5G networks, while switching off our old legacy ones. As well as saving energy, full fibre

networks are better at handling the effects of physical risks like flooding and higher temperatures. That means fewer faults or engineering

visits.

Cutting carbon emissions across our value chain

Our Scope 3 carbon emissions account for 95% of our overall emissions. They come mainly from purchased goods in our supply chain and

from customers using our products and services.

Since FY17, we’ve cut our Scope 3 net emissions by 26%, to 3,000,873 tonnes of CO2e this year. This is a decrease of around 4% on FY23.

a 99.9% of the global electricity that BT Group purchases is certified as renewable. The remaining 0.1% is where renewable electricity is not available for purchase in the market.

b Building Research Establishment’s Environmental Assessment Method, which is the world’s leading sustainability assessment for infrastructure.

Strategic report continued

Helping suppliers cut carbon

We’ll keep working with suppliers on cutting carbon. We’ve cut supply chain emissions by 25% since FY17. Our target is a 42% reduction

by the end of March 2031.

This year, we’ve refreshed our climate change policy, which forms part of our expectations and generic standards applicable to suppliers

working with us. It requires them to conduct climate risk assessments, set 1.5ºC aligned science-based targets and to report on progress

annually. And we continue to engage with key suppliers on carbon reduction through contract clauses, for example, we’ve seen savings

from Circet that reduced over 100t CO2e in 2023 under its contract with BT Group and Openreach.

Also this year we:

– launched a campaign asking suppliers to set 1.5°C aligned science-based targets, make them public and report on progress annually

– encouraged more key suppliers to report to CDP to improve visibility and action on emissions. Today, over 300 of them are doing that

– continued working with the Exponential Roadmap Initiative and 1.5°C Supply Chain Leaders to drive climate action across global supply

chains – while supporting small and medium-sized enterprises through the SME Climate Hub and UK Business Climate Hub

– joined the JAC (Joint Alliance for CSR) Board of Directors. It’s an association of 27 communication providers working together to

sustainably transform supply chains across the ICT sector.

Cutting our customers’ carbon

There’s huge potential to use our networks, products and services to help customers cut their emissions – for example through

decarbonising the grid and improving our products’ energy efficiency.

We’ll help customers avoid 60m tonnes of carbon by the end of March 2030 – which they’ll do through technologies like full fibre

broadband, mobile solutions and cloud computing. This year we:

– helped customers avoid more than 1.5m tonnes of carbon (nearly 3.8m tonnes in total since 2021), mainly through our full fibre roll-out

that enables reductions in personal or work-related travel

– published a new carbon abatement methodology (bt.com/carbon-abatement), to be transparent on how we calculate savings

– expanded our Digital Carbon Calculator to include compute and end point devices. The calculator helps our larger customers measure,

track and cut carbon footprints across their networks. Today, it shows customers are cutting their CO2e by 15% on average when

transforming their networks with us

– enhanced our Carbon Network Dashboard to include an energy optimisation recommendation feature, which helps our larger

customers use their networks more efficiently. It enables them to measure, monitor and reduce energy consumption and carbon

emissions

– hosted a Sustainability Festival at Adastral Park. More than 1,100 people came, including big customers, climate-leaders, start-ups and

BT Group representatives. The event showcased cutting-edge technologies and how to drive sustainability and achieve net zero

emissions in various industries.

Circularity

Developing a circular economy is vital for achieving a net zero world. Around 70% of global greenhouse gas emissions come from material

use and handlinga.

We want to build towards being a circular business by 2030, and a circular tech ecosystem by 2040.

Products & Services

This year, we collected nearly 2.6m devices from consumers and businesses through our returns and take back processes.

Through our EE Trade-In service we collected 166,000 mobile devices, pushing past the milestone of 1m devices traded in since its

launch. For FY24, 96% of collected devices went for reuse and a second life. The rest we recycled responsibly. For distributed mobile

devices our take back rate is 5%. We want to increase this to at least 20% by 2030.

For 2023, our return rate for customer premises equipment was 67%. Our target is a 75% return rate by FY26b. Customers returned over

2.36m hubs and set-top boxes. Through our refurbishment process, we reused 71% and recycled the rest. We also began scaling up

refurbishment of our business hubs.

To extend the lives of our customers’ devices, our EE repair service (approved by Apple, Samsung and Google) fixed 58,000 devices this

year (up 94% on FY23).

To measure circularity in a more integrated way, we’ve started a pilot using the Circular Transition Indicator Tool on some of our own

brand consumer devices. We’re now reviewing the inflows and outflows of those devices. We aim to expand the pilot to other business

areas to implement a common measurement approach.

Operational waste – our networks and estate

We want to put zero waste into landfill by 2030. That means increasing the number of things we reuse and recycle. Globally, we generated

69,000 tonnes of operational waste this year – 14% less than in FY23. Our UK recycling, reuse and recovery rate was 92.1% (90.4%

globally).

As part of modernising our network, we continued recovering old or end-of-life network equipment to reuse or recycle, much of which was

through our Exchange Clearance Operations programme. This year, we recovered 3,300 tonnes. We also agreed a deal with a leading

bank and global recycler EMR to support the extraction and recycling of copper cable from our network until 2028.

Within our business, we reused 10,000 pieces of network equipment. And our catering partner Lexington, working with Caulibox, has been

trialling new reusable cups and containers to reduce the number of disposables we use.

Strategic report continued

a Circle Economy – The Circularity Gap Report 2022 circulareconomy.europa.eu/platform/en/knowledge/circularity-gap-report-2022-five-years-analysis-circle-economy.

b This target only relates to equipment which is leased to our consumers under their contract terms.

Biodiversity

We continued working to understand our impacts on nature and biodiversity, in line with the draft Taskforce on Nature-related Financial

Disclosures (TNFD) framework. This year, we ran an impact assessment of our operations and procurement.

As part of our focus on conservation, BT Group has partnered with The Royal Society of Wildlife Trusts. We provide financial contributions

to the charity and volunteering opportunities for colleagues.

Openreach created a Business Conservation Partnership with the RSPB, to make sure that, moving forward, they are better placed to

implement nature-positive actions as part of the overall fibre build programme.

Openreach has also worked closely with NatureScot and National Trust for Scotland in providing fibre to Fair Isle (between Orkney and

Shetland). They scheduled their build to make sure that nesting birds were undisturbed during the breeding season, and worked together

to protect native plant species.

Water consumption

Our UK water use fell by 12% this year to 1,349,324m3, mainly from operating adiabatic cooling units more efficiently within network

equipment operating limits, and the pinpointing and fixing of leaks in our water supply.

Advocacy on climate action

Corporations must advocate on climate action. But limiting global warming to 1.5 degrees – in line with the Paris Agreement – will need

supportive policies too.

During the year we continued participating in initiatives like RE100, the UK Electric Fleets Coalition and EV100, Race to Zero and the We

Mean Business Coalition. We also supported the Fossil to Clean campaign to advocate for speeding up the shift from fossil fuels to clean

energy.

Human rights

Our Human Rights Policy explains how we respect and champion human rights in our business and relationships with others. It is supported

by our responsible tech principles. Our Manifesto reinforces these principles and our respect for human rights.

Our Human Rights Policy Commitment and our Modern Slavery Statement can be found at bt.com/ourpolicies

Research and development (R&D) and innovation

Innovation has always been the key to our success – keeping us out in front in a constantly changing world.

This year we recognised £726m on R&D. We also filed 95 patent applications, bringing our portfolio to 5,385.

Openreach continues to push innovation boundaries to help cut build and maintenance costs while improving network quality. Group-

wide research at Adastral Park led the development of XGSPON-capable head-ends which will let Openreach deliver up to 8Gbs

symmetric services to CPs.

Strategic report continued

Risk Management

Risk management taken seriously, and done simply and consistently, helps us make the best decisions for our colleagues, customers,

shareholders and wider stakeholders in the face of uncertainty. It is fundamental to our strategy and performance.

Our risk management framework

Risk management is integral to our business and to achieving our strategic priorities. Our risk management framework makes sure that we

manage risks in a smart and structured way. It helps us reach our goals, deliver our strategy, support our business model and protect our

assets – while leading the way to a bright, sustainable future.

We align risk management activities with our strategic framework, business planning and performance management. This helps integrate

risk thinking into key decision-making areas. It also makes sure we share information in a joined-up way for the biggest impact.

How we manage risks

We divide our risk landscape into 16 Group Risk Categories (GRCs) of enduring risks – like People and Cyber Security – that will not

change significantly over time and can be managed consistently across the organisation.

For each GRC we set our risk appetite. That is how much risk we’re willing to take, underpinned by metrics with upper and lower limits

which set our tolerance. We manage enduring risks within each GRC through clear policies complemented by standards and a group-wide

Key Control Framework.

We use a ‘three lines of defence’ model to define clear roles and responsibilities, coordinate assurance activities and give confidence to

stakeholders that we’re managing risks effectively.

We’re also aware of – and act on – current, specific risks and uncertainties which are important at a point in time and dynamic in nature. We

categorise these as:

1. Point risks: Risks we can’t manage effectively through the key control framework, or that are materially significant to us and

need to be managed separately.

2. Emerging risks: Uncertainties which might be materially significant but whose causes and impacts we can’t presently fully define.

We align these types of risks to a GRC based on their causes and consequences.

For point risks, we assess their potential impacts and likelihood, assign management ownership and decide how to best manage the risks.

We keep monitoring risks and action plans – making changes like agreeing new actions as needed.

We also assess emerging risks but with different criteria. We look at potential impacts, level of preparedness and the time horizon.

Reflecting that emerging risks are uncertain, we also consider those that may occur in the longer term (more than three years).

Some emerging risks are more ambiguous and broader than others, needing coordinated, cross-group assessment and action. We use our

emerging risk hubs when considering these risks. They bring together cross-functional representatives to share intelligence, identify

potential trade-offs and agree actions.

Our risk governance and culture

Ultimately, the BT Group plc Board has overall responsibility for risk management. On the Board’s behalf, the BT Group plc Audit and Risk

Committee provides oversight of and monitors the effectiveness of our risk management and internal controls systems.

Twice a year, the BT Group plc Board gets a summary of how we’re managing key risks across all GRCs. The BT Group plc Audit and Risk

Committee also holds discussions with BT Group plc Executive Committee members to conduct deep dives into specific GRCs across the

year.

Each GRC has a BT Group plc Executive Committee sponsor. They set our risk appetite, how we measure our exposure to that risk, and

how we manage it within our target tolerance. This provides accountability, ‘tone from the top’ and joined-up risk thinking.

Each unit leadership team regularly reviews, discusses, prioritises and acts on risks, aligned to GRCs. This drives conversations about risk

management across every part of the organisation leading to risk-informed decisions and better business outcomes.

We have oversight bodies in place at both unit and group level – where key risk information gets reported regularly.

Our leaders promote a mindset of being smart with risk when making decisions. Our code sets expected behaviours for all our colleagues.

Ongoing training and formally defined risk management roles also help weave risk awareness into our culture.

Our risk management tool, ARTEMIS, helps us consistently apply our risk, control and assurance frameworks across BT Group. It links risks

with the relevant controls and assurance outcomes. It also simplifies and standardises reporting. This helps us to make sure we’re

managing risks in a joined-up and consistent way.

Enhancing our risk management framework

We keep strengthening how we apply our risk management framework, in step with our changing business and risk landscape.

This year we launched two new training modules covering the basics of our framework and the behaviours we expect from our leaders. We

rolled them out across our senior leadership team and everyone involved in making our framework a success. The training helped

everyone understand the expectations and benefits risk management brings to BT Group.

We continue to develop our key control framework, and this year was about embedding it consistently across the units with our leaders

taking active ownership for the controls in their area, making it core to operations, decision making and mindset.

We focused on two things:

1. Identifying and prioritising areas that needed strengthening

2. Reviewing our overall approach to how we assess control effectiveness, including second line assurance activities across the

GRCs to make sure they are sufficient and proportionate to the risks and their impact.

An ever-changing risk landscape

We operate in a challenging external environment. Economic uncertainty, adverse market conditions, growing geopolitical tensions and

more regulatory scrutiny are all impacting our risk exposure – meaning more focus and management.

Below, we discuss some of the key changes to our risk landscape during the past 12 months.

Strategic report continued

Data and AI

AI and data use are growing fast and changing the way businesses operate. The regulatory landscape, technological advancements and

public awareness are quickly evolving in step – with hard to predict outcomes. Generative AI has the potential to change the way we serve

our customers and how our workplace looks.

Whilst there is a lot of opportunity, it also means we need to carefully manage risks relating to procuring, developing, using and selling AI

solutions.

Managing AI risks cuts across many of our GRCs. For example, we need to ensure we invest in the right AI skills and capabilities. We must

also apply responsible technology principles that maintain our stakeholders’ trust.

The growing use of AI also means relying even more on data, which creates new challenges and risks. Given the synergies between the

two, we’ve expanded our

Data GRC to include both data and AI. This will let us use our risk management framework to make sure we have the right risk appetite,

standards and key controls for increasingly material AI risks.

Market dynamics

The market is filled with challenges around the macroeconomic environment, competitor movements, regulatory pressures and

technological advances.

We’re managing risks related to increasing competition in the broadband and mobile markets, while also navigating retail pricing

pressures and making sure we treat all our customers fairly.

We’re also closely monitoring and acting on the risks of disintermediation by hyperscalers as they introduce alternative technology

solutions.

The geopolitical risk landscape

Geopolitical tensions and wars across the world – like in the South China Sea or Ukraine – create risks to businesses like ours. This year the

conflict in the Middle East region has amplified a wide range of potential impacts, including disruption to suppliers, higher energy costs

and increased cyber security threats.

Geopolitical risks can change fast and affect various parts of our organisation. We use our emerging risk hub to bring together the right

people to make action plans as these risks evolve.

Strategic report continued

Principal risks and uncertainties

The risks set out in the following pages align with our Group Risk Categories (GRCs). Each GRC contains enduring risks, as well as

examples of the current point and emerging risks.

Strategic

Strategy, technology and competition

Sponsor: Chief Financial Officer

What this category covers

To deliver value to our stakeholders and achieve our strategic

objectives, we must carefully manage risks around economic

uncertainty, intensifying competition and rapidly changing

customer and technology trends. If we adopt the wrong strategy,

fail to incorporate our strategy into our business plans or don’t

effectively implement it, we could become less competitive and

hinder the creation of long-term sustainable value.

Our risk appetite

Our risk appetite sets our tolerance for managing ‘internal’ risks

associated with this category. We measure and track this through

specific metrics. We also qualitatively assess the clarity of our

strategy, robustness of our strategic analysis and whether our

business and financial plans align with our strategy. Doing this

helps us make robust strategic choices and effectively implement

them - to stay competitive and grow value for our stakeholders.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Macroeconomic environment factors like high inflation, high

interest rates and reduced customer confidence may lower

demand, increase customers’ price sensitivity and drive up costs.

– Intensifying competition in retail and wholesale markets could

increase churn and affect our market share.

– Disintermediation by hyperscalers could result in loss of market

share and weakened customer relationships.

– Slower than planned progress on key programmes could limit

our ability to deliver our strategy and growth ambitions.

Emerging risk:

– Failing to harness AI technologies to drive efficiencies and

generate value could make us less competitive.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We research, analyse and monitor economic, customer,

competitor and technology trends to inform our strategy.

– The Executive Committee and Board regularly review

performance against our strategic priorities and targets.

– The Executive Committee and Board discuss key strategic topics

throughout the year.

– BT Investment Sub-Committee considers our investments to

make sure they are aligned to our strategy.

Stakeholder management

Sponsor: Corporate Affairs Director

What this category covers

Stakeholder management, built on trust, is essential to us

achieving our ambitions. We engage with stakeholders fairly and

transparently to maintain strong, sustainable relationships and

manage reputational risks. We also consider risks around using and

selling emerging technologies, environment, social and

governance factors, and customer fairness.

Our risk appetite

We recognise the importance of strong stakeholder relationships

and consider them when setting strategy and making decisions.

We aim to balance our purpose and ambition with commercial

choices we think are reasonable. At times this creates tensions

when weighing up options: price rises to sustain investment, the

markets we operate in, who we buy from and sell to, the way we use

and develop technology and how we use data.

We want to keep being sector leader on reputation and trust

among professional opinion formers, and stay in our top quartile

position on ESG.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Protecting our customers’ interests while migrating to digital

products and closing legacy networks.

– Continued geopolitical tensions needing extra focus on

reputational risks associated with our global operations.

Emerging risks:

– Rapid advances in AI with associated stakeholder scrutiny on

things like data ethics and reskilling.

– Climate change, and perceptions of our sector’s role in carbon

emissions.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– Our Manifesto sets out our commitment to growth through

responsible, inclusive and sustainable technology. The

Responsible Business Committee provides Board-level

governance.

– We monitor the media, and track our reputation across our main

stakeholder groups.

– We engage with stakeholders to build strong relationships.

– We have robust product, services and communication plans to

improve customer outcomes.

Strategic report continued

Financial

Financing

Sponsor: Chief Financial Officer

What this category covers

We rely on the cash we generate as a business. We supplement this

through capital markets, credit facilities and cash balances to

finance our operations, pension contributions, dividends and debt

repayments.

We also focus on defining and executing the right insurance

strategy.

Our risk appetite

We fund our business based the performance forecasts in our

medium-term plans.

We rely on debt capital markets being open to investment grade

borrowers. We set our minimum credit rating at BBB. We invest

cash resources to preserve capital, not generate returns.

We have an agreed plan to reduce investment risk in the BT

Pension Scheme by 2034, and also plan to reduce longevity risk.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risk:

– An uncertain macroeconomic or geopolitical environment could

increase the cost of new long-term debt or trigger contingent

deficit contributions to the BT Pension Scheme before the 2026

valuation.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We review our forecasted and actual business performance.

– We have formal treasury risk management processes, BT Group

plc Board oversight, delegated approvals and lender

relationship management.

– We review our pension schemes’ funding positions and

investment performance and agree funding valuations.

Financial control

Sponsor: Chief Financial Officer

What this category covers

Our financial controls help us to prevent fraud and report

accurately. If these failed it could result in financial losses or cause

us to materially misrepresent our financial position.

We might fail to apply the correct accounting principles and

treatment, or to meet tax compliance. This could result in financial

misstatement, fines, legal disputes and reputational damage.

Our risk appetite

We want our overall financial control framework to be effective so

that there’s less-than-remote likelihood of material financial

misstatement in our reported numbers.

We’ve defined the proportion of our financial controls that we aim

to be preventative rather than detective, and automated rather

than manual.

We take a risk-based approach to compliance monitoring -

combining sample testing and financial data analytics.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Not delivering our transformation programmes could affect our

control performance, efficiency and effectiveness.

– Complex and legacy systems in the lead to order process in

Business not consistently delivering expected outcomes.

Emerging risks:

– Rapidly growing ESG reporting requirements.

– Greater responsibility to prevent fraud under the Economic

Crime and Corporate Transparency act.

– Higher chance of internal and external fraudulent behaviour

caused by the increased living costs.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We have financial and operational controls for planning and

budgetary discipline, efficient and accurate reporting, and for

reducing the risk of fraud, leakage or errors.

– We continually enhance processes, systems and our operating

model to improve and automate accounting, financial reporting

and fraud controls.

– We proactively identify, manage, investigate and report on

potentially fraudulent activities.

– We periodically provide fraud training to colleagues that need it.

– We work with third party experts to assess and improve our

readiness to comply with new and evolving legislation.

Strategic report continued

Compliance

Communications regulation

Sponsor: General Counsel, Company Secretary & Director

Regulatory Affairs

What this category covers

We work with our regulators as they define clear, predictable and

proportionate regulations to protect customers and society - while

making sure service providers can compete fairly. We must comply

with those regulations, maintain trust and strong relationships

while delivering our vision and sustainable value growth.

Our risk appetite

We’re committed to adhering to regulations and having a strong

compliance culture. It’s a fundamental part of connecting for good.

We make decisions based on regulatory obligations. These include

protecting our customers and network, while making sure we meet

key stakeholders’ wider strategic business needs. We focus on

maintaining long-term predictable and stable regulation.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Digital voice migration fails to deliver in line with regulatory

obligations or expectations.

– Additional obligations from the Broadband Universal Service

Obligation review could increase costs.

– Complexities delivering the Telecommunications (Security) Act

2021 requirements.

Emerging risk:

– Ofcom’s next Telecoms Access Review could result in less

certainty on fibre regulation.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We proactively engage with regulators, giving them timely and

accurate information when required.

– We try to understand our customers’ experiences - for example

when moving them on to new networks or protecting vulnerable

customers.

– Our processes help us follow regulations, build trust and enable

future dialogue with policymakers.

– We continually scan the horizon to identify regulatory changes

which may impact us, so we can put plans in place to respond.

– Our compliance and assurance programme gives our people

advice, guidance and training on regulatory requirements and

tests our regulatory controls.

Data and AI

Sponsor: Chief Digital and Innovation Officer

What this category covers

We must follow today’s global data regulations while anticipating

and preparing for tomorrow’s.

Our data and AI strategy aims to create value and enable

efficiency, while giving us a robust framework for us to comply with

data and AI governance and regulation. It also includes managing

risks as we build AI solutions.

Not following data protection laws or regulations or taking a

responsible approach to AI could damage our reputation and

stakeholder trust, harm colleagues, customers or suppliers and/or

lead to litigation, fines and penalties.

Our risk appetite

We want to protect BT Group, colleagues, customers, partners and

suppliers from breaches of data protection laws and regulations.

We also want to harness our data to support and drive our

objectives and realise opportunities.

We can only achieve these aims with the right data ethics,

governance, security, protection, responsible technology and

compliance systems, processes and practices. Achieving our data

goals may require appropriate interpretation of the varied global

data protection laws, regulations and standards.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Recent European legislation imposing new data obligations on

data sharing and re-use.

– Using AI inappropriately could lead to a potential breach in AI

and/or data regulations and compromise sensitive data.

– New EU cyber security legislation for the telecommunications

industry may be hard to implement.

Emerging risks:

– The regulatory landscape, technology, and public awareness of

AI and use of data are rapidly evolving, leading to unpredictable

outcomes and potential new obligations or reputational impact.

– Heightened concern over harm from data use and publication

leading to increase in policies to protect consumers.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We continuously run and improve our data governance

programme to tackle existing and future data regulatory risks.

– To make sure we follow our own data protection standards we

review how we use personal data across the business.

– We continue to improve our approach to managing risks around

AI.

– We horizon-scan for evolving regulations, sector developments

and new technologies that could affect our data risks, controls

and processes.

– We provide data protection and handling training and tools to

help colleagues make more risk-aware day-to-day decisions.

Strategic report continued

Legal compliance

Sponsor: General Counsel, Company Secretary & Director

Regulatory Affairs

What this category covers

Our main focus areas are anti-bribery and corruption, competition

law, trade sanctions, export controls and corporate governance

obligations. Other GRCs focus on complying with other areas of

law. Across all Group Risk Categories we focus on remaining in

compliance with all substantive laws.

Our risk appetite

We want to take advantage of commercial opportunities. So we

take considered, evidenced, defensible decisions on complying

with applicable laws.

We assess risks to help us decide on proposed actions. That means

looking at the nature of the risk, the cost of compliance, the value

of the proposed actions and the steps we’d need to take to bring

them within our risk appetite.

In corporate governance, we determine the risks for a position we

take based on things like our rules and policies, market practice,

investor expectations and our stakeholders’ views.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Sales practices that - because of living costs or tricky market

conditions - could potentially be seen as inappropriate.

– Failing to effectively manage third parties, leading to fines or

reputational damage.

– Evolving regulatory and litigation environment may lead to

financial and reputational impact.

Emerging risks:

– Increased regulatory burden around corporate governance and

reporting.

– New laws, changes to existing ones, or trade sanctions

responding to geopolitical dynamics or concerns in a particular

area of law.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– Through our Code we foster a culture where colleagues know

the standards we expect and speak up if something’s not right.

– We regularly assess risks when we give legal or compliance

advice on strategic projects, new business or commercial

operations.

– We train colleagues to know where legal and compliance risks

come from, how to handle them and when to get expert help.

– We carry out assurance on day-to-day operations, regions,

partners, projects and suppliers. We investigate and fix

anomalies and share what we learn, where needed.

Financial services

Sponsor: CEO, Consumer

What this category covers

We’re exposed to more financial services regulation as we attract

new consumer credit and insurance customers. We expect to

continue scaling-up and broadening these products and services in

the coming years. That means meeting all applicable Financial

Conduct Authority (FCA) principles, rules and requirements.

Operating outside FCA rules, requirements or permissions could

harm customers and lead to fines, loss of FCA permissions, slow

service take-up and broader reputational damage.

Our risk appetite

We aim to minimise regulatory risk in two ways. First, by building

operational capabilities that help us develop our financial services

activities compliantly. Second, by maintaining a trusted

relationship with the FCA.

We monitor a range of conduct risk metrics. We focus on meeting

Consumer Duty outcomes including compliance monitoring,

complaints data and customers in collections. These are early

warning indicators of potential customer harm which we can

act on.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Failing to get extra FCA permissions in time to support a planned

entry into a new market.

– Failing to meet the additional requirements of Insurance

Regulatory Framework could result in revenue loss and

regulatory fines.

– Challenges complying with the Payment Services Directive

regulation because of potential delays in us addressing

Electronic Communications Exclusion cap breaches.

Emerging risk:

– There might be a mismatch between our business strategy and

additional FCA regulatory permissions.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We scan the horizon, interpret new regulations and regularly

communicate with the regulator.

– We run mandatory training on FCA regulations, aligned to

job roles.

– We check our financial services products and promotions are

compliant before we launch them, and every year afterward.

– We have processes in place to make sure customers get the

right outcomes.

– Our governance framework provides clear responsibility,

accountability and reporting.

Strategic report continued

Operational

Operational resilience

Sponsor: Chief Security and Networks Officer

What this category covers

We want to deliver best-in-class performance across our fixed and

mobile networks and IT. That means being operationally resilient

and managing any risk that could disrupt our services.

Service disruptions could be caused by things like bad weather,

accidental or deliberate damage to our assets.

Some service disruptions might depend on suppliers’ and partners’

reliability - making it important to pick the right ones.

Our risk appetite

We want customers to get market-leading services, underpinned

by best-in-class network performance. To achieve that we must

prioritise resources to give the best possible service and customer

experience, while aligning with our strategy.

We aim to deliver exceptional performance for Critical National

Infrastructure, high volume (FTTC/4G) and strategic (FTTP/5G)

products whilst maintaining acceptable performance for legacy

services.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Power cuts, caused by energy shortages, might lead to service

disruptions.

– Increasing flood risk at non-protected sites could disrupt

services.

– Weak contracts or badly managed third party relationships

might lead to gaps in support arrangements and extended fix

times.

Emerging risk:

– More frequent extreme weather events due to climate change

could impact our business operations.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We have standardised processes to keep our assets resilient

across the asset lifecycle.

– We respond quickly to incidents. We reduce their impact

through geographically dispersed emergency response teams

and give customers regular updates.

– We have comprehensive testing and change management

processes.

– We do regular business impact assessments that feed into

tested, up-to-date business continuity and restoration plans.

– We make sure our operational estate has the right levels of

physical security controls in place to keep our services running.

Cyber security

Sponsor: Chief Security and Networks Officer

What this category covers

Our aim is to protect BT Group, colleagues and customers from

harm and financial loss from cyber security events.

We run critical national infrastructure. So a cyber attack - from an

external or internal threat or a third party - could disrupt both

customers and the country, and compromise data.

A poorly managed cyber security event might cost us money,

damage our reputation and impact our market share. The

regulator might also impose fines or penalties.

Our risk appetite

Cyber risk is inherent to our business, and we could suffer

significant reputational damage from a major cyber event. But we

acknowledge that we can’t eradicate all cyber risks.

Cyber security events could be deliberate or accidental, coming

from inside or outside the group. So we adapt our security position

and controls accordingly to detect and respond to evolving

threats.

We prioritise protecting our critical systems and networks, and the

data and information they contain.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– State-sponsored cyber attacks could target critical national

infrastructure and lead to service disruption, data loss,

regulatory action and reputational damage.

– Being exposed to suppliers with security vulnerabilities might

lead to data loss, interrupted services or reputational damage.

– Faster organisational change could create conditions where

people didn’t follow our policies, leading to a cyber security

incident.

Emerging risks:

– AI and machine learning create opportunities, but they could

also be weaponised as security threats.

– Quantum technologies could present a threat to how we protect

sensitive digital information.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We have security standards, tools and processes in place to

protect our applications, systems and networks.

– We monitor external threats and gather intelligence on evolving

cyber techniques, tactics and capabilities.

– So we can quickly detect, assess and respond to cyber risks we

keep a vigilant security stance.

– We run communications, engagement and training for our

colleagues.

– We continue to invest in our cyber defences and security tools,

shifting to automation where appropriate.

Strategic report continued

People

Sponsor: Chief Human Resources Officer

What this category covers

Our people strategy is to enable a culture where every colleague

can be their best and help achieve our ambitions.

This means we must manage risk around our organisational

structure, skills and capabilities, engagement, culture, wellbeing

and diversity.

Our risk appetite

Our highest priority is making sure colleagues can work and

perform at their best. We’ll seek to avoid risks that could

compromise key business priorities, and minimise any that can’t be

avoided to as low as reasonably practicable. We avoid risks that

could lead us to not complying with applicable employment

legislation.

A relatively small number of roles have a disproportionate effect

on our success. For those, we have a much lower risk tolerance of

not having the right capabilities.

To deliver our transformation and achieve our ambitions, we’re

prepared to take carefully managed short-term employee

relations risks.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Changes to our strategy, technology or business model could

affect what skills we need. Combined with tightened talent

markets and potentially higher attrition, that could create skills

gaps.

– Failing to drive an inclusive culture might affect our ability to

achieve our targets, and subsequently affect business results.

– Failing to make the organisational and cultural changes we need

to drive long-term success.

Emerging risk:

– Changes in working patterns, or increased financial uncertainty,

could have a negative effect on colleagues' mental health.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We have consistent performance management review

processes and goals - shared through clear organisational

structures, roles and job descriptions.

– We continually assess skills and capabilities and invest in group-

wide workforce and talent planning.

– We provide training and development opportunities for specific

roles, as well as for the future skills we need.

– Our Inclusion, Equity and Diversity strategy raises awareness,

addresses bias and promotes our People Networks and support

(more on page 7).

– We monitor and try to improve employee engagement and

maintain close relationships with formal representative groups

and unions.

– We offer fair, competitive and sustainable remuneration to

promote smart risk taking, boost engagement and retention and

align colleagues’ and shareholders’ interests.

Health, safety and environment

Sponsor: Chief Security and Networks Officer

What this category covers

We have diverse working environments in various locations, some

of which pose a health or safety risk. We’re committed to ensuring

the health, safety and wellbeing of our colleagues, contractors,

suppliers, customers, visitors and members of the public.

We are committed to protecting the environment and building a

sustainable future, with effective environment and energy

management - and particular focus on reducing our carbon

emissions.

Our risk appetite

Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) is a key priority for the

business and is the foundation on which we operate. Our strategy is

to maintain effective HSE risk management to make sure our

employees (and others who are affected by our undertaking) and

the environment are properly protected.

We apply proactive risk management to identify, control and

mitigate significant risks across the business to a level deemed as

low as reasonably practicable.

We consider legal, regulatory and other requirements as the

minimum obligation. We want to go beyond that – aiming for zero

avoidable harm and the prevention of pollution.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Heightened risks from the additional civil and construction work

to support the full fibre rollout including harm to colleagues,

increased regulatory scrutiny, legal claims and reputational

damage.

– Failing to ensure effective in-life contractor management, which

may result in increased risks through sub-optimal working

practices, and subsequent enforcement action, legal claims and

reputational damage.

– Failing to effectively manage waste could lead to material

financial loss and reputational damage.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– Our group policy is underpinned by our standards and key

controls and the HSE framework is reflected in our code.

– We train colleagues and make sure they’re clear on their

responsibilities and are competent to undertake their activities.

– We make sure that colleagues and their representatives

participate in (and are consulted on) HSE matters.

– We adopt a leadership role with our contractors, helping them

improve their own HSE performance.

– We allocate appropriate resources to develop, maintain and

continually improve our HSE management system.

Strategic report continued

Major customer contracts

Sponsor: CEO, Businessa

What this category covers

We offer and deliver a diverse mix of major contracts which

contribute to our business performance and growth.

In a highly competitive and dynamic environment, we seek to win

and retain major private and public sector contracts. We do that

while navigating customer relationships and risk in complex

agreements – delivering highly sensitive, critical or essential

services globally.

Customer contractual terms can be onerous and challenging to

meet, which can lead to delays, penalties and disputes. Delivery or

service failures against obligations and commitments could

damage our brand and reputation, particularly for critical

infrastructure contracts or security and data protection services.

Not managing contract exits, migrations, renewals or disputes

could erode profit margins and affect future customer

relationships.

Our risk appetite

We want a diverse mix of major contracts to help our business

grow. To do that, we must build our market share, target the right

customers, make beneficial commercial and legal agreements and

deliver services successfully.

As markets change, we need to proactively adjust our portfolio of

services, countries and customers to avoid concentration risk,

stagnation and legacy dependency.

We know this involves taking on higher risk - for example, complex

customer agreements with obligations not fully covered by our

standard portfolio, terms and conditions and/or delivery

processes. We must manage this risk in the bid process and

contract lifecycle to minimise the overall impact.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Failing to deliver on bespoke customer data requirements could

lead to potential breaches, fines and reputational harm.

– New IT infrastructure challenges, skills shortages, scale or

complexity could stop us delivering our digital portfolio

transformation.

Emerging risks:

– The changing competitor landscape might affect market

dynamics and competition.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We have a clear governance framework to assess new business

opportunities, manage bids and monitor in-life contract risks.

– As part of bids, we check non-standard unfavourable terms and

conditions and mitigate them where we can.

– Our senior management, and a dedicated team, regularly review

our contracts.

– We support frontline contract managers with contract and

a Excluding Openreach, which has separate GRC sponsorship and management.

obligation management tools.

Customers, brand and product

Sponsor: CEO, Consumera

What this category covers

We want to give customers standout service, build personal and

enduring relationships, and take extra care of vulnerable

customers and customers with differing needs. We aim to keep

customer satisfaction high as we continue to migrate customers

from legacy products and services to new ones.

If we didn’t continually improve and personalise our customer

experience, it could affect customer satisfaction and retention, our

colleagues’ pride and advocacy, revenues and brand value.

Accurate and competitive pricing is important. We must also

manage product and service lifecycles, inventory and supply chain,

and meet our customer obligations and product and service

standards.

Our risk appetite

We want to be below the industry average for Ofcom complaints

and keep improving our customer NPS. We aim to maintain

customer satisfaction, launch new products and services that

benefit them and minimise issues.

We must serve customers through modern, cost-effective

platforms and minimise the number of them on expensive, old and

labour intensive legacy products and services. We also want

customers to feel we give them personalised service through

frictionless channels.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Failing to switch customers (including those who are vulnerable

or have differing needs) from old to new service platforms could

interrupt their service, cause customer churn and/or lead to

regulatory intervention.

– Failing to make sure we have the right current and future skills to

serve our customers could lead us to not meet customer

expectations, lose customers or market share and harm our

reputation.

Emerging risk:

– Customer trust and confidence in future AI solutions.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We keep our promises on the service levels customers should

expect and we track a range of customer experience

performance metrics while continuing to improve service.

– We have processes in place to identify and serve vulnerable and

differing needs customers.

– We have clear and comprehensive brand guidelines.

– We work with suppliers to manage relationships and risks.

– We design new products and services (and pilot them where

possible) to make sure they benefit customers .

– We have a colleague retention and skills development plan to

make sure we’re not short on key skills.

Strategic report continued

Supply management

Sponsor: Chief Financial Officer

What this category covers

We have a lot of suppliers. Successfully selecting, bringing on

board and managing them is essential for us to deliver quality

products and services.

We must make decisions about suppliers on concentration,

capability, resilience, security, costs and broader issues that could

impact our business and reputation.

Our risk appetite

Our appetite guides buying decisions. That includes sole or dual

sourcing for products or services that support key business aims or

activities - or where alternative sources aren’t economically viable.

To get the best commercial rates and operational resilience we

continuously engage with and challenge key suppliers on pricing,

without introducing service and/or delivery risks.

Properly managing so many third parties needs effective

governance. So we have a low appetite for dealing with suppliers

outside of our defined policies or processes.

We have to make sure third parties don’t expose our brands to

damage. That means avoiding – or stopping working with – any

that don’t meet our standards on key areas like human rights.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Increased energy prices, supply shortages and inflation could

affect cost cutting targets and future investments.

– Geopolitical tensions (like the Russia-Ukraine war and

escalations in the Middle East) could disrupt supply chain, raise

costs and inflation, and increase cyber security threats.

Emerging risks:

– A difficult economic environment could put pressure on smaller

suppliers.

– Extreme climate conditions might disrupt supply chains.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– Our sourcing strategy uses different approaches to managing

risk by category. That includes standard terms and conditions

and controls so we can make purchasing decisions efficiently

and effectively.

– We have comprehensive supplier due diligence, contract

management, on-boarding processes and are reviewing and

improving our in-life assessment process.

– We have robust supplier risk management, performance,

renewal and termination processes.

– We do demand planning and forecasting, stock counts and

inventory management so we have supplies available.

– We get assurance that the goods and services we buy are made,

delivered and disposed of responsibly. That includes monitoring

energy use, labour standards and environmental, social and

governance impacts.

Transformation delivery

Sponsor: Chief Financial Officer

What this category covers

We’re accelerating transformation delivery to build a simpler,

more efficient and dynamic BT Group.

We’re modernising our IT, automating processes with AI,

streamlining our product portfolio and migrating to next-

generation strategic networks. All this will deliver significant cost

efficiencies -while also improving our customers’ and colleagues’

digital experiences.

Failing to manage transformation execution risks could make us

less efficient and damage our financial performance and customer

experience.

Our risk appetite

We’ve defined the risk level we’re willing to tolerate for

transforming our products, customer journeys and technology. We

track specific metrics to check we’re achieving genuine,

sustainable transformation outcomes and not just cutting costs.

Delivering within our risk appetite will give us competitive

advantage, enable faster delivery, improve customer experience

and make sure our costs benchmark favourably with peers.

Examples of dynamic risks

Point risks:

– Failure to manage complex interdependencies to complete the

migration of customers and close legacy IT and networks.

– The volume and complexity of our transformational activities

across different parts of the group, combined with day to day

business, could dilute our efforts and stop us reaching our

sustainable transformation goals.

Emerging risk:

– Delays in switching customers onto new, strategic products

could slow or stop us closing our copper network and exchanges.

Examples of what we do to manage these risks

– We review transformation performance at monthly BT Group plc

Executive Committee meetings - managing dependencies,

making informed decisions and removing blockers.

– We have strong governance, with senior leaders owning specific

operational and financial outcomes. Each quarter we assess our

performance - allocating funding to the programmes delivering

the most strategic value.

– We invest in digital and data capabilities to cut costs, grow

revenue and make sure we have the right resources to deliver

sustainable change effectively.

– We invest in our people strategy to make sure we have the right

skills and culture needed to deliver transformation.

The strategic report was approved by the Board of Directors on 26 July 2024 and signed on its behalf by:

Simon Lowth

Director

Strategic report continued

In accordance with section 172 of the Companies Act 2006, each of our directors acts in the way he or she considers, in good faith, would

most likely promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole. Our directors have regard, amongst other

matters, to the:

– likely consequences of any decisions in the long-term;

– interests of the company’s employees;

– need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others;

– impact of the company’s operations on the community and environment;

– desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct; and

– need to act fairly as between members of the company.

In discharging its section 172 duties the Company has regard to the factors set out above. The Company also has regard to other factors

which consider relevant to the decision being made. Those factors, for example, include the interests and views of its pensioners,

Bondholders and its relationship with Ofcom. The Company acknowledges that every decision it makes will not necessarily result in a

positive outcome for all of its stakeholders. By considering the Company’s purpose, vision and values together with its strategic priorities

and having a process in place for decision-making, the Company does, however, aim to make sure that its decisions are consistent and

predictable.

As is normal for large companies, the Company delegates authority for day-to-day management of the Company to executives and then

engage management in setting, approving and overseeing the execution of the business strategy and related policies. The Company also

reviews other areas over the course of the financial year including the Company’s financial and operational performance; stakeholder-

related matters; diversity and inclusivity; and corporate responsibility matters. This is done through the consideration and discussion of

reports which are sent in advance of each Board meeting and through presentations to the Board.

The views and the impact of the Company’s activities on the Company’s stakeholders (including its workforce, customers and suppliers)

are an important consideration for it when making relevant decisions. While there are cases where the Board itself judges that it should

engage directly with certain stakeholder groups or on certain issues, the size and spread of both the stakeholders and the BT Group means

that generally stakeholder engagement best takes place at an operational or group level. The Company finds that as well as being a more

efficient and effective approach, this also helps it achieve a greater positive impact on environmental, social and other issues than by

working alone as an individual company. For details on the some of the engagement that has taken place with the Company’s

stakeholders so as to help the directors to understand the issues to which they must have regard, and the impact of that feedback on

decisions, please see the stakeholders section in the strategic report of BT Group plc’s 2024 Annual Report.

During the period the Company received information to help it understand the interests and views of the Company’s key stakeholders and

other relevant factors when making decisions. This information was distributed in a range of different formats including in reports and

presentations on the Company’s financial and operational performance, non-financial KPIs, risk, environmental, social and corporate

governance matters and the outcomes of specific pieces of engagement. As a result of this the Company has had an overview of

engagement with stakeholders and other relevant factors which allows it to understand the nature of the stakeholders’ concerns and to

comply with its section 172 duty to promote success of the company.

One example of how the Company has had regard to the matters set out in section 172(1)(a)-(f) when discharging its section 172 duties

and the effect of that on decisions taken by it, was the decision to approve the package of key measures in relation to the triennial funding

valuation for the BT Pension Scheme at 30 June 2023.

In making this decision the Board considered a range of factors. These included the Company’s financing requirements and the ongoing

need for strategic review. The Board further considered the needs and expectations of the Company’s stakeholders such as shareholders,

employees, suppliers, customers and pensioners.

Section 172 statement

The directors present their report and the audited financial statements of the Company, British Telecommunications plc, and the group,

which includes its subsidiary undertakings, for the year ended 31 March 2024. The audited consolidated financial statements are

presented on pages 39 to 108 and the audited entity only financial statements are presented on pages 109 to 138.

A statement by the directors of their responsibilities for preparing the financial statements is included in the Statement of directors’

responsibilities on page 31.

Principal activity

The Company is the principal trading subsidiary of BT Group plc ("BT Group"), which is the ultimate parent company.

BT Group is the UK’s leading provider of fixed and mobile telecommunications and related secure digital products, solutions and services.

We also provide managed telecommunications, security and network and IT infrastructure services to customers across 180 countries.

We’re responsible for building and operating networks and delivering the connectivity-based solutions that are essential to modern lives,

businesses and communities. We’re the UK’s largest provider of consumer mobile, fixed and converged communications solutions. We

also keep UK and Republic of Ireland businesses and public sector organisations connected and provide network solutions to UK

communications providers. Globally we integrate, secure and manage network and cloud infrastructure and services for multinational

corporations. Openreach runs the UK’s main fixed connectivity access network, connecting homes, mobile phone masts, schools, shops,

banks, hospitals, libraries, broadcasters, governments and big and small businesses to the world.

As well as being the principal trading subsidiary of BT Group plc, British Telecommunications plc directly or indirectly controls all other

trading subsidiaries of the BT Group.

Directors

Roger Eyre, Neil Harris, Edward Heaton, Simon Lowth and Daniel Rider served as directors throughout the year.

Material accounting estimates, key judgements and material accounting policies

Our critical accounting estimates and key judgements, and material accounting policies conform with UK-adopted international

accounting standards, IFRSs issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and the requirements of the Companies Act

2006, and are set out on page 45 of the consolidated financial statements and page 111 of the entity only financial statements. The

directors have reviewed these policies and applicable estimation techniques, and have confirmed they are appropriate for the preparation

of the FY24 consolidated financial statements.

Disclosure of information to the auditor

As far as each of the directors is aware, there is no relevant audit information (as defined by section 418(3) of the Companies Act 2006)

that has not been disclosed to the auditor. Each of the directors confirms that all steps have been taken that ought to have been taken to

make them aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the auditor has been made aware of that information.

Dividend

A dividend of £850m was paid to the parent company, BT Group Investments Ltd (FY23: £850m).

Going concern

In line with IAS 1 ‘Presentation of financial statements’, and FRC guidance on ‘risk management, internal control and related financial and

business reporting’, management has taken into account all available information about the future for a period of at least, but not limited

to, 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements when assessing the group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

The Strategic report on pages 3 to 25 includes information on the group structure, strategy and business model, the performance of each

customer-facing unit and the impact of regulation and competition. The Group performance section on pages 5 to 6 includes information

on our group financial results and balance sheet position. Notes 21, 23, 24 and 26 of the consolidated financial statements include

information on the group’s investments, cash and cash equivalents, borrowings, derivatives, financial risk management objectives,

hedging policies and exposure to interest, foreign exchange, credit, liquidity and market risks.

Our principal risks and uncertainties are set out on pages 18 to 25 including details of each risk and how we manage and mitigate them.

The directors carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks affecting the group, including any that could threaten

our business model, future performance, insolvency or liquidity.

Having assessed the principal and emerging risks, the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting

when preparing the financial statements. This assessment covers the period to July 2024, which is consistent with the FRC guidance.

When reaching this conclusion, the directors took into account the group’s overall financial position (including trading results and ability

to repay term debt as it matures without recourse to refinancing) and the exposure to emerging and principal risks.

At 31 March 2024, the group had cash and cash equivalents of £0.4bn and current asset investments of £2.4bn. The group also had access

to committed borrowing facilities of £2.1bn. These facilities were undrawn at the year-end and are not subject to renewal until March

2027.

Directors’ and officers’ liability insurance and indemnity

BT Group plc routinely buys insurance to cover the directors, officers and employees in positions of managerial supervision of BT Group

plc and its subsidiaries (including the Company). This is intended to protect against defence costs, civil damages and, in some

circumstances, civil fines and penalties following an action brought against them in their personal capacity. The policy also covers

individuals serving as directors of other companies or of joint ventures or on boards of trade associations or charitable organisations at BT

Group plc’s request. The insurance protects the directors and officers directly in circumstances where, by law, BT Group plc cannot

provide an indemnity. It also provides BT Group plc, subject to a retention, with cover against the cost of indemnifying a director or officer.

One layer of insurance is ringfenced for the directors of BT Group plc.

As at 26 July 2024, and throughout FY24, British Telecommunications plc has provided an indemnity for a group of people similar to the

group covered by the above insurance. Neither the insurance nor the indemnity provides cover where the individual is proven to have

acted fraudulently or dishonestly.

As permitted by the company’s Articles of Association, and to the extent permitted by law, BT Group indemnifies each of its directors and

other officers of the group against certain liabilities that may be incurred as a result of their positions within the group. The indemnity was

in force throughout the tenure of each director during the last financial year, and is currently in force.

Report of the Directors

Systems of risk management and internal control

The Board of BT Group plc is responsible for reviewing the group’s systems of risk management and internal control each year, and

ensuring their effectiveness including in respect of relevant assurance activities. These systems are designed to manage, rather than

eliminate, risks we face that may prevent us achieving our business objectives and delivering our strategy. Any system can provide only

reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss.

The BT Group risk management framework is simple and consistent, and defines our (1) risk mindset and culture, (2) risk process and

activities; and finally (3) governance. The framework:

– provides the business with the tools to take on the right risks and make smart risk decisions

– supports the identification, assessment and management of the principal risks and uncertainties faced by the group

– is an integral part of BT Group’s annual strategic review cycle.

The framework was designed in accordance with the FRC guidance on risk management, internal control and related financial and

business reporting and has been in operation throughout the year and up to the date on which this document was approved. The

framework was reviewed in FY24 and deemed effective. Continuous improvements were made in FY24, including the rollout of a new

training programme to establish a core level of understanding of expectations across our senior leadership team and all those with roles

that are key to making our framework a success. There was also focus on embedding our Key Control Framework, a set of Group

requirements, defined by subject matter experts, to be implemented consistently across all Units. More information on our group risk

management framework can be found on pages 16 to 18.

Internal audit carry out periodic assessments of the quality of risk management and control, promote effective risk management across all

our units and report to management and the BT Group plc Audit & Risk Committee on the status of specific areas identified for

improvement. We do not cover joint ventures and associates not controlled by the group in the scope of our group risk management

framework. Such third parties are responsible for their own internal control assessment. Furthermore, the BT Group plc Audit & Risk

Committee, on behalf of the BT Group plc Board, reviews the effectiveness of the systems of risk management and internal control across

the group.

Capital management and funding

The capital structure of the Company is managed by BT Group plc. The policies described here apply equally to both BT Group plc and

group companies. The objective of our capital management policy is to target an overall level of debt consistent with our credit rating

objectives, while investing in the business, supporting our pension schemes and meeting our Distribution Policy.

The BT Board plc regularly reviews the group’s capital structure. Management proposes actions and produces analyses which reflect the

group’s investment plans and risk characteristics, as well as the macroeconomic conditions in which we operate.

Our Funding Policy is to raise and invest funds centrally to meet the group’s anticipated requirements. We use a combination of capital

market bond issuance and committed borrowing facilities to fund the group. When issuing debt, in order to avoid refinancing risk, group

treasury will take into consideration the maturity profile of the group’s debt portfolio, financial market conditions as well as forecast cash

flows.

Financial instruments

Details of the group’s financial risk management objectives and policies of the group and exposure to interest risk, credit risk, liquidity risk

and foreign exchange are given in note 26 to the consolidated financial statements.

Credit risk management policy

We take proactive steps to minimise the impact of adverse market conditions on our financial instruments. In managing investments and

derivative financial instruments, BT Group plc’s group treasury monitors the credit quality across treasury counterparties and actively

manages any exposures that arise. Management within the business units also actively monitors any exposures arising from trading

balances.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

Other than the financial commitments and contingent liabilities disclosed in note 30 to the consolidated financial statements, there are no

off-balance sheet arrangements that have, or are reasonably likely to have, a current or future material effect on: our financial condition;

changes in financial condition; revenues or expenses; results of operations; liquidity; capital expenditure; or capital resources.

Post balance sheet events

Any material post balance sheet events have been disclosed in note 32 of the consolidated financial statements and note 22 of the entity

only financial statements.

Legal proceedings

The group is involved in various legal proceedings, including actual or threatened litigation and, government or regulatory investigations.

For further details of legal and regulatory proceedings to which the group is party please see note 17 to the consolidated financial

statements.

Apart from the information disclosed in note 17 to the consolidated financial statements, the group does not currently believe that there

are any legal proceedings, government or regulatory investigations that may have a material adverse impact on the operations or financial

condition of the group. In respect of each of the claims described in note 17, the nature and progression of such proceedings and

investigations can make it difficult to predict the impact they will have on the group. Many factors prevent us from making these

assessments with certainty, including, that the proceedings of investigations are in early stages, no damages or remedies have been

specified, and/or the frequently slow pace of litigation.

Report of the Directors continued

Employee engagement

Engaging with our colleagues is critical to creating a culture where they can be their best and contribute to our purpose, ambition, strategy

and long-term success. Engaging with our colleagues takes many forms, including through:

– the BT Group plc Board receiving regular updates from the Chief Executive and Chief Human Resources Officer on colleagues, key

people strategy initiatives, culture and overall sentiment in the organisation

– our BT Group plc Designated Non-Executive Director for Workforce Engagement and the Colleague Board. The Colleague Board was

in place throughout most of FY24, however the Board made the decision to disband the Colleague Board and going forward the

Designated Non-Executive Director for Workforce Engagement will engage in a comprehensive colleague outreach programme in its

place

– our quarterly Your Say colleague engagement surveys

– regular colleague communications.

Colleagues are kept well informed on matters such as the strategy and performance of the group, including after certain key events such

as results and trading updates. We work with our highly active, engaged and award-winning People Networks. These colleague-driven

groups raise awareness and advocate for change both inside and outside BT Group.

Employees with disabilities

We’re an inclusive employer and actively encourage the recruitment, development, promotion and retention of disabled people.

In FY24 we focused on three areas to support our disabled colleagues:

– we committed to improving our workplace adjustments process so that colleagues can get the adjustments that they need when they

need them, with a new initiative in the UK launched in July with plans to extend the rollout to India

– a development programme specifically aimed at disabled colleagues who are junior managers has been piloted, and work is under

consideration for rollout to all career levels

– we want all colleagues and people managers to understand disability and how to support disabled colleagues, so we have launched

three disability advocacy training pathways and published them to our internal disability hub for access by all colleagues.

We continued our partnership with the Business Disability Forum, and we will be working to make sure that we are able to meet and

exceed the commitments we made to obtain our Disability Confident leader status and our membership of Valuable 500.

Political donations

Our policy is that no company in the group will make contributions in cash or in kind to any political party, whether by gift or loan. However,

the definition of political donations used in the 2006 Act is significantly broader than the sense in which these words are ordinarily used.

The 2006 Act’s remit could cover making members of Parliament and others in the political world aware of key industry issues and matters

affecting BT Group plc, and enhancing their understanding of the group.

The authority for political donations requested at the 2024 AGM is not intended to change this policy. It does, however, ensure that the

group continues to act within the provisions of the 2006 Act, requiring companies to obtain shareholder authority before they make

donations to political parties and/or political organisations as defined in the 2006 Act. During FY24, BT Group plc’s wholly owned

subsidiary, British Telecommunications plc, paid the costs of attending events at (i) the Labour Party Conference and Business

Conference; (ii) the Conservative Party Conference; and (iii) the Liberal Democrats Business Day. These costs totalled £9,343 (FY23:

£5,848). No company in the BT Group made any loans to any political party.

Branches

Details of our branches outside the UK are set out on pages 139 to 143.

Governance Statement

The Board aspires to have and maintain good standards of corporate governance and has adopted a corporate governance code

appropriate for the company.

The Board has chosen not to adopt and report against the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code, which in its view is designed, and is

therefore more appropriate, for premium listed companies. Whilst we support the introduction of the Wates Corporate Governance

Principles for Large Private Companies, we consider that they are less suitable for a wholly-owned subsidiary of a premium listed

Company. We have therefore adopted our own corporate governance code in the form of four overarching principles as set out below,

which we believe are appropriate for the company and are designed to ensure effective decision-making to promote the company’s long-

term success.

The principles which underpin our corporate governance code and how these principles have been applied during the financial year ended

31st March 2024 are shown below:

Principle One: Leadership

“The Company is led by a Board of directors who promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its members, ensuring that it

operates with a clear sense of purpose that aligns with its values, strategy and culture.”

The strategy and culture of the Company is underpinned by a clear vision of the company’s purpose and overall values which are

articulated through the leadership of the Board (having reference to the BT Group’s strategy, culture and values). Given the importance

of this, the Board seeks to promote the values, strategy and culture at different levels within the business. Culture remains an area of focus,

with the Board promoting ethical leadership and accountability to achieve a dynamic and positive culture.

Principle Two: Board composition

“The Board has an appropriate composition and size to enable it to effectively lead the Company.”

The size and composition of the Board is appropriate and proportionate for the business of the Company. The directors have an

appropriate combination of technical, financial and commercial skills, collectively demonstrating a high-level understanding of the

Company’s business model and its impact on key stakeholders.

All appointments to the Board are based on merit and objective criteria. Diversity remains an area of focus as we continue to build a

workforce that reflects the diversity of our customers and the communities we serve.

Report of the Directors continued

Principle Three: Directors’ responsibilities

“Directors have a clear understanding of their accountability and responsibilities. The Board’s policies and practices should support

effective decision making and independent challenge.”

– On joining the Board, new directors receive information on the company, are offered advice from the company secretary, and can

request training tailored to their specific experience and knowledge, covering both their legal duties and the business of the company.

– On an ongoing basis, directors update their skills, knowledge and familiarity with the company in a range of different ways by meeting

with senior management, visiting operations and by attending appropriate external and internal seminars and training sessions. This

helps by continuing to contribute to their informed and sound decision-making.

– Directors have a responsibility to declare any conflict of interest at the beginning of each Board meeting. Should a conflict arise, it would

be the responsibility of the chair in conjunction with the non-conflicted directors to agree whether the director may participate and/or

vote on the specific item.

The directors have equal voting rights when making decisions, except the chair, who has a casting vote. All directors have access to the

advice and services of the company secretary and may, if they wish, take professional advice at the company’s expense.

Principle Four: Stakeholder relationship and engagement

“The Board should build and maintain effective relationships with stakeholders.”

The Board seeks to understand the views of its key stakeholders, and the impact of its behaviour and business on employees, customers,

suppliers and society more broadly. Whilst for reasons of efficiency and effectiveness, much of this engagement takes place at a BT Group

level, the Board receives updates on its key stakeholders and the mechanisms and initiatives for engagement. For more information on

group level engagement with key stakeholders, see the BT Group plc 2024 Annual Report and the Section 172 statement.

When making decisions, the Board considers the potential impact on its key stakeholders, including the BT Pension Scheme and its

members.

Cross reference to the Strategic report

We have chosen to include the following information in the Strategic report in line with the Companies Act 2006 (otherwise required by

law to be included in the Report of the Directors):

– An indication of likely future developments in the business of the Company and its group (pages 3 to 15)

– An indication of our research and development activities (page 15)

– Information on how the group (and BT Group plc) engages with colleagues, and how regard has been had to the interests of colleagues

and the need to foster business relationships with suppliers, customers and others, and the effect of that regard during the year (pages

7 to 10)

– Anti-bribery and corruption (page 9)

– Social and community (pages 8 to 9)

– Human rights (page 15)

By order of the Board

Simon Lowth

Director

26 July 2024

Report of the Directors continued

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the group and parent company

financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare group and parent company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law

they are required to prepare the group financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards and with

the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The parent company meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100 and the

company financial statements are prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (FRS 101

“Reduced disclosure framework”, and applicable law).

Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of

the state of affairs of the group and parent company, and of the group’s profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the group and

parent company financial statements, the directors are required to:

– select suitable accounting policies and apply them consistently

– make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, reliable and, in respect of the parent Company financial

statements only, prudent

– state whether the group financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the UK-adopted international accounting

standards

– state whether applicable UK accounting standards have been followed with regards to the parent company financial

statements, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the parent company financial statements

– assess the group and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern and disclose, as applicable, matters related to

going concern

– use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease

operations or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent company’s

transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy, at any time, the financial position of the parent company, and enable them to ensure

that its financial statements comply with the 2006 Act. They are responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to

enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. They have general

responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the group and to prevent and detect fraud

and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the directors are also responsible for preparing an annual strategic report and a directors’ report

that comply with such law and regulation.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the company's

website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other

jurisdictions.

In accordance with Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule (“DTR”) 4.1.16R, the financial statements will form part of the annual

financial report prepared under DTR 4.1.17R and 4.1.18R. The auditor’s report on these financial statements provides no assurance over

whether the annual financial report has been prepared in accordance with those requirements.

Responsibility statement of the Board in respect of the annual financial report

We confirm that, to the best of our knowledge:

– the Financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of

the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the group and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as

a whole

– the Strategic report and the Report of the directors include a fair review of the development and performance of the business

and the position of the group and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of

the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

We consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information

necessary for shareholders to assess the group’s position, performance, business model and strategy.

This responsibility statement was approved by the Board on 26 July 2024 and was signed on its behalf by

Simon Lowth

Director

26 July 2024

Statement of directors’ responsibilities

1. Our opinion is unmodified

We have audited the financial statements of British

Telecommunications plc (“the Company”) for the year ended 31

March 2024 which comprise the Group income statement, Group

statement of comprehensive income, Group balance sheet, Group

statement of changes in equity, Group cash flow statement,

company balance sheet, company statement of changes in equity,

and the related notes, including the accounting policies.

In our opinion:

– the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of

the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 31 March

2024 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

– the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in

accordance with UK-adopted international accounting

standards;

– the Parent Company financial statements have been properly

prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, including

FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework; and

– the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with

the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with International

Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our

responsibilities are described below. We believe that the audit

evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for

our opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with our report to the

board.

We were first appointed as auditor by the shareholders for the year

ended 31 March 2019. The period of total uninterrupted

engagement is for the 6 financial years ended 31 March 2024.

Jonathan Mills has succeeded John Luke as the Lead Engagement

Partner for the year ended 31 March 2024. The Group

Engagement partner is required to rotate every 5 years. As these

are the first set of the Group’s financial statements signed by

Jonathan Mills, he will be required to rotate off after the FY28

audit. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and we

remain independent of the Group in accordance with, UK ethical

requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to

listed public interest entities. No non-audit services prohibited by

that standard were provided.

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of

material misstatement

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional

judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial

statements and include the most significant assessed risks of

material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by

us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall

audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and

directing the efforts of the engagement team. We summarise

below the key audit matters), in decreasing order of audit

significance, in arriving at our audit opinion above, together with

our key audit procedures to address those matters and, as required

for public interest entities, our results from those procedures.

These matters were addressed, and our results are based on

procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the

purpose of, our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in

forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to

that opinion, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these

matters.

2.1 Accuracy of revenue due to the complex

billing systems


	FY24	FY23
Total revenue	£20.8bn	£20.7bn

Our assessment of risk vs FY23


é	Increased Refer to pages 50 to 53 (financial disclosures note 5 Revenue)

The risk - processing error

BT non-long-term contract revenue consists of a large number of

low value transactions. The Group operates a number of distinct

billing and order-entry systems and the IT landscape underpinning

the end-to-end revenue process is complex.

There are multiple products sold at multiple rates with varying

price structures in place. These represent a combination of

service-based products, such as fixed line telephony, as well as

goods, such as the provision of mobile handsets.

The revenue recognition of non-long-term contract revenue is not

subject to significant judgement. However, due to the large

number of transactions, manual nature of order entry and

complexity of the billing systems, this is considered to be an area of

most significance in our audit. Within Business we have identified a

significant risk of processing error in relation to some billing

systems. In addition, the bespoke nature of the pricing structure

within some of Business' contracts means that there is a higher risk

of processing error and fraud in relation to a proportion of

Business' revenue derived from certain billing systems.

Subjective estimate of refund liabilities in Business

The bespoke pricing structure results in a risk of billing inaccuracies

within a proportion of Business’ revenue and so over the

identification of financial liabilities for associated customer

refunds. The Group have estimated refund liabilities based on the

results of a sample of billing items leading to estimation

uncertainty over the refund liabilities.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk assessment

for audit planning purposes, we determined that the quantum of

refund liabilities had a high degree of estimation uncertainty, with a

potential range of reasonable outcomes greater than our

materiality for the financial statements as a whole. In conducting

our final audit work, we reassessed the degree of estimation

uncertainty to be less than materiality. The financial statements

(note 5) disclose the range estimated by the Group.

Our response - our procedures to address risk included:

Process understanding: Obtaining an understanding of the

revenue processes by observing transactions from customer

initiation to cash received for certain revenue streams.

Test of details: Comparing a sample of revenue transactions,

including credit adjustments, to supporting evidence e.g. customer

bills, contracts, price lists and cash received (all where applicable).

Tests of detail: Agreeing a sample of year end trade receivables

to cash received after year end.

Tests of detail: Within Business, we compared the results of our

test of detail over revenue, including error rates by product, in the

current and previous years’ audits, to the liabilities held for

customer refunds and challenged the Group’s assessment of

refund liabilities based on billing errors identified through our

testing and the legal and regulatory risks in relation to billing errors

for the products impacted.

Assessing transparency: Considering the adequacy of the

Group’s disclosures in respect of the sensitivity of the refund

liability to error rates and legal risks.

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the

members of British Telecommunications plc

We performed the detailed tests above rather than seeking to rely

on the Group’s controls because our knowledge of the design of

these controls indicated that we would be unlikely to obtain the

required evidence to support reliance on them.

Areas of particular auditor judgement

We exercised judgement over the adequacy of liabilities for

customer refunds in light of overstatements of revenue identified

through our testing over pricing within Business. Particular

judgement was needed over the applicable error rate and periods

impacted.

Our results

The results of our testing were satisfactory (FY23: satisfactory) and

we considered the revenue relating to non-long-term contract

revenue and the estimate of refund liabilities and related

disclosures to be acceptable (FY23: acceptable).

2.2 Impairment of goodwill attributable to the

Business CGU (Group)


	FY24	FY23
Goodwill allocated to Business CGU	£3.56bn	£4.08bn
Impairment charge	£0.49bn	£0.0bn

Our assessment of risk vs FY23


…	New Refer to page 62 (note 12 accounting policy impairment of goodwill) and pages 62 to 64 (financial disclosures note 12 Intangible assets)

The risk - forecast-based assessment

The recoverability of goodwill allocated to the Business cash

generating unit (“CGU”) is assessed using value in use which is

based on the forecast cashflow, within a discounted cashflow

model.

For the Business CGU, the execution risk associated with the

transition from legacy to next generation telecommunication

products and services in conjunction with ongoing cost reductions

and uncertainty in relation to the economic outlook renders

precise forecasting of the underlying cash flows challenging. There

is also estimation uncertainty over the appropriate terminal growth

rate and discount rate applied to the projected cashflows.

In the current year the Group recognized an impairment charge

against goodwill allocated to the Business CGU of £488mn (FY23:

nil), reflecting the execution risk of the CGU’s business plan and

increased uncertainty over the projected cashflows.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk assessment,

we determined that the value in use used to support the

recoverable amount of the goodwill allocated to the Business CGU

has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, with a potential range

of reasonable impairment outcomes greater than our materiality

for the financial statements as a whole, and possibly many times

that amount. The financial statements (note 12) disclose the

sensitivity estimated by the Group.

Our response - our procedures to address the risk

included:

Our valuation expertise: Using our own valuation specialists,

assessing the methodology, principles, and integrity of the value in

use model.

Benchmarking assumptions: Challenging the appropriateness of

the Business CGU discount rate and long-term growth rate by

determining an independent discount rate and benchmarking the

long term growth rate against extremally derived data and analyst

reports.

Our sector experience: Using our sector experience inspecting

the Group’s medium term strategic plans used to derive the

forecast cash flows and comparing the assumptions applied by the

directors in the forecast cashflows against those plans, and the

forecasts approved by the Board.

Assessing consistency: Assessing the consistency of the

forecast used by the Group across different areas such as group

goodwill impairment testing and the viability assessment.

Historical comparison: Assessing the historical accuracy of the

forecasts used in the Business CGU’s impairment model by

considering actual performance against prior year budgets and

challenging whether the forecast cashflows were risk adjusted

based on the downside risks and opportunities identified by the

Group.

Sensitivity analysis: Considering the sensitivity of the

recoverable amount to reasonably possible changes in the key

inputs and assumptions used in determining the value in use of the

Business CGU and the resulting impairment charge including the

impact of the changes in EBITDA compound annual growth rate in

the forecast period, long term growth rate and discount rate.

Comparing valuations: Performing a stand back assessment by

comparing the combined value in use of all of the CGUs of the

Group to the Group’s market capitalisation to assess the

reasonableness of those cash flows and assessing and challenging

the difference and whether the assumptions applied in the

impairment test were acceptable.

Assessing transparency: Assessing whether the Group’s

disclosures about the sensitivity of the outcome of the impairment

assessment to changes in key assumptions reflected the risks

inherent in the recoverable amount of goodwill.

We performed the detailed tests above rather than seeking to rely

on any of the Group’s controls because the nature of the balance is

such that we would expect to obtain audit evidence primarily

through the detailed procedures described.

Areas of particular auditor judgement

We identified the following as the areas of particular auditor

judgement:

– Subjective and complex auditor judgement was required in

evaluating the key assumptions included in the estimation of the

value in use. This includes the quantum of risk adjustments

needed to be applied to forecasts to account for the underlying

execution risk associated with the transition from legacy to next

generation products and services, in conjunction with an

ongoing project to reduce the CGU’s cost base to deliver those

products and services. This is in addition to the evaluation of the

terminal growth rate and discount rate.

– We performed an assessment of whether an understatement of

the impairment charge identified through these procedures was

material.

Our results

We found the goodwill allocated to the Business CGU balance, and

the related impairment charge, to be acceptable (FY23:

acceptable).

2.3 Valuation of defined benefit obligation of

the BT Pension Scheme (BTPS)


	FY24	FY23
Group balance sheet: BTPS Obligation	£40.0bn	£41.6bn
Parent Company balance sheet: BTPS obligation	£40.0bn	£41.6bn

Our assessment of risk vs FY23


çè	Unchanged Refer to page 76 and 79 (note 18 accounting policy Retirement benefits) and pages 76 to 85 (disclosures note 18 Retirement benefit plans).

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued

The risk - subjective valuation

The valuation of the BT pension scheme (‘BTPS’) defined benefit

obligation is complex and requires a significant degree of

estimation in determining the assumptions. It is dependent on key

actuarial assumptions, including the discount rate, retail price

index (‘RPI’) and mortality assumptions. A change in the

methodology applied or small changes in the key actuarial

assumptions may have a significant impact on the measurement of

the defined benefit obligation.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk assessment,

we determined the valuation of the BTPS defined benefit

obligation had a high degree of estimation uncertainty, with a

potential range of reasonable outcomes greater than our

materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and possibly

many times that amount. The financial statements (note 18)

disclose the sensitivity of key assumptions for the obligation

estimated by the Group.

Our response - our procedures to address the risk

included:

Evaluation of the Group’s expert: Evaluating the scope,

competency and objectivity of the Group’s external experts who

assisted in determining the actuarial assumptions used to

determine the defined benefit obligation.

Our actuarial expertise: With the support of our own actuarial

specialists, we performed the following:

– Evaluating the judgements made and the appropriateness of

methodologies used by the Group and Group’s experts in

determining the key actuarial assumptions;

– Comparing the assumptions used by Group to our

independently compiled expected ranges based on market

observable indices and our market experience.

Assessing transparency: Considering the adequacy of the

Group’s disclosures in respect of the sensitivity of the obligation to

these assumptions.

We performed the tests above rather than seeking to rely on any of

the Group’s controls because the nature of the balance is such that

we would expect to obtain audit evidence primarily through the

detailed procedures described.

Areas of particular auditor judgement

We identified the following as the areas of particular auditor

judgement:

– Subjective and complex auditor judgement was required in

evaluating the key actuarial assumptions used by the Group

(including the discount rate, retail price index and mortality

assumptions).

Our results

We found the valuation of the defined benefit obligation of the BT

Pension Scheme and related disclosures to be acceptable (FY23:

acceptable).

2.4 Valuation of unquoted assets in the BT

Pension Scheme (BTPS)


	FY24	FY23
Longevity Insurance Contract for the BTPS: included within the unquoted BTPS plan assets	£0.9bn	£0.8bn

Our assessment of risk vs FY23


	Decreased Refer to page 76 and 79 (note 18 accounting policy Retirement benefits) and pages 76 to 85 (disclosures note 18 Retirement benefit plans).

The risk - subjective valuation

The BTPS has unquoted plan assets in private equity, UK and

overseas property, mature infrastructure, longevity insurance

contract, secure income and non-core credit assets which are

classified as fair value level three assets.

Significant judgement is required to determine the value of a

portion of these unquoted investments, which are valued based on

inputs that are not directly observable. The Group engages

valuation experts to value these assets.

In FY24, the most significant valuation judgement of the above is in

respect of a longevity insurance contract. The key unobservable

inputs used to determine the fair value of that longevity insurance

contract include the discount rate and projected future mortality.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk assessment,

we determined that the valuation of a longevity insurance contract

asset held by the BTPS has a high degree of estimation

uncertainty, with a potential range of reasonable outcomes greater

than our materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and

possibly many times that amount.

The financial statements (note 18) disclose the key sensitivities of

the valuation of plan assets to changes in key assumptions.

Our response - our procedures to address the risk

included:

Assessing valuers’ credentials: Evaluating the scope,

competencies and objectivity of the Group’s external experts who

assisted in determining the key unobservable inputs and the

valuation of a longevity insurance contract.

Comparing valuations: Challenging, with the support of our

own actuarial specialists, the fair value of a longevity insurance

contract by comparing with an independently developed range of

fair values using assumptions, such as the discount rate and

projected future mortality, based on external data. External data

included market views of the impact from COVID on future

mortality, market discount rates and the demographic analysis

available from the 30 June 2023 triennial funding valuation.

Assessing transparency: Considering the adequacy of the

Group’s disclosures in respect of the sensitivity of a longevity

insurance contract asset valuation to these assumptions.

We performed the detailed tests above rather than seeking to rely

on any of the Group's controls because our knowledge of the

design of these controls indicated that we would not be able to

obtain the required evidence to support reliance on controls.

Areas of particular auditor judgement

We identified the following as the areas of particular auditor

judgement:

– Subjective and complex auditor judgement was required in

evaluating the key assumptions used by the Group (including the

discount rate and projected mortality)

Our results

We found the valuation of a longevity insurance contract and

related disclosures to be acceptable (FY23: acceptable).

2.5 Impairment of goodwill attributable to the

Business CGU (Parent company)


	FY24	FY23
Goodwill allocated to Business CGU	£0.62bn	£0.53bn
Impairment charge	£0.62bn	£0.0bn

Our assessment of risk vs FY23


…	New Refer to page 113 and 114 (note 4 accounting policy Intangible assets) and 113 to 115 (disclosures note 4 Intangible assets)

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued

The risk - forecast-based assessment

The recoverability of goodwill allocated to the Company’s Business

cash generating unit (“CGU”) is assessed using fair value less costs

of disposal (FVLCOD) approach which is based on the forecast

cashflow taking into account a market participant’s ability to use

the asset in its ‘highest and best use’, within a discounted cashflow

model.

For the Business CGU, the execution risk associated with the

transition from legacy to next generation telecommunication

products and services in conjunction with ongoing cost reductions

and uncertainty in relation to the economic outlook renders

precise forecasting of the underlying cash flows challenging. There

is also judgement over the cost allocations to the Company’s

Business CGU and costs of disposal; and estimation uncertainty

over the appropriate terminal growth rate and discount rate

applied to the projected cashflows.

In the current year, the Company recognized an impairment

charge against goodwill allocated to the Business CGU of £624mn

(FY23: nil), reflecting the execution risk of the CGU’s business plan

and increased uncertainty over the projected cashflows.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk assessment,

we determined that the FVLCOD used to support the recoverable

amount of the goodwill allocated to the Business CGU has a high

degree of estimation uncertainty, with a potential range of

reasonable impairment outcomes greater than our materiality for

the financial statements as a whole, and possibly many times that

amount. The parent company financial statements (note 4)

disclose the sensitivity estimated by the Company.

Our response - our procedures to address the risk

included:

Our valuation expertise: Using our own valuation specialists,

assessing the methodology, principles, and integrity of the

FVLCOD model.

Benchmarking assumptions: Challenging the appropriateness

of the Business CGU’s discount rate and long-term growth rate by

determining an independent discount rate and benchmarking the

long-term growth rate against extremally derived data and analyst

reports.

Our sector experience: Using our sector experience inspecting

the Group’s medium term strategic plans used to derive the

forecast cash flows and comparing the assumptions applied by the

directors in the forecast cashflows against those plans, and the

forecasts approved by the Board.

Assessing consistency: Assessing the consistency of the

forecast used by the Company across different areas such as group

goodwill impairment testing and the viability assessment.

Assessing the consistency of the cost allocation methodology used

to allocate costs between CGUs and whether this forms a

reasonable basis of allocation.

Historical comparison: Assessing the historical accuracy of the

forecasts used in Group’s Business CGU’s impairment model by

considering actual performance against prior year budgets and

challenging whether the forecast cashflows were risk adjusted

based on the downside risks and opportunities identified by the

Company.

Sensitivity analysis: Considering the sensitivity of the

recoverable amount to reasonably possible changes in the key

inputs and assumptions used in determining the FVLCOD of the

Business CGU and the resulting impairment charge including the

impact of the changes in restructuring benefits impacting the

terminal period EBITDA, costs of disposal, long term growth rate

and discount rate.

Comparing valuations: Performing a stand back assessment by

comparing the recoverable amount using value in use, FVLCOD –

income approach, FVLCOD – market multiple approach methods

to assess the reasonableness of those cash flows and assessing and

challenging the difference and whether the assumptions applied in

the impairment test were acceptable.

Methodology implementation: Assessing the appropriateness

of the methodology used in the current period, including

consideration of the estimate made in respect of costs of disposal,

and whether the forecast restructuring benefits qualified for

inclusion in the FVLCOD model.

Assessing transparency: Assessing whether the Company’s

disclosures about the sensitivity of the outcome of the impairment

assessment to changes in key assumptions reflected the risks

inherent in the recoverable amount of goodwill.

We performed the detailed tests above rather than seeking to rely

on any of the Company’s controls because the nature of the

balance is such that we would expect to obtain audit evidence

primarily through the detailed procedures described.

Areas of particular auditor judgement

We identified the following as the areas of particular auditor

judgement:

– Subjective and complex auditor judgement was required in

evaluating the key assumptions included in the estimation of the

FVLCOD. This includes the quantum of risk adjustments needed

to be applied to forecasts to account for the underlying

execution risk associated with the transition from legacy to next

generation products and services, in conjunction with an

ongoing project to reduce the CGU’s cost base to deliver those

products and services and cost allocations to the Company’s

Business CGU. This is in addition to the evaluation of the costs of

disposal, terminal growth rate and discount rate.

– We performed an assessment of whether an overstatement of

the impairment charge identified through these procedures was

material.

Our results

We found the goodwill allocated to the Business CGU balance, and

the related impairment charge, to be acceptable (FY23:

acceptable).

The TNT Sport Joint venture company is in its second year of

operations and all significant risks associated with the initial

recognition of the balances in FY23 relating to the disposal of the

BT sports division and subsequent re-investment in the Sports JV

are no longer applicable and therefore we have not identified a

related KAM in our audit report in FY24. We continue to perform

procedures over the ongoing measurement of balances held in

relation to BT’s investment in the Sports JV.

3. Our application of materiality and an overview

of the scope of our audit

Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at

£135 million (2023: £95 million), determined with reference to a

benchmark of Total Revenue (of which it represents 0.65% (FY23:

4.74% of normalised PBTCO)).

A key judgement in determining materiality was selecting the most

relevant metric as the benchmark, considering which metrics have

the greatest bearing on shareholder decisions. The relevant

metrics considered for the current year included Revenue,

Earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation

(“EBITDA”), Profit before tax from continuing operations

(“PBTCO”), and Total assets. The selected benchmark for the

current year is "Revenue," which represents a change from the

prior period where the selected benchmark was PBTCO. The

change to Revenue is deemed appropriate given shareholders'

focus on revenue and cash generation and the current stage of the

Fibre To The Premise (“FTTP”) capital investment program. In the

context of the high levels of capital investment for future growth,

Revenue is considered a more representative and stable measure

of performance.

Materiality for the Parent Company financial statements as a whole

was set at £110 million (2023: £80 million), determined with

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued

reference to a benchmark of Parent Company total net assets, of

which it represents 0.63% (2023: 0.52%), and chosen to be lower

than materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole.

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual

account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower

threshold, performance materiality, so as to reduce to an

acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial

misstatements in individual account balances add up to a material

amount across the financial statements as a whole.

Performance materiality was set at 65% (2023: 65%) of materiality

for the financial statements as a whole, which equates to £88

million (2023: £62 million) for the Group and £72 million (2023:

£52 million) for the Parent Company. We applied this percentage

in our determination of performance materiality based on the level

of identified control deficiencies during the prior years.

We agreed to report the Board any corrected or uncorrected

identified misstatements exceeding £5 million (2023: £4 million),

in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted

reporting on qualitative grounds.

Consistent with prior year, we define components of the Group

based on legal entity. Of the Group’s 214 (2023: 225) reporting

components, we subjected 2 (2023: 2) to full scope audits and 1

(2023: 1) to an audit of the payroll account balance. Testing of IT

Systems and Litigation and Claims was performed by the Group

audit team on behalf of the Group and component teams.

The components within the scope of our work accounted for the

following percentages:


	Group revenue	Group profit before tax	Group total assets
Audits for group reporting purposes	87%	83%	96%
2023	86%	78%	90%

The remaining 13% (2023: 14%) of total Group revenue, 17%

(2023: 22%) of Group profit before tax and 4% (2023: 10%) of

total Group assets is represented by 211 (2023: 222) reporting

components, none of which individually represented more than 5%

(2023: 5%) of any of total Group revenue, Group profit before tax

or total Group assets. For the residual components, we performed

analysis at an aggregated Group level to re-examine our

assessment that there were no significant risks of material

misstatement within these.

The work on all components, excluding the audit of EE Limited,

was performed by the Group audit team. The Parent Company was

also audited by the Group audit team. The Group team instructed

the EE component auditor as to the significant areas to be covered,

including the risks identified above and the information to be

reported back.

The Group team approved the component materialities, which

ranged from £50 million to £110 million (2023: £35 million to £80

million), having regard to the mix and size and risk profile of the

Group across components.

The Group audit team met frequently on video conference

meetings and had in person meetings with the EE component audit

team as part of the audit planning and completion stages to

explain our audit instructions and discuss the component auditor’s

plans as well as performing file reviews upon the completion of the

component auditor’s engagement.

At these meetings with component auditors, the findings reported

to the Group team were discussed in more detail, and any further

work required by the Group team was then performed by the

component auditor.

The scope of the audit work performed was predominately

substantive as we placed limited reliance upon the Group’s internal

control over financial reporting.

4. Going concern

The directors have prepared the financial statements on the going

concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the Group or the

Company or to cease their operations, and as they have concluded

that the Group’s and the Company’s financial position means that

this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no material

uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt over their

ability to continue as a going concern for at least a year from the

date of approval of the financial statements (“the going concern

period”).

We used our knowledge of the Group, its industry, and the general

economic environment to identify the inherent risks to its business

model and analysed how those risks might affect the Group’s and

Company’s financial resources or ability to continue operations

over the going concern period. The risks that we considered most

likely to adversely affect the Group’s and Company’s available

financial resources over this period were:

– The impact of rising energy prices, supply shortages, and

inflationary pressures;

– The impact of significant supply chain disruptions driven by geo-

political factors;

– The impact of plans to deliver new initiatives required to meet

savings commitments not being realised;

– The likelihood of existing litigation crystallising within the going

concern period.

We also considered less predictable but realistic second order

impacts, such as a large scale cyber breach, the UK experiencing a

significant recession, adverse changes to telecoms regulation,

which could result in a rapid reduction of available financial

resources.

We considered whether these risks could plausibly affect the

liquidity in the going concern period by comparing severe but

plausible downside scenarios that could arise from these risks

individually and collectively against the level of available financial

resources indicated by the Group’s financial forecasts.

Our procedures also included an assessment of whether the going

concern disclosure in note 1 to the financial statements gives a full

and accurate description of the directors’ assessment of going

concern. Accordingly, based on those procedures, we found the

directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting without any

material uncertainty for the Group and the Company to be

acceptable. However, as we cannot predict all future events or

conditions and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that

are inconsistent with judgements that were reasonable at the time

they were made, the above conclusions are not a guarantee that

the Group or the Company will continue in operation.

Our conclusions based on this work

– we consider that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of

accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is

appropriate;

– we have not identified, and concur with the directors’

assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to

events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast

significant doubt on the Group’s or Company's ability to

continue as a going concern for the going concern period; and

– we found the going concern disclosure in note 1 to be

acceptable.

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and

as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent

with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made,

the above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group or the

Company will continue in operation.

5. Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations -

ability to detect

Identifying and responding to risks of material

misstatement due to fraud

To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud

risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an

incentive or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to

commit fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included:

– enquiring of directors, the board, internal audit and inspection of

policy documentation as to the Group’s high-level policies and

procedures to prevent and detect fraud, including the internal

audit function, and the Group’s channel for “whistleblowing”, as

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued

well as whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or

alleged fraud;

– reading Board, Remuneration Committee and Executive

Committee minutes;

– considering remuneration incentive schemes and performance

targets for management and directors including the EPS target

for management remuneration;

– using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or

unexpected relationships.

We communicated identified fraud risks throughout the audit

team and remained alert to any indications of fraud throughout the

audit. This included communication from the Group to full scope

component audit teams of relevant fraud risks identified at the

Group level and request to full scope component audit teams to

report to the Group audit team any instances of fraud that could

give rise to a material misstatement at Group.

As required by auditing standards, and taking into account possible

pressures to meet profit targets, recent revisions to guidance and

our overall knowledge of the control environment, we performed

procedures to address the risk of management override of controls

and the risk of fraudulent revenue recognition in relation to certain

revenue streams in Business in particular the risk that Group and

component management may be in a position to make

inappropriate accounting entries and the risk that certain revenue

streams in Business are overstated given the bespoke nature of the

pricing structure within these contracts and associated risk of

processing errors.

We did not identify any additional fraud risks.

We performed procedures including:

– identifying journal entries to test for all full scope components

based on risk criteria and comparing the identified entries to

supporting documentation. These included those posted by

senior finance management, those posted and approved by the

same user and those posted to unusual or seldom used accounts;

– assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting

estimates are indicative of a potential bias;

– evaluating the business purpose for significant unusual

transactions.

Identifying and responding to risks of material

misstatement due to non-compliance with laws and

regulations

We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably

be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements

from our general commercial and sector experience, through

discussion with the directors and others management (as required

by auditing standards), and from inspection of the Group’s

regulatory and legal correspondence and discussed with the

directors and other management the policies and procedures

regarding compliance with laws and regulations.

As the Group is regulated, our assessment of risks involved gaining

an understanding of the control environment including the Group’s

procedures for complying with regulatory requirements.

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout our

team and remained alert to any indications of non-compliance

throughout the audit. This included communication from the

Group to full-scope component audit teams of relevant laws and

regulations identified at the Group level, and a request for full

scope component auditors to report to the Group team any

instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations that could

give rise to a material misstatement at Group.

The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the financial

statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group is subject to laws and regulations that directly

affect the financial statements including financial reporting

legislation (including related companies legislation), distributable

profits legislation, taxation legislation, and pension legislation and

we assessed the extent of compliance with these laws and

regulations as part of our procedures on the related financial

statement items.

Secondly, the Group is subject to many other laws and regulations

where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material

effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial statements, for

instance through the imposition of fines or litigation or the loss of

the Group’s licence to operate. We identified the following areas as

those most likely to have such an effect: anti-bribery, regulations

affecting telecommunication providers, and certain aspects of

company legislation recognising the financial and regulated nature

of the Group’s activities (including compliance with Ofcom

regulation) and its legal form. Auditing standards limit the required

audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws and

regulations to enquiry of the directors and other management and

inspection of regulatory and legal correspondence, if any.

Therefore, if a breach of operational regulations is not disclosed to

us or evident from relevant correspondence, an audit will not

detect that breach.

We discussed with the board other matters related to actual or

suspected breaches of laws or regulations, for which disclosure is

not necessary, and considered any implications for our audit.

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or

breaches of law or regulation

Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an

unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material

misstatements in the financial statements, even though we have

properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with

auditing standards. For example, the further removed non-

compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and

transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely the

inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards

would identify it.

In addition, as with any audit, there remained a higher risk of non-

detection of fraud, as these may involve collusion, forgery,

intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of

internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect

material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing

non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non-

compliance with all laws and regulations.

6. We have nothing to report on the other

information in the Annual Report

The directors are responsible for the other information presented

in the Annual Report together with the financial statements. Our

opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other

information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion

or, except as explicitly stated below, any form of assurance

conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so,

consider whether, based on our financial statements audit work,

the information therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with

the financial statements or our audit knowledge. Based solely on

that work we have not identified material misstatements in the

other information.

Strategic report and directors' report

Based solely on our work on the other information:

– we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic

report and the directors’ report;

– in our opinion the information given in those reports for the

financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and

– in our opinion those reports have been prepared in accordance

with the Companies Act 2006.

7. We have nothing to report on the other matters

on which we are required to report by exception

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you if,

in our opinion:

– adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent

Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been

received from branches not visited by us; or

– the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the

directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in

agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

– certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law

are not made; or

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued

– we have not received all the information and explanations we

require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

8. Respective responsibilities

Directors’ responsibilities

As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 31, the

directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial

statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair

view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable

the preparation of financial statements that are free from material

misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group

and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern,

disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and

using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either

intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease

operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether

the financial statements as a whole are free from material

misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our

opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level

of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in

accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material

misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or

error and are considered material if, individually or in aggregate,

they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic

decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s

website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

9. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we

owe our responsibilities

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in

accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006

and the terms of our engagement by the Company. Our audit work

has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s

members those matters we are required to state to them in an

auditor’s report and the further matters we are required to state to

them in accordance with the terms agreed with the Company, and

for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do

not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the

Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit

work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Jonathan Mills

for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor

Chartered Accountants

15 Canada Square

London

E14 5GL

26 July 2024

KPMG LLP’s Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of British

Telecommunications plc continued


		Before specific items (‘Adjusted’)	Specific itemsa	Total (Reported)
	Notes	£m	£m	£m
Revenue	4, 5	20,835	(38)	20,797
Operating costs	6	(17,632)	(949)	(18,581)
Of which net impairment losses on trade receivables and contract assets		(165)	—	(165)
Of which goodwill impairment	12	—	(488)	(488)
Operating profit (loss)	4	3,203	(987)	2,216
Finance expense	25	(1,067)	(121)	(1,188)
Finance income		890	—	890
Net finance expense		(177)	(121)	(298)
Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures	22	(21)	—	(21)
Profit (loss) before taxation		3,005	(1,108)	1,897
Taxation	10	(476)	145	(331)
Profit (loss) for the year		2,529	(963)	1,566

Group income statement

Year ended 31 March 2023


		Before specific items (‘Adjusted’)	Specific itemsa	Total (Reported)
	Notes	£m	£m	£m
Revenue	4, 5	20,669	12	20,681
Operating costs	6	(17,492)	(568)	(18,060)
Of which net impairment losses on trade receivables and contract assets		(138)	—	(138)
Of which goodwill impairment	12	—	—	—
Operating profit (loss)	4	3,177	(556)	2,621
Finance expense	25	(894)	(5)	(899)
Finance income		452	—	452
Net finance expense		(442)	(5)	(447)
Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures	22	(59)	—	(59)
Profit (loss) before taxation		2,676	(561)	2,115
Taxation	10	(132)	308	176
Profit (loss) for the year		2,544	(253)	2,291

aSpecific items are defined and analysed in note 9.

Group income statement

Year ended 31 March 2024


		2024	2023
	Notes	£m	£m
Profit for the year		1,566	2,291
Other comprehensive income (loss)
Items that will not be reclassified to the income statement
Remeasurements of the net pension obligation	18	(2,444)	(2,876)
Tax on pension remeasurements	10	600	732
Items that have been or may be reclassified to the income statement
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations	27	(66)	87
Fair value movements on assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	27	—	(3)
Movements in relation to cash flow hedges:
– net fair value gains (losses)	27	(642)	1,055
– recognised in income and expense	27	356	(713)
Tax on components of other comprehensive income that have been or may be reclassified	10, 27	78	(90)
Share of post tax other comprehensive loss in associates and joint ventures	22	(11)	(1)
Other comprehensive (loss) income for the year, net of tax		(2,129)	(1,809)
Total comprehensive (loss) income for the year		(563)	482

Group statement of comprehensive income

Year ended 31 March


		2024	2023
	Notes	£m	£m
Non-current assets
Intangible assets	12	12,928	13,695
Property, plant and equipment	13	22,562	21,667
Right-of-use assets	14	3,642	3,981
Derivative financial instruments	26	1,020	1,397
Investments	21	11,662	10,945
Joint ventures and associates	22	307	359
Trade and other receivables	15	641	503
Preference shares in joint ventures	22	451	542
Contract assets	5	330	369
Retirement benefit surplus	18	70	52
Deferred tax assets	10	1,048	709
		54,661	54,219
Current assets
Inventories		409	349
Trade and other receivables	15	3,589	3,087
Preference shares in joint ventures	22	82	13
Contract assets	5	1,410	1,565
Assets classified as held for sale	20	—	21
Current tax receivable		423	427
Derivative financial instruments	26	50	82
Investments	21	2,366	3,548
Cash and cash equivalents	23	409	384
		8,738	9,476
Current liabilities
Loans and other borrowings	24	1,395	1,772
Derivative financial instruments	26	94	86
Trade and other payables	16	6,323	6,508
Contract liabilities	5	906	859
Lease liabilities	14	766	800
Liabilities classified as held for sale	20	—	4
Current tax liabilities		92	78
Provisions	17	238	229
		9,814	10,336
Total assets less current liabilities		53,585	53,359
Non-current liabilities
Loans and other borrowings	24	17,131	16,749
Derivative financial instruments	26	445	297
Contract liabilities	5	175	193
Lease liabilities	14	4,189	4,559
Retirement benefit obligations	18	4,882	3,139
Other payables	16	637	894
Deferred tax liabilities	10	1,533	1,620
Provisions	17	411	369
		29,403	27,820
Equity
Share capital		2,172	2,172
Share premium		8,000	8,000
Other reserves	27	1,423	1,664
Retained earnings		12,587	13,703
Total equity		24,182	25,539
		53,585	53,359

The consolidated financial statements on pages 39 to 108 were approved by the Board of Directors on 26 July 2024 and were signed on

its behalf by:

Simon Lowth

Director

Group balance sheet

Year ended 31 March


		Share capitala	Share premiumb	Other reservesc	Retained earnings (loss)	Total equity (deficit)
	Notes	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022		2,172	8,000	1,326	14,341	25,839
Profit for the year		—	—	—	2,291	2,291
Other comprehensive income (loss) – before tax		—	—	1,141	(2,879)	(1,738)
Tax on other comprehensive income (loss)	10	—	—	(90)	732	642
Transferred to the income statement		—	—	(713)	—	(713)
Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year		—	—	338	144	482
Dividends to parent company	11	—	—	—	(850)	(850)
Share-based payments	19	—	—	—	77	77
Tax on share-based payments	10	—	—	—	(9)	(9)
At 1 April 2023		2,172	8,000	1,664	13,703	25,539
Profit for the year		—	—	—	1,566	1,566
Other comprehensive income (loss) – before tax		—	—	(708)	(2,455)	(3,163)
Tax on other comprehensive income (loss)	10	—	—	78	600	678
Transferred to the income statement		—	—	356	—	356
Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year		—	—	(274)	(289)	(563)
Dividends to parent company	11	—	—	—	(850)	(850)
Share-based payments	19	—	—	—	68	68
Tax on share-based payments	10	—	—	—	(12)	(12)
Transfer to realised profitd		—	—	33	(33)	—
At 31 March 2024		2,172	8,000	1,423	12,587	24,182

aThe allotted, called up, and fully paid ordinary share capital of the company at 31 March 2024 was £2,172m comprising 8,689,755,905 ordinary shares of 25p each (31 March 2023:

£2,172m comprising 8,689,755,905 ordinary shares of 25p each).

bThe share premium account, comprising the premium on allotment of shares, is not available for distribution.

cFor further analysis of other reserves, see note 27.

d Includes amounts relating to disposal of investments, for further analysis see note 27.

Group statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 March


		2024	2023
	Notes	£m	£m
Cash flow from operating activities
Profit before taxation		1,897	2,115
Share of post tax loss (profit) of associates and joint ventures		21	59
Net finance expense		298	447
Operating profit		2,216	2,621
Other non-cash charges		73	86
(Profit) loss on disposal of businessesa		(15)	157
Loss (profit) on disposal of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets		3	2
Depreciation and amortisation, including impairment chargesb	6	5,398	4,818
(Increase) decrease in inventories		(60)	(47)
Decrease in programme rights		—	7
(Increase) decrease in trade and other receivables		(843)	(285)
Decrease (increase) in contract assets		157	(17)
(Decrease) increase in trade and other payables		(88)	234
Increase (decrease) in contract liabilities		39	41
(Decrease) increase in other liabilitiesc		(850)	(919)
(Decrease) increase in provisions		(18)	(109)
Cash generated from operations		6,012	6,589
Income taxes (paid) refunded		(59)	136
Net cash inflow from operating activities		5,953	6,725
Cash flow from investing activities
Interest received		140	41
Dividends received from joint ventures, associates and investments		20	9
Proceeds on disposal of businesses		81	29
Outflow on non-current amounts owed by ultimate parent company		(833)	(888)
Proceeds on disposal of current financial assetsd		12,389	11,868
Purchases of current financial assetsd		(11,216)	(12,705)
Net (purchase) disposal of non-current asset investments		—	(5)
Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets		2	—
Purchases of property, plant and equipment and intangible assetse		(4,969)	(5,307)
Prepayment for forward sale of copperf		105	—
Decrease (increase) in amounts owed by joint ventures		117	(265)
Settlement of minimum guarantee liability with sports joint venture	16	(211)	(61)
Net cash outflow from investing activities		(4,375)	(7,284)
Cash flow from financing activities
Interest paid		(865)	(709)
Repayment of borrowingsg		(1,676)	(513)
Proceeds from bank loans and bonds		2,242	2,203
Payment of lease liabilities		(748)	(727)
Cash flows from collateral (paid) receivedh		(532)	(17)
Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries		(13)	—
Increase (decrease) in amounts owed to joint ventures	24	(1)	11
Net cash outflow from financing activities		(1,593)	248
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents		(15)	(311)
Opening cash and cash equivalents		373	687
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents		(15)	(311)
Effect of exchange rate changes		(7)	(3)
Closing cash and cash equivalentsi	23	351	373

aFY24 net profit comprises £25m profit on divestments completing in the year less £10m net transaction costs in relation to BT Sport disposal, see note 20.

bDepreciation and amortisation includes goodwill impairment charges of £488m (FY23: £nil), see note 12 for further details.

cIncludes pension deficit payments of £823m (FY23 : £994m).

dPrimarily consists of investment in and redemption of amounts held in liquidity funds.

e Property, plant and equipment, engineering stores and software additions of £4,880m (FY23: £5,056m) (see note 4) and capital accruals movements of £89m (FY23: £251m ).

fIn FY24 we received an upfront prepayment of £105m from entering into a forward agreement to sell copper granules created from surplus copper cables which are currently

recognised within property, plant and equipment (note 13). As this is expected to be the only cash flow that occurs as part of this transaction the cash receipt has been included as a

separate line within cash flows from investing activities. See note 24 for further details.

gRepayment of borrowings includes the impact of hedging.

hCash flows relating to cash collateral held in respect of derivative financial assets with certain counterparties, see note 26 for further details.

iNet of bank overdrafts of £58m (FY23: £11m).

Group cash flow statement

Year ended 31 March

1. Basis of preparation

Preparation of the financial statements

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in

accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards

and with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

The consolidated financial statements are prepared on a going

concern basis.

Having assessed the principal and emerging risks, the directors

considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of

accounting when preparing the group and parent company

financial statements. This assessment covers the period to May

2025, which is consistent with the FRC guidance. When reaching

this conclusion, the directors took into account the group’s and

parent company’s overall financial position (including trading

results and ability to repay term debt as it matures without

recourse to refinancing) and the exposure to principal risks.

These financial statements consolidate British

Telecommunications plc, the parent company, and its subsidiaries

(together the ‘group’, ‘us’, ‘we’ or ‘our’).

The consolidated financial statements are prepared on the

historical cost basis, except for certain financial and equity

instruments that have been measured at fair value. The

consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling, the

functional currency of British Telecommunications plc.

These financial statements cover the financial year from 1 April

2023 to 31 March 2024 (‘FY24’), with comparative figures for the

financial year from 1 April 2022 to 31 March 2023 (‘FY23’).

New and amended accounting standards effective during

the year

The following amended standards were effective during the year,

none of which had a material impact on the financial statements of

the group:

IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts

BT adopted IFRS 17 with retrospective application on 1 April 2023.

The standard establishes principles for the recognition,

measurement, presentation and disclosure of insurance contracts.

The measurement method for insurance contracts required by

IFRS 17 is a probability weighted discounted cash flow model,

including a best estimate and an adjustment for non-financial risk

calculated for groups of similar contracts.

IFRS 17 primarily impacts insurance entities, however, as it applies

to individual contracts it is possible that non-insurers could issue

contracts that are in scope of the standard such as product

breakdown contracts or warranties.

We have assessed the impact of the standard on the group, and

concluded that its impact is not material. Contracts in scope of the

standard entered into by the group are restricted to intragroup

insurance arrangements; the group does not issue external

insurance contracts.

Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1

and IFRS Practice Statement 2)

These amendments require the disclosure of ‘material’ rather than

‘significant’ accounting policies. The amendments have not

resulted in any changes to accounting policies disclosures made in

these financial statements.

International Tax Reform – Pillar Two Model Rules

(Amendments to IAS 12 Income Taxes)

The IASB amended the scope of IAS 12 to introduce a temporary

mandatory exception from deferred tax accounting for top-up tax

arising from the implementation of the OECD Pillar Two model

rules. This was endorsed in the UK in July 2023 and applies to

accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023.

The group applies the exception to recognising and disclosing

information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to

Pillar Two income taxes, as provided in the amendments to IAS 12

issued in May 2023.

Other

The following changes have not had a significant impact on our

consolidated financial statements:

– Definition of Accounting Estimate (Amendments to IAS 8)

– Deferred Tax related to Assets and Liabilities arising from a

Single Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12)

IFRS Interpretations Committee agenda decisions

The IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) periodically issues

agenda decisions which explain and clarify how to apply the

principles and requirements of IFRS. Agenda decisions are

authoritative and may require the group to revise accounting

policies or practice to align with the interpretations set out in the

decision.

We regularly review IFRIC updates and assess the impact of

agenda decisions. No agenda decisions finalised during FY24 have

been assessed as having a significant impact on the group.

New and amended accounting standards that have been

issued but are not yet effective

The following new or amended standards and interpretations are

applicable in future periods and are not expected to have a

material impact on the consolidated financial statements:

Supplier Finance Arrangements (Amendments to IAS 7 and

IFRS 7)

The amendments will apply to the group from FY25 onwards and

require new disclosures relating to supplier finance arrangements

that assist in assessing their effects on liabilities, cash flows and

exposure to liquidity risk.

We participate in supply chain financing arrangements which the

amendments will apply to, see note 16. We will include the

required disclosures in the FY25 financial statements.

Other

The following are not expected to have a significant impact on the

consolidated financial statements:

– Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-current

(Amendments to IAS 1)

– Non-current Liabilities with Covenants (Amendments to IAS 1)

– Lease Liability in a Sale and Leaseback (Amendments to IFRS

16)

– Lack of Exchangeability (Amendments to IAS 21)

Accounting policy and operating segment changes

During FY24 we changed the methodology used to allocate certain

internal costs and our Business CFU began reporting as a single

unit.


Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Allocation of central costs

From 1 April 2023 we have revised the methodology used to

allocate shared Network, Digital and support function costs across

our units to more closely align the recharges received by each unit

to their actual consumption and establish clearer driver-focused

allocation of cost, harmonise principles for pricing and profitability,

and support greater unit cost ownership and management and

decision making.

This represents an accounting policy change and in line with the

requirements of IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting

Estimates and Errors we have re-presented FY23 comparatives to

enable comparability across periods.

Creation of the Business unit

As disclosed in the FY23 financial statements, the Enterprise and

Global CFUs have been combined into a single CFU, Business,

which began reporting as a single unit from 1 April 2023.

In line with the requirements of IFRS 8 Operating Segments, we

have re-presented FY23 comparatives to reflect the combined

unit.

Re-presentation of prior year comparatives

These changes have resulted in re-presentation of prior year

comparatives. Changes affect segmental disclosures only and have

no impact on the overall reported group financial results.

The following disclosures are impacted by the creation of the

Business unit only. Re-presentation of prior year comparatives is

limited to the combination of the balances previously reported in

respect of the Enterprise and Global units, with no further

adjustments:

– Note 5 Revenue: disaggregation of external revenue

– Note 7 Employees: number of employees

– Note 15 Trade and other receivables: trade receivables not past

due and accrued income by CFU

Note 4 Segment information is also impacted by changes to the

allocation of shared costs. Re-presentation of comparatives has

involved adjustments to reallocate internal costs to report on a

like-for-like basis with FY24 and to remove internal trading

between the Enterprise and Global units. Note 31 presents a

bridge between previously published FY23 financial information

and comparatives presented in these disclosures.

Presentation of specific items

Our income statement and segmental analysis separately identify

trading results on an adjusted basis, being before specific items.

The directors believe that presentation of the group’s results in this

way is relevant to an understanding of the group’s financial

performance as specific items are those that in management’s

judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or

incidence.

This presentation is consistent with the way that financial

performance is measured by management and reported to the BT

Group plc Board and the BT Group plc Executive Committee and

assists in providing an additional analysis of our reporting of

trading results. Specific items may not be comparable to similarly

titled measures used by other companies.

In determining whether an event or transaction is specific,

management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors.

Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and

which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or

prior years include significant business restructuring programmes

such as the current group-wide cost transformation and

modernisation programme, acquisitions and disposals of

businesses and investments, impairment of goodwill, charges or

credits relating to retrospective regulatory matters, property

rationalisation programmes, historical property-related provisions,

significant out-of-period contract settlements, net interest on our

pension obligation, and the impact of remeasuring deferred tax

balances. In the event that items meet the criteria, which are

applied consistently from year to year, they are treated as specific

items. Any releases to provisions originally booked as a specific

item are also classified as specific. Conversely, when a reversal

occurs in relation to a prior year item not classified as specific, the

reversal is not classified as specific in the current year.

Movements relating to the sports joint venture (Sports JV) with

Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD), such as fair value gains or losses on

the A and C preference shares or impairment charges on the

equity-accounted investment are classified as specific. Refer to

note 22 for further detail.

Specific items for the current and prior year are disclosed in note 9.

2. Critical & key accounting estimates and

significant judgements

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS

requires the use of accounting estimates and assumptions. It also

requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of

applying our accounting policies. We continually evaluate our

estimates, assumptions and judgements based on available

information and experience. As the use of estimates is inherent in

financial reporting, actual results could differ from these estimates.

Our critical accounting estimates are those estimates that carry a

significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying

amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. We

also make other key estimates when preparing the financial

statements, which, while not meeting the definition of a critical

estimate, involve a higher degree of complexity and can

reasonably be expected to be of relevance to a user of the financial

statements. Management has discussed its critical and other key

accounting estimates and associated disclosures with the BT

Group plc Audit & Risk Committee.

Significant judgements are those made by management in

applying our material accounting policies that have a material

impact on the amounts presented in the financial statements. We

may exercise significant judgement in our critical and key

accounting estimates.

Our critical and key accounting estimates and significant

judgements are described in the following notes to the financial

statements. They can be identified by the following symbol .


Note	Critical estimate	Key estimate	Significant judgement
5. Estimate of customer refund liability		ü
10. Current and deferred income tax		ü	ü
12. Goodwill impairment	ü		ü
13. Determining the point of sale of BT Tower			ü
14. Reasonable certainty and determination of lease terms			ü
17. Identifying contingent liabilities			ü
17. Provisions		ü	ü
18. Valuation of pension assets and liabilities	ü		ü
22. Valuation of investment in A preference shares in Sports joint venture		ü

3. Material accounting policies that apply to the

overall financial statements

The material accounting policies applied in the preparation of our

consolidated financial statements are set out below. Other

material accounting policies applicable to a particular area are

disclosed in the most relevant note. They can be identified by the

following symbol .

We have applied all policies consistently to all the years presented,

unless otherwise stated.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Basis of preparation continued

Basis of consolidation

The group financial statements consolidate the financial

statements of British Telecommunications plc and its subsidiaries,

and include its share of the results of associates and joint ventures

using the equity method of accounting. The group recognises its

direct rights to (and its share of) jointly held assets, liabilities,

revenues and expenses of joint operations under the appropriate

headings in the consolidated financial statements.

All business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition

method regardless of whether equity instruments or other assets

are acquired.

A subsidiary is an entity that is controlled by another entity, known

as the parent or investor. An investor controls an investee when the

investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its

involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those

returns through its power over the investee.

Non-controlling interests in the net assets of consolidated

subsidiaries, which consist of the amounts of those interests at the

date of the original business combination and non-controlling

share of changes in equity since the date of the combination, are

not material to the group’s financial statements.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the year

are consolidated from and up to the date of change of control.

Where necessary, accounting policies of subsidiaries have been

aligned with the policies adopted by the group. All intra-group

transactions including any gains or losses, balances, income or

expenses are eliminated on consolidation.

When the group loses control of a subsidiary, the profit or loss on

disposal is calculated as the difference between (i) the aggregate

of the fair value of the consideration received and the fair value of

any retained interest and (ii) the previous carrying amount of the

assets (including goodwill), and liabilities of the subsidiary and any

non-controlling interests. The profit or loss on disposal is

recognised as a specific item.

Associates are those entities in which the group has significant

influence, but not control or joint control, over the financial and

operating policies.

A joint venture is an arrangement in which the group has joint

control, whereby the group has rights to the net assets of the

arrangement, rather than rights to its assets and obligations for its

liabilities. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of

control of an arrangement, which exists only when decisions about

the activities that significantly affect the returns of the

arrangement require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing

control.

Interests in associates and joint ventures are initially recognised at

cost (including transaction costs) except where they relate to a

retained non-controlling interest in a former subsidiary, which is

initially recognised at a deemed cost being the fair value of the

retained interest. Subsequent to initial recognition, the

consolidated financial statements include the group’s share of the

profit or loss and other comprehensive income of equity-

accounted investees, until the date on which significant influence

or joint control ceases.

Inventories

Network maintenance equipment and equipment to be sold to

customers are stated at the lower of cost or net realisable value,

taking into account expected revenue from the sale of packages

comprising a mobile handset and a subscription. Cost corresponds

to purchase or production cost determined by either the first in

first out (FIFO) or average cost method.

Government grants

Government grants are recognised when there is reasonable

assurance that the conditions associated with the grants have been

complied with and the grants will be received.

Grants for the purchase or production of property, plant and

equipment are deducted from the cost of the related assets and

reduce future depreciation expense accordingly. Grants for the

reimbursement of operating expenditure are deducted from the

related category of costs in the income statement. Estimates and

judgements applied in accounting for government grants received

in respect of Building Digital UK (BDUK) and other rural superfast

broadband contracts are described in note 13.

Once a government grant is recognised, any related deferred

income is treated in accordance with IAS 20 ‘Accounting for

Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance’.

Foreign currencies

The consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling,

which is also the company’s functional currency. Each group entity

determines its own functional currency.

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional

currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the

transaction. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the

settlement of transactions and the translation of monetary assets

and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at period end

exchange rates are recognised in the income statement line which

most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction.

On consolidation, assets and liabilities of foreign undertakings are

translated into the group’s presentation currency at year end

exchange rates. The results of foreign undertakings are translated

into sterling at the rates prevailing on the transaction dates.

Foreign exchange differences arising on the retranslation of

foreign undertakings are recognised directly in a separate

component of equity, the translation reserve. There is no material

exposure to companies operating in hyperinflationary economies.

In the event of the disposal of an undertaking with assets and

liabilities denominated in a foreign currency, the cumulative

translation difference associated with the undertaking in the

translation reserve is charged or credited to the gain or loss on

disposal recognised in the income statement.

Research and development

Research expenditure is recognised in the income statement in the

period in which it is incurred. Development expenditure, including

the cost of internally developed software, is recognised in the

income statement in the period in which it is incurred unless it is

probable that economic benefits will flow to the group from the

asset being developed, the cost of the asset can be reliably

measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which

case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet.

Capitalisation ceases when the asset being developed is ready for

use. Research and development costs include direct and indirect

labour, materials and directly attributable overheads.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits (leaver costs) are payable when employment

is terminated before the normal retirement date, or when an

employee accepts voluntary redundancy in exchange for these

benefits. We recognise termination benefits when they are

demonstrably committed to the affected employees leaving

the group.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

3. Material accounting policies that apply to the overall financial statements continued



	Material accounting policies that apply to segment information Operating and reportable segments Our operating segments are reported based on financial information provided to the BT Group plc Executive Committee, which is the key management committee and represents the ‘chief operating decision maker’. Our organisational structure reflects the different customer groups to which we provide communications products and services via our customer-facing units (CFUs). The CFUs are our reportable segments and generate substantially all of our revenue. During the year to 31 March 2024 the group had three CFUs: Consumer, Business and Openreach. Business was formed from the merger of the Global and Enterprise units during FY23 and has been monitored by the BT Group plc Executive Committee on a consolidated basis since 1 April 2023. The CFUs are supported by technology units (TUs) comprising Digital and Networks; and corporate units (CUs) including procurement and property management. TUs and CUs are not reportable segments as they did not meet the quantitative thresholds as set out in IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’ for any of the years presented. We aggregate the remaining operations and include them in the ‘Other’ category to reconcile to the consolidated results of the group. The ‘Other’ category includes unallocated TU costs and our CUs. Allocation of certain items to segments Provisions for the settlement of significant legal, commercial and regulatory disputes, which are negotiated at a group level, are initially recorded in the ‘Other’ segment. On resolution of the dispute, the full impact is recognised in the results of the relevant CFU and offset in the group results through the utilisation of the provision previously charged to the ‘Other’ segment. Settlements which are particularly significant or cover more than one financial year may fall within the definition of specific items as detailed in note 9, in which case they are not reflecting in the results of the reportable segment in line with how they are reported to the BT Group plc Executive Committee. The costs incurred by TUs and CUs are recharged to the CFUs to reflect the services provided to them. Depreciation and amortisation incurred by TUs in relation to the networks and systems they manage and operate on behalf of the CFUs is allocated to the CFUs based on their respective utilisation. Capital expenditure incurred by TUs for specific projects undertaken on behalf of the CFUs is allocated based on the value of the directly attributable expenditure incurred. Where projects are not directly attributable to a particular CFU, capital expenditure is allocated among them based on the proportion of estimated future economic benefits. Specific items are detailed in note 9 and are not allocated to the reportable segments as this reflects how they are reported to the BT Group plc Executive Committee. Finance expense and income are not allocated to the reportable segments, as the central treasury function manages this activity, together with the overall net debt position of the group. Measuring segment performance Performance of each reportable segment is measured based on adjusted EBITDA. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as the group profit or loss before specific items, net finance expense, taxation, depreciation and amortisation and share of post tax profits or losses of associates and joint ventures. Adjusted EBITDA is considered to be a useful measure of the operating performance of the CFUs because it approximates the underlying operating cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation and also provides a meaningful analysis of trading performance by excluding specific items, which are disclosed separately by virtue of their size, nature or incidence. We also increasingly track adjusted operating profit which reflects the growing depreciation expense arising from our elevated network investment. Revenue recognition Our revenue recognition policy is set out in note 5. Internal revenue and costs Most of our internal trading relates to Openreach and arises on rentals, and any associated connection or migration charges, of the UK access lines and other network products to the other CFUs, including the use of BT Ireland’s network. This occurs both directly, and also indirectly, through TUs which are included within the ‘Other’ segment. Business internal revenue arises from Consumer for mobile Ethernet access and TUs for transmission planning services. Intra-group revenue generated from the sale of regulated products and services is based on market price. Intra-group revenue from the sale of other products and services is agreed between the relevant CFUs and therefore the profitability of CFUs may be impacted by transfer pricing levels. Geographic segmentation The UK is our country of domicile and is where we generate the majority of our revenue from external UK customers. The geographic analysis of revenue is based on the country in which the customer is invoiced. The geographic analysis of non-current assets, which excludes derivative financial instruments, investments, preference shares in joint ventures, retirement benefit schemes in surplus and deferred tax assets, is based on the location of the assets.

Segment revenue and profit

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4. Segment information


	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Segment revenue	9,833	8,128	6,077	16	24,054
Internal revenue	(47)	(71)	(3,101)	—	(3,219)
Adjusteda revenue from external customers	9,786	8,057	2,976	16	20,835
Adjusted EBITDAb	2,672	1,630	3,827	(27)	8,102
Depreciation and amortisationa	(1,738)	(984)	(2,052)	(125)	(4,899)
Adjusteda operating profit (loss)	934	646	1,775	(152)	3,203
Specific operating profit (loss) – see note 9					(987)
Operating profit					2,216
Net finance expensec					(298)
Share of post tax (loss) profit of associates and joint ventures					(21)
Profit before tax					1,897

	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023 (re-presentedd )	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Segment revenue	9,737	8,258	5,675	27	23,697
Internal revenue	(57)	(81)	(2,890)	—	(3,028)
Adjusteda revenue from external customers	9,680	8,177	2,785	27	20,669
Adjusted EBITDAb	2,469	1,945	3,510	6	7,930
Depreciation and amortisationa	(1,603)	(1,047)	(1,965)	(138)	(4,753)
Adjusteda operating profit (loss)	866	898	1,545	(132)	3,177
Specific operating profit (loss) – see note 9					(556)
Operating profit					2,621
Net finance expensec					(447)
Share of post tax (loss) profit of associates and joint ventures					(59)
Profit before tax					2,115

a Before specific items.

bAdjusted EBITDA is defined as profit or loss before specific items, net finance expense, taxation, depreciation and amortisation and share of post tax profits or losses of associates and

joint ventures.

cNet finance expense includes specific item expense of £121m (FY23: £5m). See note 9.

d Comparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing unit and a change in the methodology used

to allocate shared central costs. For more information see note 1, and for a bridge to prior period published financial information see note 31.

Internal revenue and costs


	Internal cost recorded by
	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Internal revenue recorded by
Consumer	—	46	—	1	47
Business	23	—	—	48	71
Openreach	2,044	1,043	—	14	3,101
Total	2,067	1,089	—	63	3,219

	Internal cost recorded by
	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023 (re-presenteda )	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Internal revenue recorded by
Consumer	—	56	—	1	57
Business	26	—	—	55	81
Openreach	1,805	1,072	—	13	2,890
Total	1,831	1,128	—	69	3,028

aComparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing unit. For more information see note 1, and

for a bridge to prior period published financial information see note 31.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4. Segment information continued

Capital expenditure


	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Intangible assetsa	439	361	135	3	938
Property, plant and equipmentb	736	414	2,710	82	3,942
Capital expenditure	1,175	775	2,845	85	4,880

	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023 (re-presentedc )	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Intangible assetsa	552	361	101	4	1,018
Property, plant and equipmentb	669	525	2,746	98	4,038
Capital expenditure	1,221	886	2,847	102	5,056

a Additions to intangible assets as presented in note 12.

bAdditions to property, plant and equipment as presented in note 13, inclusive of movement on engineering stores.

cComparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing units. For more information see note 1, and

for a bridge to prior period published financial information see note 31.

Geographic segmentation

Revenue from external customers


Year ended 31 March	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
UK	18,450	18,154
Europe, Middle East and Africa, excluding the UK	1,303	1,372
Americas	617	684
Asia Pacific	465	459
Adjusteda revenue	20,835	20,669

aBefore specific items.

Non-current assets


At 31 March	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
UK	39,378	39,395
Europe, Middle East and Africa, excluding the UK	634	740
Americas	251	283
Asia Pacific	147	156
Non-current assetsa	40,410	40,574

aComprising the following balances presented in the group balance sheet: intangible assets, property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets, joint ventures and associates, trade

and other receivables and contract assets.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4. Segment information continued



Material accounting policies that apply to revenue Revenue from contracts with customers in scope of IFRS 15 Most revenue recognised by the group is in scope of IFRS 15, excluding Openreach where most revenue is in scope of IFRS 16. The revenue recognition policy for both is set out below. On inception of the contract we identify a “performance obligation” for each of the distinct goods or services we have promised to provide to the customer. The consideration specified in the contract with the customer is allocated to each performance obligation identified based on their relative standalone selling prices, and is recognised as revenue as they are satisfied. The table below summarises the performance obligations we have identified for our major service lines and provides information on the timing of when they are satisfied and the related revenue recognition policy. Also detailed in this note is revenue expected to be recognised in future periods for contracts in place at 31 March 2024 that contain unsatisfied performance obligations.
Service line	Performance obligations	Revenue recognition policy
Information and communications technology (ICT) and managed networks	Provision of networked IT services, managed network services, and arrangements to design and build software solutions. Performance obligations are identified for each distinct service or deliverable for which the customer has contracted, and are considered to be satisfied over the time period that we deliver these services or deliverables. Commitments to provide hardware to customers that are distinct from the other promises are considered to be satisfied at the point in time that control passes to the customer.	Revenue for services is recognised over time using a measure of progress that appropriately reflects the pattern by which the performance obligation is satisfied. For time and materials contracts, revenue is recognised as the service is received by the customer. Where performance obligations exist for the provision of hardware, revenue is recognised at the point in time that the customer obtains control of the promised asset. For long-term fixed price contracts revenue recognition will typically be based on the satisfaction of performance obligations in respect of the achievement of contract milestones and customer acceptance, which is the best measure of progress towards the completion of the performance obligation.
Fixed access subscriptions	Provision of broadband, TV and fixed telephony services including national and international calls, connections, line rental and calling features. Performance obligations exist for each ongoing service provided to the customer and are satisfied over the period that the services are provided. Installation services are recognised as distinct performance obligations if their relationship with the other services in the contract is purely functional. These are satisfied when the customer benefits from the service. Connection services are not distinct performance obligations and are therefore combined with the associated service performance obligation.	Fixed subscription charges are recognised as revenue on a straight-line basis over the period that the services are provided. Upfront charges for non-distinct connection and installation services are deferred as contract liabilities and are recognised as revenue over the same period. Variable charges such as call charges are recognised when the related services are delivered. Where installation activities are distinct performance obligations, revenue is recognised at the point in time that the installation is completed.
Mobile subscriptions	Provision of mobile postpaid and prepaid services, including voice minutes, SMS and data services. Performance obligations exist for each ongoing service provided to the customer and are satisfied over the period that the services are provided.	Subscription fees, consisting primarily of monthly charges for access to internet or voice and data services, are recognised as the service is provided. One-off services such as calls outside of plan and excess data usage are recognised when the service is used.
Equipment and other services	Provision of equipment and other services, including mobile phone handsets and hardware such as set-top boxes and broadband routers provided as part of customer contracts. Performance obligations are satisfied at the point in time that control passes to the customer. For other services, performance obligations are identified based on the distinct goods and services we have committed to provide.	Revenue from equipment sales is recognised at the point in time that control passes to the customer. Where payment is not received in full at the time of the sale, such as with equipment provided as part of mobile and fixed access subscriptions, contract assets are recognised for the amount due from the customer that will be recovered over the contract period. Revenue to be recognised is calculated by reference to the relative standalone selling price of the equipment. For other services, revenue is recognised when the related performance obligations are satisfied, which could be over time, in line with contract milestones, or at a point in time depending on the nature of the service.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Revenue



	We recognise revenue based on the relative standalone selling price of each performance obligation. Determining the standalone selling price often requires judgement and may be derived from regulated prices, list prices, a cost-plus derived price or the price of similar products when sold on a standalone basis by BT or a competitor. In some cases it may be appropriate to use the contract price when this represents a bespoke price that would be the same for a similar customer in a similar circumstance. The fixed access and mobile subscription arrangements sold by our Consumer business are typically payable in advance, with any variable or one-off charges billed in arrears. Contracts are largely inflation-linked with price increases recognised when effective. Payment is received immediately for direct sales of equipment to customers. Where equipment is provided to customers under mobile and fixed access subscription arrangements, payment for the equipment is received over the course of the contract term. For sales by our enterprise businesses, invoices are issued in line with contractual terms. Payments received in advance are recognised as contract liabilities; amounts billed in arrears are recognised as contract assets. We adopt variable consideration to allocate the transaction price to take account of the likelihood of the customer upgrading to a new handset during the contract term. Consideration is constrained to a period shorter than the contract term and is allocated to the handset and airtime based on relative standalone selling price. Certain Business long term contracts offer rebates to our customers. Where this is the case we make an estimate of variable consideration at the outset of the contract based on assumed volumes. These rebates are normally settled monthly against service revenues.
	We are applying the practical expedient to recognise revenue “as-invoiced” for certain fixed access and mobile subscription services revenues. Where we have a right to invoice at an amount that directly corresponds with performance to date, we recognise revenue at that amount. We have also adopted the practical expedient not to calculate the aggregate amount of the transaction price allocated to the performance obligations that are unsatisfied for these contracts. We do not have any material obligations in respect of returns, refunds or warranties. Where we act as an agent in a transaction, such as insurance services offered, we recognise commission net of directly attributable costs. We exercise judgement in assessing whether the initial set-up, transition and transformation phases of long-term contracts are distinct from the other services to be delivered under the contract and therefore represent distinct performance obligations. This determines whether revenue is recognised in the early stages of the contract, or deferred until delivery of the other services promised in the contract begins. We recognise immediately the entire estimated loss for a contract when we have evidence that the contract is unprofitable. If these estimates indicate that any contract will be less profitable than previously forecast, contract assets may have to be written down to the extent they are no longer considered to be fully recoverable. We perform ongoing profitability reviews of our contracts in order to determine whether the latest estimates are appropriate. Key factors reviewed include: – Transaction volumes or other inputs affecting future revenues which can vary depending on customer requirements, plans, market position and other factors such as general economic conditions. – Our ability to achieve key contract milestones connected with the transition, development, transformation and deployment phases for customer contracts. – The status of commercial relations with customers and the implications for future revenue and cost projections. – Our estimates of future staff and third party costs and the degree to which cost savings and efficiencies are deliverable.
	Revenue from lease arrangements in scope of IFRS 16 Some consumer broadband and TV products and arrangements to provide external communications providers with exclusive use of Openreach’s fixed-network telecommunications infrastructure meet the definition of operating leases under IFRS 16. At inception of a contract, we determine whether the contract is, or contains, a lease following the accounting policy set out in note 14. Arrangements meeting the definition of a lease in which we act as lessor are classified as operating or finance leases at lease inception based on an overall assessment of whether the lease transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the underlying asset. If this is the case then the lease is a finance lease; if not, it is an operating lease. For sub-leases, we make this assessment by reference to the characteristics of the right-of-use asset associated with the head lease rather than the underlying leased asset. Income from arrangements classified as operating leases is presented as revenue where it relates to our core operating activities, for example leases of fixed-line telecommunications infrastructure to external communications providers and leases of devices to consumer customers as part of fixed access subscription products. Operating lease income from other arrangements is presented within other operating income (note 6). We recognise operating lease payments as income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any upfront payments received, such as connection fees, are deferred over the lease term. Determining the lease term is subject to the significant judgements set out in note 14. Where the contract contains both lease and non-lease components, the transaction price is allocated between the components on the basis of relative standalone selling price. Where an arrangement is assessed as a finance lease we derecognise the underlying asset and recognise a receivable equivalent to the net investment in the lease. Finance lease receivables are presented in note 15. The receivable is measured based on future payments to be received discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease, adjusted for any direct costs. Any difference between the derecognised asset and the finance lease receivable is recognised in the income statement. Where the nature of services delivered relates to our core operating activities it is presented as revenue. Where it relates to non-core activities it is presented within other operating income (note 6).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Revenue continued

Disaggregation of external revenue

The following table disaggregates external revenue by our major service lines and by reportable segment.


	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
ICT and managed networks	—	3,592	—	—	3,592
Fixed access subscriptions	4,333	2,149	2,900	—	9,382
Mobile subscriptions	3,557	1,187	—	—	4,744
Equipment and other services	1,896	1,129	76	16	3,117
Revenue before specific items	9,786	8,057	2,976	16	20,835
Specific itemsa (note 9)					(38)
Revenue					20,797

Year ended 31 March 2023 (re-presentedb)	Consumer	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023 (re-presentedb)	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
ICT and managed networks	—	3,352	—	—	3,352
Fixed access subscriptions	4,059	1,893	2,716	—	8,668
Mobile subscriptions	3,351	1,160	—	—	4,511
Equipment and other services	2,270	1,772	69	27	4,138
Revenue before specific items	9,680	8,177	2,785	27	20,669
Specific itemsa (note 9)					12
Revenue					20,681

aRelates to regulatory matters classified as specific. See note 9.

b Comparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing unit, formed through the merger of our

Enterprise and Global units, see note 1.

Revenue expected to be recognised in future periods for performance obligations that are not complete (or are partially complete) as at

31 March 2024 is £12,133m (FY23: £12,792m). Of this, £6,052m (FY23: £6,592m ) relates to ICT and managed services contracts and

equipment and other services which will substantially be recognised as revenue within three years. Fixed access and mobile subscription

services typically have shorter contract periods and so £6,081m (FY23: £6,200m) will substantially be recognised as revenue within two

years.

Revenue recognised this year relating to performance obligations that were satisfied, or partially satisfied, in previous years was not

material. Revenue related to customers’ unexercised rights (for example, unused amounts on prepaid SIM cards) was not material.



	Key accounting estimates made in accounting for revenue Estimate of customer refunds Revenue has been adjusted to reflect a risk of billing inaccuracy where there is a high level of manual processing through certain billing systems. This is associated with a small number of products within our Business unit which contain bespoke pricing. £41m has been recognised as an IFRS 9 financial liability and deducted from revenue, and has been derived from an estimate of the possible range of the adjustment from £24m to £64m based on the results of a sample of billing items. This is presented within Note 16 and represents our best estimate required to cover ongoing billing adjustments to products relating to both current and prior periods. If the final quantum of adjustments is less than expected, the adjustment will be released back to the income statement.

Lease income

Presented within revenue is £3,031m (FY23: £2,909m) income from arrangements classified as operating leases under IFRS 16 and which

represent core business activities for the group. Income relates predominantly to Openreach’s leases of fixed-line telecommunications

infrastructure to external communications providers, classified as fixed access subscription revenue in the table above, and leases of

devices to Consumer customers as part of fixed access subscription offerings, classified as equipment and other services.

During the year we also recognised:

– £26m (FY23: £29m) operating lease income from non-core business activities which is presented in other operating income (note 6).

Note 14 presents an analysis of payments to be received across the remaining term of operating lease arrangements.

– £40m (FY23: £58m) revenue in relation to upfront gains from arrangements meeting the definition of a finance lease. These

arrangements meet the criteria for revenue recognition as they concern leases and sub-leases of telecommunications infrastructure

that represent core business activities of the group.

£38m (FY23: £69m) of this income relates to the sub-leasing of right-of-use assets. These are primarily operating sub-leases of unutilised

properties, and finance sub-leases of telecommunications infrastructure.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Revenue continued

Contract assets and liabilities



	Material accounting policies that apply to contract assets and liabilities We recognise contract assets for goods and services for which control has transferred to the customer before we have the right to bill. These assets mainly relate to mobile handsets provided upfront but paid for over the course of a contract. Contract assets are reclassified as receivables when the right to payment becomes unconditional and we have billed the customer. Contract liabilities are recognised when we have received advance payment for goods and services that we have not transferred to the customer. These primarily relate to fees received for connection and installation services that are not distinct performance obligations. Where the initial set-up, transition or transformation phase of a long-term contract is considered to be a distinct performance obligation we recognise a contract asset for any work performed but not billed. Conversely a contract liability is recognised where these activities are not distinct performance obligations and we receive upfront consideration. In this case eligible costs associated with delivering these services are capitalised as fulfilment costs, see note 15 . We provide for expected lifetime losses on contract assets following the policy set out in note 15.

Contract assets and liabilities are as follows:


At 31 March	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Contract assets
Current	1,410	1,565
Non-current	330	369
	1,740	1,934
Contract liabilities
Current	906	859
Non-current	175	193
	1,081	1,052

£876m of the contract liability at 31 March 2023 was recognised as revenue during the year (FY23: £903m). Impairment losses of £35m

were recognised on contract assets during the year (FY23: £46m).

The expected credit loss provisions recognised against contract assets vary across the group due to the nature of our customers; the

expected loss rate at 31 March 2024 was 3% (FY23: 3%).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Revenue continued


Year ended 31 March	Notes	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	Notes	£m	£m
Operating costs by nature
Staff costs:
Wages and salariesa		3,838	3,852
Social security costs		425	423
Other pension costs	18	582	590
Share-based payment expense	19	68	77
Total staff costs		4,913	4,942
Own work capitalised		(1,432)	(1,364)
Net staff costs		3,481	3,578
Net indirect labour costsb		456	381
Net labour costs		3,937	3,959
Product costs		3,527	3,368
Sales commissions		636	589
Payments to telecommunications operators		1,227	1,354
Property and energy costs		1,338	1,242
Network operating and IT costs		930	913
TV programme rights chargesc		—	354
Provision and installation		515	591
Marketing and sales		367	363
Net impairment losses on trade receivables and contract assetsd		165	138
Other operating costs		329	111
Other operating income		(238)	(243)
Depreciation and amortisation, including impairment charges		4,899	4,753
Total operating costs before specific items		17,632	17,492
Specific items	9	949	568
Of which goodwill impairment		488	—
Total operating costs		18,581	18,060

Operating costs before specific items include the following:
Leaver costsc		9	11
Research and development expendituree		726	683
Foreign currency (gains)/losses		(2)	(9)
Inventories recognised as an expense		2,170	2,311

aLeaver costs are included within wages and salaries, except for leaver costs of £242m (FY23 : £129m) associated with restructuring costs, which have been recorded as specific items.

bNet indirect labour costs relate to subcontracted labour costs net of capitalised indirect labour costs of £772m (FY23: £824m).

cTV programme rights charges relate to programme rights assets which were transferred to the sports joint venture in August 2022, see note 22.

dConsists of net impairment losses on trade receivables and contract assets in Consumer of £98m (FY23: £94m), in Business of £45m (FY23: £32m), in Openreach of £20m (FY23:

£5m) and in Other of £2m (FY23: £1m ).

e Research and development expenditure includes amortisation of £679m (FY23: £632m) in respect of capitalised development costs and operating expenses of £47m (FY23: £51m).

In addition, the group capitalised software development costs of £429m (FY23: £503m).

Depreciation and amortisation, which includes impairment charges, is analysed as follows:


Year ended 31 March	Notes	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	Notes	£m	£m
Depreciation and amortisation before impairment charges
Intangible assets	12	1,248	1,165
Property, plant and equipment	13	2,892	2,878
Right-of-use assets	14	652	689
Impairment charges
Intangible assets	12	—	—
Property, plant and equipmenta	13	108	11
Right-of-use assetsb	14	(1)	10
Total depreciation and amortisation before specific items		4,899	4,753
Impairment charges classified as specific items	9
Intangible assetsc		488	—
Property, plant and equipment		—	—
Right-of-use assets		11	65
Total depreciation and amortisation		5,398	4,818

a Impairments of network infrastructure and engineering stores in FY24 and other assets in FY23, see note 13.

bFY24 impairment charge reflects a net reversal of impairment on properties reoccupied subsequent to initial impairment.

cFY24 impairment charge represents impairment of goodwill allocated to our Business cash generating unit, further details in note 12.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

6. Operating costs

Who are our key management personnel and how are they compensated?

Key management personnel comprise Executive and Non-Executive Directors and members of the BT Group plc Executive Committee as

well as the directors of the Company. It is the BT Group plc Executive Committee which has responsibility for planning, directing and

controlling the activities of the group.

Compensation of key management personnel is shown in the table below:


Year ended 31 March	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Short-term employee benefits	18.0	24.9
Post employment benefitsa	0.8	0.8
Share-based payments	8.7	7.4
	27.5	33.1

a Post employment benefits include cash pension allowances paid to the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer. The group does not contribute to defined contribution or defined

benefit pension schemes on behalf of key management personnel.

Key management personnel are compensated solely in the form of cash and share-based payments. During FY24, two members of key

management personnel (FY23: none) exercised saveshare options, see note 19.

7. Employees


	2024			2023
Number of employees in the group	Averagea ’000	Averageb FTE ’000	Year endb FTE ’000	Averagea ’000	Averageb FTE ’000	Year endb FTE ’000
UK	77.3	74.9	71.4	82.2	79.7	77.6
Non-UK	20.1	20.0	20.3	19.1	19.1	19.5
Total employees	97.4	94.9	91.7	101.3	98.8	97.1

Consumer	18.1	16.3	15.8	18.3	16.5	16.4
Businessc	23.6	23.3	22.6	25.0	24.6	24.0
Openreach	35.1	34.9	32.8	37.9	37.6	36.6
Other	20.6	20.4	20.5	20.1	20.1	20.1
Total employees	97.4	94.9	91.7	101.3	98.8	97.1

aAverage reflecting monthly average headcount.

bAverage reflecting the full-time equivalent of full- and part-time employees, excluding subcontract labour. There were 28.4k FTE agency & subcontract labour at the FY24 year-end

(FY23: 33.0k).

cComparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing unit, formed through the merger of our

Enterprise and Global units, see note 1.

8. Audit, audit related and other non-audit services

The following fees were paid or are payable to the company’s auditor, KPMG LLP and other firms in the KPMG network.


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£000	£000
Fees payable to the company’s auditors and its associates for:
Audit servicesa
The audit of the parent company and the consolidated financial statements	14,409	13,498
The audit of the company’s subsidiaries	6,276	6,257
	20,685	19,755
Audit related assurance servicesb	2,487	2,553
Other non-audit services	33	55
Total services	23,205	22,363

aServices in relation to the audit of the parent company and the consolidated financial statements. This also includes fees payable for the statutory audits of the financial statements of

subsidiary companies.

bIncludes services that are required by law or regulation to be carried out by an appointed auditor and services that support us to fulfil obligations required by law or regulation. This

includes fees for the review of interim results, the accrued fee for the audit of the group’s regulatory financial statements and providing comfort letters for bond issuances.

Fees payable to auditors other than KPMG for audits of certain overseas subsidiaries were £164,000 (FY23: £171,000).

The BT Pension Scheme is an associated pension fund as defined in the Companies (Disclosure of Auditor Remuneration and Liability

Limitation Agreements) (Amendment) Regulations 2011. In FY24 KPMG LLP received total fees from the BT Pension Scheme of £1.9m

(FY23: £1.6m) in respect of the following services:


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£000	£000
Audit of financial statements of associates	1,767	1,622
Audit-related assurance services	26	14
Other non-audit services	74	—
Total services	1,867	1,636

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

6. Operating costs continued



	Material accounting policies that apply to specific items Our income statement and segmental analysis separately identify trading results on an adjusted basis, being before specific items. The directors believe that presentation of the group’s results in this way is relevant to an understanding of the group’s financial performance as specific items are those that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence. This presentation is consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and reported to the BT Group plc Board and the BT Group plc Executive Committee and assists in providing an additional analysis of our reporting trading results. Specific items may not be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other companies. In determining whether an event or transaction is specific, management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors. Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or prior years include significant business restructuring programmes such as the current group-wide cost transformation and modernisation programme, acquisitions and disposals of businesses and investments, impairment of goodwill, charges or credits relating to retrospective regulatory matters, property rationalisation programmes, historical property-related provisions, significant out of period contract settlements, net interest on our pension obligation, and the impact of remeasuring deferred tax balances. In the event that items meet the criteria, which are applied consistently from year to year, they are treated as specific items. Any releases to provisions originally booked as a specific item are also classified as specific. Conversely, when a reversal occurs in relation to a prior year item not classified as specific, the reversal is not classified as specific in the current year. Movements relating to the sports joint venture (Sports JV) with Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD), such as fair value gains or losses on the A and C preference shares or impairment charges on the equity-accounted investment are classified as specific. Refer to note 22 for further detail.


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Revenue
Retrospective regulatory matters	38	(12)
Specific revenue	38	(12)

Operating costs
Restructuring charges	388	300
BT Sport disposal	—	155
Sports JV – subsequent movements	32	34
Other divestment-related items	(22)	2
Retrospective regulatory matters	18	12
Historical property-related provisions	34	—
Specific operating costs before depreciation and amortisation	450	503
Impairment charges due to property rationalisation	11	65
Impairment of goodwill	488	—
Specific operating costs	949	568
Specific operating loss	987	556

Net finance expense
Finance expense relating to the BT Sport disposal	—	(13)
Interest expense on retirement benefit obligation	121	18
Specific net finance expense	121	5
Net specific items charge before tax	1,108	561

Taxation
Tax credit on specific items above	(145)	(308)
	(145)	(308)
Net specific items charge after tax	963	253

Retrospective regulatory matters

We recognised net £56m impact in relation to historical regulatory

matters, with £38m charges recognised in revenue and £18m

within operating costs (FY23: net impact of £nil). These items

represent movements in provisions relating to various matters.

Restructuring charges

We have incurred charges of £388m (FY23: £300m) relating to

projects associated with our group-wide cost transformation and

modernisation programme. Costs primarily relate to leaver costs,

consultancy costs, and staff costs associated with colleagues

working exclusively on programme activity. The net cash cost of

restructuring activity during the year was £348m (FY23 : £326m).

The programme was first announced in May 2020 and runs until

the end of FY25. In response to cost inflation, during FY23 we

revised the gross annualised savings target to £3.0bn (previously

£2.5bn), with a cost to achieve of £1.6bn (previously £1.3bn). We

have now achieved our £3bn target 12 months early at a cost to

achieve of £1.5bn, £0.1bn lower than target (FY23: achieved gross

annualised savings of £2.1bn and costs of £1.1bn).The cumulative

cash costs incurred amount to £1.5bn (FY23: £1.1bn).

BT Sport disposal

In the prior year, we completed the disposal of BT Sport operations

through forming the Sports JV with WBD. We recognised a profit

on disposal of £28m in specific items, made up of £155m charges

recognised within operating costs net of £183m tax credits. We

also recognised a £13m credit within finance costs as specific,

relating to a foreign exchange hedging arrangement with the

Sports JV.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

9. Specific items

Sports JV subsequent movements

Subsequent to the BT Sport disposal, we have recorded a net fair

value loss of £22m ( FY23: £34m) on the A and C preference shares

held in the Sports JV (see note 22), and £10m additional net costs

relating to the transaction.

Other divestment-related items

We recognised a £22m credit (FY23: £2m charge) comprising a

net £25m gain on disposal from the completed divestments of

Pelipod Limited, BT Enia S.p.A and certain city fibre networks and

associated infrastructure assets in Germany; offset by £3m charges

relating to ongoing divestment activity.

Historical property-related provisions

During FY24 we recognised a provision of £34m as a specific item

(FY23: nil) in relation to the cost of remediating and rectifying

asbestos related property issues where we have a present

obligation to do this.

Impairment charges due to property rationalisation

During FY24, we recognised a £11m impairment charge as specific

(FY23: £65m), in relation to an ongoing property rationalisation

programme.

Impairment of goodwill

We have recognised an impairment charge of £488m (FY23: nil) in

respect of goodwill allocated to our Business cash generating unit.

See note 12 for more details.

Interest expense on retirement benefit obligation

During the year we incurred £121m (FY23: £18m) of interest costs

in relation to our defined benefit pension obligations.

Tax on specific items

A tax credit of £145m was recognised in relation to specific items

(FY23: £308m, of which £183m relates to the BT Sport disposal).

10. Taxation



	Material accounting policies that apply to taxation Current income tax is calculated on the basis of the tax laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date in the countries where the group’s subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures operate and generate taxable income. We evaluate positions taken in tax returns where tax regulation is subject to interpretation, and establish provisions if appropriate based on the amounts likely to be paid to tax authorities. Deferred tax is recognised, using the liability method, in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amount of our assets and liabilities and their tax base. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the asset is realised or liability settled, based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred and current income tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities and when the deferred income tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. Any remaining deferred tax asset is recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it is probable that there will be suitable taxable profits against which the deductible temporary difference can be utilised. Deferred tax balances for which there is a right of offset within the same jurisdiction are presented net on the face of the group balance sheet as permitted by IAS 12, with the exception of deferred tax related to our pension schemes which is disclosed within deferred tax assets.



	Key accounting estimates and significant judgements made in accounting for taxation We seek to pay tax in accordance with the laws of the countries where we do business. However, in some areas these laws are unclear, and it can take many years to agree an outcome with a tax authority or through litigation. We estimate our tax on country- by-country and issue-by-issue bases. Our key uncertainties are whether our intra-group trading model will be accepted by a particular tax authority and whether intra-group payments are subject to withholding taxes. We provide for the predicted outcome where an outflow is probable, but the agreed amount can differ materially from our estimates. Approximately 65% by value of the provisions are under active tax authority examination and are therefore likely to be re-estimated or resolved in the coming 12 months. £112m (FY23: £104m) is included in current tax liabilities or offset against current tax assets where netting is appropriate. We are subject to regular tax authority review, under a downside case an additional amount of £123m could be required to be paid. This amount is not provided as we don’t consider this outcome to be probable. Deciding whether to recognise deferred tax assets is judgemental. We only recognise them when we consider it is probable that they can be recovered. In making this judgement we consider evidence such as historical financial performance, future financial plans and trends and whether our intra-group pricing model has been agreed by the relevant tax authority. The value of the group’s income tax assets and liabilities is disclosed on the group balance sheet. The value of the group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities is disclosed below.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

9. Specific items continued

Analysis of our taxation expense for the year


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
United Kingdom
Corporation tax at 25% (FY23: 19%)	(10)	—
Adjustments in respect of earlier years	—	63
Non-UK taxation
Current	(77)	(67)
Adjustments in respect of earlier years	(10)	9
Total current taxation (expense)	(97)	5
Deferred taxation
Origination and reversal of temporary differences	(280)	102
Adjustments in respect of earlier years	46	56
Remeasurement of temporary differences	—	13
Total deferred taxation credit (expense)	(234)	171
Total taxation (expense)	(331)	176

Factors affecting our taxation expense for the year

The taxation expense on the profit for the year differs from the amount computed by applying the UK corporation tax rate to the profit

before taxation as a result of the following factors:


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Profit before taxation	1,897	2,115
Expected taxation expense at UK rate of 25% (FY23: 19%)	(474)	(402)
Effects of:
(Higher)/lower taxes on non-UK profits	25	—
Net permanent differences between tax and accountinga	63	426
Adjustments in respect of earlier yearsb	40	126
Prior year non-UK losses used against current year profits	10	5
Non-UK losses not recognisedc	5	9
Re-measurement of deferred tax balances	—	12
Total taxation credit (expense)	(331)	176
Exclude specific items (note 9)	(145)	(308)
Total taxation expense before specific items	(476)	(132)

aIncludes income that is not taxable or UK income taxable at a different rate including the UK patent box incentive of £60m (FY23: £35m) and group relief received for nil payment of

£177m (FY23: £74m), and expenses for which no tax relief is received including a loss on goodwill impairment of £122m. In FY23 this included the benefit of the UK super-deduction

of £250m and the non-taxable profit on the disposal and revaluation of BT Sport of £104m.

bReflects the differences between initial accounting estimates and tax returns submitted to tax authorities, including the release and establishment of provisions for uncertain tax

positions.

cReflects losses made in countries where it has not been considered appropriate to recognise a deferred tax asset, as future taxable profits are not probable.

Tax components of other comprehensive income


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	Tax credit (expense) £m	Tax credit (expense) £m
Taxation on items that will not be reclassified to the income statement
Pension remeasurements	600	732
Tax on items that have been or may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations	9	—
Fair value movements on cash flow hedges
– net fair value gains or (losses)	69	(90)
– recognised in income and expense	—	—
Total tax recognised in other comprehensive income	678	642
Current tax credita	—	8
Deferred tax credit (expense)	678	634
Total tax recognised in other comprehensive income	678	642

aIncludes £nil (FY23: £nil) relating to cash contributions made to reduce retirement benefit obligations.

Tax (expense) credit recognised directly in equity


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Tax (expense) credit relating to share-based payments	(12)	(9)

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

10. Taxation continued

Deferred taxation


	Fixed asset temporary differences	Retirement benefit obligationsa	Share- based payments	Tax losses	Other	Jurisdictional offset	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	2,913	(195)	(36)	(857)	(154)	—	1,671
Expense (credit) recognised in the income statement	886	(18)	(13)	(1,022)	(4)	—	(171)
Expense (credit) recognised in other comprehensive income	—	(413)	—	(311)	90	—	(634)
Expense (credit) recognised in equity	—	—	9	—	—	—	9
Exchange differences	—	—	—	(4)	(3)	—	(7)
Acquisition of subsidiary	—	—	—	—	2	—	2
Transfer from current tax	—	—	—	—	41	—	41
At 31 March 2023	3,799	(626)	(40)	(2,194)	(28)	—	911
Non-current
Deferred tax asset	—	(626)	(40)	(2,194)	(28)	2,179	(709)
Deferred tax liability	3,799	—	—	—	—	(2,179)	1,620
At 31 March 2023	3,799	(626)	(40)	(2,194)	(28)	—	911
Expense (credit) recognised in the income statement	782	(17)	2	(454)	(79)	—	234
Expense (credit) recognised in other comprehensive income	—	(325)	—	(266)	(87)	—	(678)
Expense (credit) recognised in equity	—	—	12	—	—	—	12
Exchange differences	—	—	—	3	3	—	6
At 31 March 2024	4,581	(968)	(26)	(2,911)	(191)	—	485
Non-current
Deferred tax asset	—	(968)	(26)	(2,911)	(191)	3,048	(1,048)
Deferred tax liability	4,581	—	—	—	—	(3,048)	1,533
At 31 March 2024	4,581	(968)	(26)	(2,911)	(191)	—	485

aIncludes a deferred tax asset of £nil (FY23: £8m) arising on contributions payable to defined contribution pension plans.

The majority of the deferred tax assets and liabilities noted above are anticipated to be realised after more than 12 months.

What factors affect our future tax charges?

We expect a large proportion of our capital spend on fibre rollout to be eligible for full expensing under the UK capital allowances regime,

which provides 100% tax relief in the year of spend on qualifying assets. These deductions drive a projected UK tax loss and no UK tax

payments for FY24. The enhanced and accelerated tax deductions arising under the Government’s super-deduction regime for qualifying

capital spend during FY22 and FY23, together with full expensing in FY24 and pension deficit contribution deductions, result in c. £11.3bn

of tax losses expected to be carried forward from FY24, to be utilised against future UK taxable profits. These are represented by a net c.

£2.8bn deferred tax asset which is disclosed within the £2,911m deferred tax asset relating to tax losses in the table above.

The group is within the scope of the OECD Pillar Two model rules. The UK has enacted Pillar Two legislation which applies for accounting

periods beginning on or after 1 January 2024. Since the Pillar Two legislation was not effective for the current period, the group has no

related current tax exposure. Under the legislation, the group is liable to pay a top-up tax for the difference between its Global Anti-Base

Erosion (GloBE) effective tax rate per jurisdiction and the 15% minimum rate. As the UK rate of corporation tax from FY24 will be 25%,

and the group’s business is primarily in the UK, the impact of these rules on the group is not expected to be material.

What are our unrecognised tax losses and other temporary differences?

At 31 March 2024 we had operating losses and other temporary differences carried forward in respect of which no deferred tax assets

were recognised amounting to £3.7bn (FY23: £3.7bn). Our other temporary differences have no expiry date restrictions. The expiry date

of operating losses carried forward is dependent upon the tax law of the various territories in which the losses arose. A summary of expiry

dates for losses in respect of which restrictions apply is set out below:


At 31 March 2024	£m	Expiry
Restricted losses
Europe	—	2025 - 2043
Americas	372	2025 - 2033
Other	2	2025 - 2033
Total restricted losses	374
Unrestricted operating losses	3,080	No expiry
Other temporary differences	209	No expiry
Total	3,663

At 31 March 2024 we had UK capital losses carried forward in respect of which no deferred tax assets were recognised amounting to

£16.8bn (FY23: £16.8bn). These losses have no expiry date, but we consider the future utilisation of significant amounts of these losses to

be remote.

At 31 March 2024 the undistributed earnings of non-UK subsidiaries were £2.6bn (FY23: £2.5bn). No deferred tax liabilities have been

recognised in respect of these unremitted earnings because the group is in a position to control the timing of any dividends from

subsidiaries and hence any tax consequences that may arise. Under current tax rules, tax of £44m (FY23: £41m) would arise if these

earnings were to be repatriated to the UK.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

10. Taxation continued

What dividends have been paid?

A dividend of £850m was paid to the parent company, BT Group Investments Ltd (FY23: £850m). The directors recommend payment of a

final dividend in respect of FY24 of £780m (FY23: £850m).

12. Intangible assets



	Material accounting policies that apply to intangible assets We recognise identifiable intangible assets where we control the asset, it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the asset will flow to the group, and we can reliably measure the cost of the asset. We amortise all intangible assets, other than goodwill, over their useful economic life. The method of amortisation reflects the pattern in which the assets are expected to be consumed. If the pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight-line method is used. Goodwill Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the group’s share of the identifiable net assets (including intangible assets) of the acquired business. Our goodwill impairment policy is set out later in this note. Acquired intangible assets – customer relationships and brands Intangible assets such as customer relationships or brands acquired through business combinations are recorded at fair value at the date of acquisition and subsequently carried at amortised cost. Assumptions are used in estimating the fair values of these relationships or brands and include management’s estimates of revenue and profits to be generated by them. Telecommunications licences Licence fees paid to governments, which permit telecommunications activities to be operated for defined periods, are initially recorded at cost and amortised from the time the network is available for use to the end of the licence period or where our usage can extend beyond the initial licence period, over the period we expect to benefit from the use of the licences, which is typically 20 years. Licences acquired through business combinations are recorded at fair value at the date of acquisition and subsequently carried at amortised cost. The fair value is based on management’s assumption of future cash flows using market expectations at acquisition date. Computer software Computer software comprises computer software licences purchased from third parties, and also the cost of internally developed software. Computer software licences purchased from third parties are initially recorded at cost. We capitalise costs directly associated with the production of internally developed software, including direct and indirect labour costs of development, only where it is probable that the software will generate future economic benefits, the cost of the asset can be reliably measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet. Costs which do not meet these criteria and research costs are expensed as incurred. Our development costs which give rise to internally developed software include upgrading the network architecture or functionality and developing service platforms aimed at offering new services to our customers. Other Other intangible assets include website development costs and other licences. Items are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic life or the term of the contract.
	Estimated useful economic lives The estimated useful economic lives assigned to the principal categories of intangible assets are as follows:
	– Computer software	2 to 10 years
	– Telecommunications licences	2 to 20 years
	– Customer relationships and brands	1 to 15 years
	Impairment of intangible assets Intangible assets with finite useful lives are tested for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, the recoverable amount is assessed by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant cash generating unit and the fair value less costs to dispose. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment at least annually as described below. Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement, as a specific item. If a cash generating unit is impaired, impairment losses are allocated firstly against goodwill, and secondly on a pro-rata basis against intangible and other assets.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Dividends


	Goodwill	Customer relationships and brandsa	Telecoms licences and otherb	Internally developed softwarec	Purchased softwarec	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cost
At 1 April 2022	7,925	3,383	3,490	5,346	971	21,115
Additions	—	—	—	815	203	1,018
Disposals and adjustmentsd	(21)	—	—	(466)	151	(336)
Transfers	—	—	—	30	(38)	(8)
Exchange differences	72	—	1	2	7	82
Transfers to assets held for salee	(13)	—	—	—	—	(13)
At 31 March 2023	7,963	3,383	3,491	5,727	1,294	21,858
Additions	—	—	—	732	206	938
Disposals and adjustmentsd	(4)	(1)	(12)	(671)	298	(390)
Transfersf	—	—	—	217	(95)	122
Exchange differences	(29)	—	(1)	(1)	(5)	(36)
At 31 March 2024	7,930	3,382	3,478	6,004	1,698	22,492
Accumulated amortisation
At 1 April 2022	—	2,469	908	3,595	326	7,298
Amortisation charge for the year	—	231	185	596	153	1,165
Impairment	—	—	—	—	—	—
Disposals and adjustmentsd	—	—	1	(389)	79	(309)
Transfers	—	—	—	(56)	56	—
Exchange differences	—	—	1	1	7	9
Transfers to assets held for sale	—	—	—	—	—	—
At 31 March 2023	—	2,700	1,095	3,747	621	8,163
Amortisation charge for the year	—	231	185	762	70	1,248
Impairment	488	—	—	—	—	488
Disposals and adjustmentsd	—	—	(13)	(462)	96	(379)
Transfersf	—	—	—	(41)	90	49
Exchange differences	—	—	(1)	—	(4)	(5)
At 31 March 2024	488	2,931	1,266	4,006	873	9,564

Carrying amount
At 31 March 2023	7,963	683	2,396	1,980	673	13,695
At 31 March 2024	7,442	451	2,212	1,998	825	12,928

aCustomer relationships and brands relate to customer relationships recognised on acquisition of EE.

bTelecoms licences and other primarily represents spectrum licences. These include 2100 MHz licence with book value of £593m (FY23: £643m), 1800 MHz with book value of

£544m (FY23: £590m), 700Mhz with book value of £266m (FY23: £281m), 3400 MHz with book value of £226m (FY23: £242m) and 2600 MHz with book value of £185m (FY23:

£206m). Spectrum licences are being amortised over a period between 14 and 20 years.

cIncludes a carrying amount of £623m (FY23: £1,125m) in respect of assets under construction, which are not yet amortised.

d Disposals and adjustments include the removal of assets from the group’s fixed asset registers following disposals and the identification of fully amortised assets (including £0.3bn in

FY24 through operation of the group’s annual asset verification exercise).

eFor a breakdown of assets held for sale see note 20 .

fDuring FY24, assets with cost of £122m and accumulated depreciation of £49m were reclassified from property, plant and equipment to intangible assets following review of asset

registers.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Intangible assets continued

Impairment of goodwill



	Material accounting policies that apply to impairment of goodwill We perform an annual goodwill impairment review. Goodwill recognised in a business combination does not generate cash flows independently of other assets or groups of assets. As a result, the recoverable amount, being the value in use, is determined at a cash generating unit (CGU) level. These CGUs represent the smallest identifiable groups of assets that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other groups of assets. Our CGUs are deemed to be Consumer and Business. We allocate goodwill to each of the CGUs that we expect to benefit from the business combination. Each CGU to which goodwill is allocated represents the lowest level within the group at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. The value in use of each CGU is determined using risk-adjusted cash flow projections derived from financial plans approved by the BT Group plc Board covering a five-year period. They reflect management’s risk-adjusted expectations of revenue, EBITDA growth, capital expenditure, working capital and operating cash flows, based on past experience and future expectations of business performance. Cash flows beyond the fifth year have been extrapolated using perpetuity growth rates.



	Significant judgements and critical accounting estimates made in reviewing goodwill for impairment Determining our CGUs The determination of our CGUs is judgemental. The identification of CGUs involves an assessment of whether the asset or group of assets generate largely independent cash inflows. This involves consideration of how our core assets are operated and whether these generate independent revenue streams. In FY23 our CGUs were aligned with the Consumer, Enterprise and Global customer-facing units in existence at the time. From 1 April 2023 the Enterprise and Global units are managed and reported as a single combined unit, Business. Financial information is provided to the BT Group plc Executive Committee on a consolidated basis only, and there have been material changes to the structure and organisation of the combined Business unit following the merger. During FY24 we have reviewed the identification of our CGUs in light of the creation of Business. We concluded that the Enterprise and Global CGUs have been replaced with a single Business CGU. In reaching this conclusion we considered the way in which the combined unit is monitored and the degree of integration within the combined unit, specifically in relation to revenue streams and its asset base. This conclusion also reflects the fact that the cash flows of the legacy Enterprise and Global units are no longer independent and it is no longer possible to report the performance of these units on an individual basis. Accordingly, our CGUs are Consumer and Business from 1 April 2023, aligned with the corresponding CFUs and operating segments (note 4). Estimating value in use Our value in use calculations require estimates in relation to uncertain items, including management’s expectations of future revenue growth, operating costs, profit margins, operating cash flows and the discount rate for each CGU. Future cash flows used in the value in use calculations are on a nominal basis and based on risk-adjusted projections derived from the latest BT Group plc Board- approved five-year financial plans, representing management's best risk-adjusted estimate of future growth. This includes the direct and indirect impacts of inflation and associated mitigations. Expectations about future growth reflect the expectations of growth in the markets to which the CGU relates and consideration of the overall variability relating to individual assumptions at the unit level. The future cash flows are discounted using a pre-tax nominal discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money. The discount rate used in each CGU is adjusted for the risk specific to the asset, including the countries in which cash flow will be generated, for which the future cash flow estimates have not been adjusted.
	Estimating terminal growth A long term growth rate into perpetuity is applied immediately at the end of the five year forecast period. We calculate this for each CGU as the lower of the nominal GDP growth rate forecasts and the long-term compound annual growth rate as estimated by management. Long-term compound annual growth rates may be lower than forecast nominal GDP growth rates due to market- specific factors including inflation expectations, the regulatory environment and competition intensity.

We tested our goodwill for impairment as at 31 March 2024. The carrying value of goodwill and the key assumptions used in performing

the annual impairment assessment and sensitivities are disclosed below.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Intangible assets continued


	Consumer	Legacy Enterprise	Legacy Global	Business	Total
Cost	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	3,900	3,573	452	—	7,925
Transfer	—	—	—	—	—
Acquisitions and disposals	(26)	4	1	—	(21)
Exchange differences	—	4	68	—	72
Transfer to assets held for sale	—	(4)	(9)	—	(13)
At 31 March 2023	3,874	3,577	512	—	7,963
Transfer	—	(3,577)	(512)	4,089	—
Impairment	—	—	—	(488)	(488)
Acquisitions and disposals	—	—	—	(4)	(4)
Exchange differences	—	—	—	(29)	(29)
Transfer to assets held for sale	—	—	—	—	—
At 31 March 2024	3,874	—	—	3,568	7,442

Of the £4.1bn attributable to the Business CGU at 31 March 2023, £2.6bn relates to the acquisition of EE in 2016 with the rest relating to

historical small acquisitions.

Outcome of our annual impairment review

Our FY24 impairment testing exercise concluded that there is significant headroom in our Consumer CGU, consistent with FY23.

The carrying value of the Business CGU exceeded its value in use by £488m. We have therefore booked an impairment charge equivalent

to this amount in the income statement, presented as a specific item (note 9). No impairment was recognised in FY23.

Historical trends including the transition from legacy products indicate risk within forecasts which we have made appropriate adjustment

for in line with IAS 36, so as to arrive at a risk adjusted estimate of future economic conditions which reflects long-term viability and

trading risks inherent in delivering against the group’s strategic pillars.

At the same time, to acknowledge this risk we have reduced terminal growth rate applied to cash flows when calculating the terminal

value. We have also excluded uncommitted restructuring costs and benefits including those that relate to the group-wide restructuring

programmes. The combined impact of these adjustments has led to a value in use for IAS 36 impairment testing purposes that is indicative

of an impairment. Calculating the value in use has involved the application of assumptions and estimates that have had a material impact

on the impairment charge recognised. Management judge that the BT Group plc Board-approved forecasts used to calculate value in use

support the carrying amount of the Business CGU as at 31 March 2024. We consider below the impact of reasonably possible alternatives

in the next 12 months.

What discount rate have we used?

The pre-tax discount rates applied to the cash flow forecasts are derived from our post-tax weighted average cost of capital. The

assumptions used in the calculation of the group’s weighted average cost of capital are benchmarked to externally available data. The

pre-tax discount rate used in performing the value in use calculation for Consumer was 9.25% in FY24 and 9.4% in FY23. We have used a

slightly higher rate of 9.27% for Business. This reflects the higher risk countries in which it operates, which in FY23 were part of the Global

CGU. In FY23 we used a discount rate of 9.4% for Enterprise and 9.7% for Global, again reflecting the higher risk from countries in which it

operates. The reduction in discount rates in FY24 reflects that the cash flows, rather than the discount rate, have been risk adjusted.

What growth rates have we used?

The perpetuity growth rates are determined based on the forecast market growth rates of the regions in which the CGU operates, and

reflect an assessment of the long-term growth prospects of that market. The growth rates have been benchmarked against external data

for the relevant markets and analysts’ expectations. None of the growth rates applied exceed the expected average long-term growth

rates for those markets or sectors. In FY24 we have used a perpetuity growth rate of 1.0% for Consumer and 0.7% for the Business CGU. In

FY23 the perpetuity growth rate was 2.0% for Enterprise and Consumer, and 2.4% for Global.

Key assumptions applied to testing goodwill allocated to the Business CGU

Key assumptions that value in use is most sensitive to are EBITDA growth over the 5-year forecast period; the long term growth rate for

the terminal period; and the weighted average cost of capital used to discount cash flows.

– Our value in use assumes risk-adjusted EBITDA compound annual growth of 0.7% over the 5-year forecast period. The growth rate is

the projected adjusted EBITDA growth rate on the cash flow forecasts used in our goodwill impairment model and reflect the growth

and maturity of the industry we operate in and historical trends. Compound annual growth rates are risk-adjusted to the compound

annual growth rates used in our BT Group plc Board-approved forecasts.

– Application of the terminal growth rate of 0.7%, equivalent to compound annual growth within the terminal period, is viewed as a key

assumption with c.75% of the value in use derived from terminal cash flows.

– Value in use is sensitive to the weighted average cost of capital used to discount future cash flows.

The table below shows the sensitivity of the £488m impairment recognised to reasonably possible changes in key assumptions:


	Low scenario	High scenario
EBITDA compound annual growth rate +/- 1%	(£1,260m) more impairment	£374m less impairment
Long term growth rate +/- 0.7%	(£478m) more impairment	£488m less impairment
Weighted average cost of capital +/- 1%	(£865m) more impairment	£488m less impairment

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Intangible assets continued

Other sensitivities applicable to the Business CGU

Applying a severe but plausible downside scenario, reflecting a plan that we are highly confident will be achieved or exceeded, based on

the same risk population would result in a further impairment charge of £2,430m in addition to the £488m recognised. Management

consider that it is reasonably possible to expect that actual future cash flows will outperform the risk-adjusted cash flows modelled for the

purpose of testing goodwill impairment. A less conservative view of risks and opportunities in the base case of our forecast would result in

headroom of approximately £2,083m rather than the impairment charge booked.

13. Property, plant and equipment



	Material accounting policies that apply to property, plant and equipment Our property, plant and equipment is included at historical cost, net of accumulated depreciation, government grants and any impairment charges. Property, plant and equipment acquired through business combinations is initially recorded at fair value and subsequently accounted for on the same basis as our existing assets. We derecognise items of property, plant and equipment on disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. The difference between the sale proceeds and the net book value at the date of disposal is recognised in operating costs in the income statement. Included within the cost of network infrastructure and equipment are direct and indirect labour costs, materials and directly attributable overheads. We depreciate property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis from the time the asset is available for use, to write off the asset’s cost over the estimated useful life taking into account any expected residual value. Freehold land is not depreciated. Estimated useful economic lives The estimated useful lives assigned to principal categories of assets are as follows:
	Land and buildings
	– Freehold buildings	14 to 50 years
	– Short-term leasehold improvements	Shorter of 10 years or lease term
	– Leasehold land and buildings	Shorter of unexpired portion of lease or 40 years
	Network infrastructure
	Transmission equipment
	– Duct	40 years
	– Cable	3 to 25 years
	– Fibre	5 to 20 years
	Exchange equipment	2 to 13 years
	Other network equipment	2 to 20 years
	Other assets
	– Motor vehicles	2 to 10 years
	– Computers and office equipment	3 to 7 years
	Residual values and useful lives are reassessed annually and, if necessary, changes are recognised prospectively. Network share assets Certain assets have been contributed to a network share arrangement by both EE and Hutchison 3G UK Limited, with legal title remaining with the contributor. This is considered to be a reciprocal arrangement. Our share of the assets on acquisition of EE was recognised at fair value within tangible assets, and depreciated in line with policy. Subsequent additions are recorded at cost. Impairment of property, plant and equipment We test property, plant and equipment for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, we assess the recoverable amount by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant asset and the fair value less costs to dispose. If it is not possible to determine the recoverable amount for the individual asset then we assess impairment by reference to the relevant cash generating unit as described in note 12.

	Building Digital UK (BDUK) government grants We receive government grants in relation to BDUK and other rural superfast broadband contracts. Where we have achieved certain service levels, or delivered the network more efficiently than anticipated, we have an obligation to either re-invest or repay grant funding. Where this is the case, we recognise deferred income in respect of the funding that will be re-invested or repaid, and make a corresponding adjustment to the carrying amount of the related property, plant and equipment. Assessing the timing of whether and when we change the estimated take-up assumption is judgemental as it involves considering information which is not always observable. Our consideration on whether and when to change the base case assumption is dependent on our expectation of the long-term take-up trend. Our assessment of how much grant income to defer includes consideration of the difference between the take-up percentage agreed with the local authority and the likelihood of actual take-up. The value of the government grants deferred is disclosed in note 16.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Intangible assets continued


	Land and buildings	Network infrastructure		Othera	Assets under construction	Total
	Land and buildings	Held by Openreach	Held by other units	Othera	Assets under construction	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cost
At 1 April 2022	1,022	31,276	24,439	1,444	1,446	59,627
Additionsb	7	—	129	7	3,947	4,090
Transfers	89	2,617	913	211	(3,822)	8
Disposals and adjustmentsc	31	(118)	(183)	(33)	(70)	(373)
Transfer to assets held for saled	—	—	(108)	(13)	—	(121)
Exchange differences	16	—	99	6	1	122
At 31 March 2023	1,165	33,775	25,289	1,622	1,502	63,353
Additionsb	6	1	73	12	3,851	3,943
Transferse	85	2,562	906	279	(3,954)	(122)
Disposals and adjustmentsc	(95)	(208)	(2,198)	(162)	137	(2,526)
Transfer to assets held for saled	—	—	—	—	—	—
Exchange differences	(11)	—	(66)	(5)	(1)	(83)
At 31 March 2024	1,150	36,130	24,004	1,746	1,535	64,565
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 April 2022	621	17,476	20,050	1,025	—	39,172
Depreciation charge for the year	50	1,466	1,144	218	—	2,878
Impairment	—	—	—	11	—	11
Transfers	—	195	(192)	(4)	—	(1)
Disposals and adjustmentsc	32	(139)	(133)	(36)	—	(276)
Transfer to assets held for saled	—	—	(106)	(11)	—	(117)
Exchange differences	13	—	91	7	—	111
At 31 March 2023	716	18,998	20,854	1,210	—	41,778
Depreciation charge for the year	55	1,489	1,085	263	—	2,892
Impairment	—	78	—	—	30	108
Transferse	—	—	(49)	—	—	(49)
Disposals and adjustmentsc	(30)	(134)	(2,222)	(174)	—	(2,560)
Transfer to assets held for saled	—	—	—	—	—	—
Exchange differences	(9)	—	(61)	(5)	—	(75)
At 31 March 2024	732	20,431	19,607	1,294	30	42,094

Carrying amount
At 31 March 2023	449	14,777	4,435	412	1,502	21,575
Engineering stores	—	—	—	—	92	92
Total at 31 March 2023	449	14,777	4,435	412	1,594	21,667
At 31 March 2024	418	15,699	4,397	452	1,505	22,471
Engineering stores	—	—	—	—	91	91
Total at 31 March 2024	418	15,699	4,397	452	1,596	22,562

aOther mainly comprises motor vehicles, computers and fixtures and fittings.

b Net of government grants of £91m (FY23 : £150m).

c Disposals and adjustments include the removal of assets from the group’s fixed asset registers following disposals and the identification of fully depreciated assets (including £2.2bn

in FY24 through operation of the group’s annual asset verification exercise). They also include adjustments between gross cost and accumulated depreciation following review of

fixed asset registers, and adjustments resulting from changes in assumptions used in calculating lease-end obligations where the corresponding asset is capitalised.

dTransfers to assets held for sale are detailed in note 20.

eDuring FY24, assets with cost of £122m and accumulated depreciation of £49m were reclassified from property, plant and equipment to intangible assets following review of asset

registers.

Included within the above disclosure are assets used in arrangements which represent core business activities for the group and which

meet the definition of operating leases:

– £15,699m (FY23: £14,777m) of the carrying amount of the network infrastructure asset class represents Openreach’s network

infrastructure. The majority of the associated assets are used to deliver fixed-line telecommunications services that have been assessed

as containing operating leases, to both internal and external communications providers. Network infrastructure held by Openreach is

presented separately in the table above; however it is not practicable to separate out infrastructure not used in operating lease

arrangements.

– Other assets includes devices with a carrying amount of £160m (FY23: £163m) that are made available to retail customers under

arrangements that contain operating leases. These are not presented separately in the table above as they are not material relative to

the group’s overall asset base.

The carrying amount of land and buildings, including leasehold improvements, comprised:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Freehold	71	80
Leasehold	347	369
Total land and buildings	418	449

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13. Property, plant and equipment continued

Network infrastructure

Some of our network assets are jointly controlled by EE Limited with Hutchison 3G UK Limited. These relate to shared 3G network and

certain elements of network for 4G rural sites. The net book value of the group’s share of assets controlled by its joint operation MBNL is

£759m (FY23: £721m) and is recorded within network infrastructure.

Within network infrastructure are assets with a net book value of £11.5bn (FY23: £10.9bn) which have useful economic lives of more than

18 years.

BT Tower

In FY24 we agreed to the sale of the BT Tower for headline consideration of £275m, as part of the simplification of the group’s property

portfolio.

The carrying amount of the BT Tower asset is £4m at 31 March 2024. It is not considered to meet the IFRS 5 criteria for classification as

held for sale at the reporting date, reflecting the extent of decommissioning work needed to provide vacant possession of the site.

The useful economic lives of assets associated with the BT Tower have been reassessed in light of the anticipated disposal in FY30.



	Significant judgements made in accounting for the BT Tower sale Exchange of contracts in respect of the BT Tower sale with MCR Hotels occurred during FY24, with transfer of legal title anticipated to take place in a three year window between 2028 and 2031 subject to achieving vacant possession of the site. We will continue to enjoy exclusive rights to occupy and access the site prior to completion. The delay between exchange and completion reflects the extensive work required to decommission the site. We have exercised significant judgement in concluding that control over BT Tower passes to the buyer at the point of completion rather than exchange. In doing so we performed a detailed assessment of the restrictions placed on BT’s use of the asset in the period following exchange, as well as the transaction pricing structure, and concluded that they were insufficient to represent a transfer to the buyer of sufficiently all the risks and rewards associated with ownership. We placed particular weight on the fact that legal title to the site does not transfer to the buyer until the point of completion. Had we concluded that control had passed on exchange of contracts in FY24, the transaction would have been treated as a sale and leaseback with profit on disposal recognised in the period and associated derecognition of the BT Tower asset and accounting for the leaseback.

14. Leases



	Material accounting policies that apply to leases Identifying whether a lease exists At inception of a contract, we determine whether the contract is, or contains, a lease. A lease exists if the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset, for a period of time, in exchange for consideration. In making this assessment, we consider whether: – The contract involves the use of an identified asset, either explicitly or implicitly. The asset must be physically distinct or represent substantially all the capacity of a physically distinct asset. Assets that a supplier has a substantive right to substitute are not considered distinct. – The lessee (either the group, or the group’s customers) has the right to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from the use of the asset throughout the period of use; and – The lessee has the right to direct the use of the asset, in other words, has the decision-making rights that are most relevant to changing how and for what purpose the asset is used. Where practicable, and by class of underlying asset, we have elected to account for leases containing a lease component and one or more non-lease components as a single lease component. Where this election has been taken, it has been applied to the entire asset.
	Lessee accounting We recognise a lease liability and right-of-use asset at the commencement of the lease. Lease liabilities are initially measured at the present value of lease payments that are due over the lease term, discounted using the group’s incremental borrowing rate. The lease term is the non-cancellable period of the lease adjusted for the impact of any extension options that we are reasonably certain that the lessee will exercise, or termination options that we are reasonably certain that the lessee will not exercise. The incremental borrowing rate is the rate that we would have to pay for a loan of a similar term, and with similar security, to obtain an asset of similar value. Lease payments include: – fixed payments – variable lease payments that depend on an index or rate – amounts expected to be paid under residual value guarantees – the exercise price of any purchase options that we are reasonably certain to exercise – payments due over optional renewal periods where we are reasonably certain to renew – penalties for early termination of the lease where we are reasonably certain to terminate early

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13. Property, plant and equipment continued


	Lease liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. They are remeasured if there is a change in future lease payments, including changes in the index or rate used to determine those payments, or the amount we expect to be payable under a residual value guarantee. We also remeasure lease liabilities where the lease term changes. This occurs when the non-cancellable period of the lease changes, or on occurrence of a significant event or change in circumstances within the control of the lessee and which changes our initial assessment in regard to whether the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise extension options or not to exercise termination options. Where the lease term changes we remeasure the lease liability using the group’s incremental borrowing rate at the date of reassessment. Where a significant event or change in circumstances does not occur, the lease term remains unchanged and the carrying amounts of the lease liability and associated right-of-use asset will decline over time. Right-of-use assets are initially measured at the initial amount of the corresponding lease liabilities, adjusted for any prepaid lease payments, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of any decommissioning costs that have been recognised as provisions, less any lease incentives received. They are subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method to the earlier of the end of the useful life of the asset or the end of the lease term. Right-of-use assets are tested for impairment following the policy set out in note 13 and are adjusted for any remeasurement of lease liabilities. We have elected not to recognise lease liabilities and right-of-use assets for short-term leases that have a lease term of 12 months or less, and leases of low-value assets with a purchase price under £5,000. We recognise payments for these items as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any variable lease payments that do not depend on an index or rate, such as usage-based payments, are recognised as an expense in the period to which the variability relates.
	Lessor accounting At inception or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, we allocate the consideration in the contract to each lease component on the basis of their relative stand-alone prices. When we act as a lessor, we determine at lease inception whether each lease is a finance lease or an operating lease. To classify each lease, we make an overall assessment of whether the lease transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the underlying asset. If this is the case, then the lease is a finance lease; if not, then it is an operating lease. As part of this assessment, we consider certain indicators such as whether the lease is for the major part of the economic life of the asset.
	When we are an intermediate lessor, we account for our interests in the headlease and the sublease separately. We assess the lease classification of a sublease with reference to the right-of-use asset arising from the headlease, not with reference to the underlying asset. If a headlease is a short-term lease to which we apply the exemption described above, then we classify the sublease as an operating lease. If an arrangement contains lease and non-lease components, then we apply IFRS 15 to allocate the consideration in the contract. We apply the derecognition and impairment requirements in IFRS 9 to the net investment in the lease. We further regularly review estimated unguaranteed residual values used in calculating the gross investment in the lease. We recognise lease payments received under operating leases as income on a straight-line basis over the lease term as part of ‘other revenue’.



	Significant judgements made in accounting for leases The lease term is a key determinant of the size of the lease liability and right-of-use asset recognised where the group acts as lessee; and the deferral period for any upfront connection charges where the group acts as lessor. Determining the lease term requires judgement to evaluate whether we are reasonably certain the lessee will exercise extension options or will not exercise termination options. Key facts and circumstances that create an incentive to exercise those options are considered; these include: – Our anticipated operational, retail and office property requirements in the mid and long term. – The availability of suitable alternative sites. – Costs or penalties associated with exiting lease arrangements relative to the benefits to be gained, including costs of removing leasehold improvements or relocating, and indirect costs such as disruption to business. – Significant investments in leased sites, in particular those with useful lives beyond the lease term. – Costs associated with extending lease arrangements including rent increases during secondary lease periods. Our definition of ‘reasonable certainty’, and therefore the lease term, will often align with the judgements made in our medium-term plan, in particular for leases of non-specialised property and equipment on rolling (or ‘evergreen’) arrangements that continue until terminated and which can be exited without significant penalty. Following initial determination of the lease term, we exercise judgement in evaluating whether events or changes in circumstances are sufficiently significant to change the initial assessment of whether we are reasonably certain the lessee will exercise extension options or will not exercise termination options; and in the subsequent reassessment of the lease term.
	Key judgements exercised in setting the lease term The quantum of the lease liability and right-of-use asset currently recognised on our balance sheet is most significantly affected by the judgement exercised in setting the lease term for the arrangement under which the bulk of our operational UK property estate is held. Setting the lease term for our leased cell sites has also involved the use of judgement, albeit to a lesser degree.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Leases continued


	UK operational property portfolio Substantially all of our leased property estate is held under an arrangement which can be terminated in 2031, at which point we may either vacate some or all properties or purchase the entire estate. If neither option is taken the lease continues to the next unilaterally available break point in 2041. The lease liability recognised for the arrangement reflects a lease end date of 2031. On initial recognition we concluded that, although the majority of these properties are expected to be needed on a long-term basis, we couldn’t be reasonably certain that we wouldn’t exercise the termination option or that we would exercise the purchase option. In coming to this conclusion, we had due regard to material sub-lease arrangements relating to the estate. As time progresses our assessment may change; if this happens, we will remeasure the lease liability and right-of-use asset to reflect either the rentals due for any properties we will continue to occupy, or the cost of purchasing the estate, using an updated discount rate. There would be no overall impact on net assets. If the assessment were to change at the balance sheet date of 31 March 2024: – Exercising the purchase option would lead to an estimated increase in the lease liability and right-of-use asset of between £3bn and £5bn. – Continuing to lease the estate beyond 2031 until the next available break in 2041 would lead to an estimated increase in the lease liability and right-of-use asset of between £1bn and £2bn. Our assessment will be directly linked to future strategic decisions, which will be resolved at some time prior to 2031, around the development of the fixed network and the associated rationalisation of our exchange estate. The breadth of the ranges reflects the significant uncertainty around key variables used to determine cash outflows, especially future inflation and which properties the group will be able to exit prior to or in 2031. Estimates are based on discounted cash outflows and do not reflect the likely and significant impact of cash inflows generated from the disposal, repurposing or subleasing of properties retained post-2031. We are permitted to hand a limited number of properties back to the lessor prior to 2031. On initial adoption of IFRS 16 we were not reasonably certain which properties would be handed back and as such the lease term did not reflect the exercise of these options. Subsequently we exercise judgement in identifying significant events that trigger reassessment of our initial conclusion. We exercise similar judgement in identifying events triggering reassessment of whether we are reasonably certain we will not exercise termination options associated with other leased properties. In doing so we consider decisions associated with our ongoing workplace rationalisation programme, in particular decisions to exit a particular location or lease an alternative property. Generally we remain reasonably certain that we will not exercise a termination option until implementation of the associated business plan has progressed to a stage that we are committed to exiting the property. At that point we reassess the lease term by reference to the time we expect to remain in occupation of the property and any notice period associated with exercise of the option.
	Cell sites Most of the liability recognised in respect of leased cell sites relates to multi-site arrangements with commercial providers. The fixed-term nature of these arrangements means it has not been necessary to exercise significant judgement when determining the lease term. Where the arrangements offer extension options we have been required to conclude whether the options are reasonably certain to be exercised. Although the balance sheet could be materially affected by the conclusion reached in regard to these options, we have not been required to exercise a significant degree of judgement in arriving at the lease term having regard to the period of time covered by the options, the difficulty in predicting the group’s long-term network requirements, and the relatively high threshold that ‘reasonably certain' represents. A smaller proportion of the cell site liability relates to arrangements with individual landlords which are either rolling or can be exited with notice. When setting the initial lease term for these arrangements we exercised significant judgement in establishing the period that we are reasonably certain to require use of the site. We broadly aligned lease terms with our medium-term planning horizon after assessing the relative strengths of the following factors: Long-term economic incentives to remain on sites including existing capital improvements; A need to maintain flexibility in our ability to develop and manage our network infrastructure to react quickly to technological developments and evolving capacity requirements; and Incentives to renegotiate arrangements in the medium term to gain more security over sites to support future capital investment. Although significant judgement has been exercised in determining the lease term, reaching an alternative conclusion would not have a material impact on the balance sheet having regard to the most feasible alternative lease terms. Subsequently, we consider key events that trigger reassessment of lease terms to be developments which resolve uncertainty around our economic incentive to remain on individual sites in the long term. These are primarily lease renegotiations and significant capital investments, for example that associated with our 5G rollout and other capital refresh programmes.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Leases continued

Right-of-use assets

Most of our right-of-use assets are associated with our leased property portfolio, specifically our office, retail and exchange estate. We

also lease a significant proportion of our network infrastructure, including mobile cell and switch sites.


	Land and buildings	Network infrastructure	Motor vehicles	Other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	3,941	110	369	9	4,429
Additionsa	203	16	150	2	371
Depreciation charge for the yearb	(521)	(32)	(131)	(5)	(689)
Impairmentb	(75)	—	—	—	(75)
Transfer to assets held for sale	(3)	—	—	—	(3)
Other movementsc	(49)	1	(3)	(1)	(52)
At 31 March 2023	3,496	95	385	5	3,981
Additionsa	271	40	179	1	491
Depreciation charge for the yearb	(493)	(33)	(121)	(5)	(652)
Impairmentb	(10)	—	—	—	(10)
Other movementsc	(108)	(4)	(56)	—	(168)
At 31 March 2024	3,156	98	387	1	3,642

a Additions comprise increases to right-of-use assets as a result of entering into new leases, and upwards remeasurement of existing leases arising from lease extensions or

reassessments and increases to lease payments.

bImpairment charges relates primarily to the early exit of leases as a result of ongoing property rationalisation activity.

cOther movements primarily relate to terminated leases and downwards remeasurements of right-of-use assets arising from reductions or reassessments of lease terms and

decreases in lease payments.

Lease liabilities

Lease liabilities recognised are as follows:


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Current	766	800
Non-current	4,189	4,559
	4,955	5,359

The following amounts relating to the group’s obligations under lease arrangements were recognised in the income statement in the year:

– Interest expense of £134m (FY23: £133m) on lease liabilities.

– Variable lease payments of £39m ( FY23: £38m) which are not dependent on an index or rate and which have not been included in the

measurement of lease liabilities.

Expenses relating to leases of low-value assets and short-term leases for which no right-of-use asset or lease liability has been recognised

were not material.

The total cash outflow for leases in the year was £882m (FY23: £860m). Our cash flow statement and normalised free cash flow

reconciliation present £748m (FY23: £727m) of the cash outflow as relating to the principal element of lease liability payments, with the

remaining balance of £134m (FY23: £133m) presented within interest paid.

Note 26 presents a maturity analysis of the payments due over the remaining lease term for lease liabilities currently recognised on the

balance sheet. This analysis only includes payments to be made over the reasonably certain lease term. Cash outflows are likely to exceed

these amounts as payments will be made on optional periods that we do not currently consider to be reasonably certain, and in respect of

leases entered into in future periods.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Leases continued

Other information relating to leases

At 31 March 2024 the group was committed to future minimum lease payments of £55m (FY23: £145m) in respect of leases which have

not yet commenced and for which no lease liability has been recognised.

The following table analyses cash payments to be received across the remaining term of operating lease arrangements where BT is lessor:


	To be recognised as revenue (note 5)a	To be recognised as other operating income (note 6)	Total
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m
Less than one year	431	17	448
One to two years	117	11	128
Two to three years	41	11	52
Three to four years	10	9	19
Four to five years	9	3	12
More than five years	—	5	5
Total undiscounted lease payments	608	56	664

At 31 March 2023
Less than one year	416	19	435
One to two years	131	15	146
Two to three years	46	15	61
Three to four years	13	14	27
Four to five years	10	13	23
More than five years	—	20	20
Total undiscounted lease payments	616	96	712

aFuture operating lease income to be recognised as revenue primarily relates to income from Openreach's fixed access subscription services which meet the definition of leases under

IFRS 16 and which typically are expected to have a lease period terms of one year or less.

15. Trade and other receivables



	Material accounting policies that apply to trade and other receivables Trade receivables are recognised where the right to receive payment from customers is conditional only on the passage of time. We initially recognise trade and other receivables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. They are subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value due to the short maturity of amounts receivable. We provide services to consumer and business customers, mainly on credit terms. We know that certain debts due to us will not be paid through the default of a small number of our customers. Because of this, we recognise an allowance for doubtful debts on initial recognition of receivables, which is deducted from the gross carrying amount of the receivable. The allowance is calculated by reference to credit losses expected to be incurred over the lifetime of the receivable. In estimating a loss allowance we consider historical experience and informed credit assessment alongside other factors such as the current state of the economy and particular industry issues. We consider reasonable and supportable information that is relevant and available without undue cost or effort. Once recognised, trade receivables are continuously monitored and updated. Allowances are based on our historical loss experiences for the relevant aged category as well as forward-looking information and general economic conditions. Allowances are calculated by individual CFUs in order to reflect the specific nature of the customers relevant to that CFU. The group utilises factoring arrangements for selected trade receivables. Trade receivables that are subject to debt factoring arrangements are derecognised if they meet the conditions for derecognition detailed in IFRS 9 ‘Financial instruments’ and the related cash flows received are presented as cash flows from operating activities. Contingent assets such as any insurance recoveries which we expect to recoup, have not been recognised in the financial statements as these are only recognised within trade and other receivables when their receipt is virtually certain.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Leases continued


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Current
Trade receivables	1,899	1,395
Amounts owed by ultimate parent company	25	26
Prepayments	586	545
Accrued income	162	158
Deferred contract costs	383	369
Finance lease receivables	31	29
Amounts due from joint ventures	163	268
Other assetsa	340	297
	3,589	3,087
Non-current
Deferred contract costs	229	211
Finance lease receivables	107	98
Other assetsa	305	194
	641	503

aOther assets comprise Flex Pay receivables, prepayments and £57m (FY23: £70m) of deferred cash consideration mainly relating to the disposal of BT Sport, see note 20.

Amounts due from joint ventures relates to a sterling Revolving Credit Facility (RCF) provided to the Sports JV, see note 29. The expected

loss provision is immaterial.

Trade receivables are stated after deducting allowances for doubtful debts, as follows:


	2024	2023
	£m	£m
At 1 April	168	223
Expense	129	84
Utilised	(127)	(142)
Exchange differences	(1)	3
At 31 March	169	168

The expected credit loss allowance for trade receivables was determined as follows:


		Trade receivables specifically impaired net of provision	Past due and not specifically impaired
	Not past due	Trade receivables specifically impaired net of provision	Between 0 and 3 months	Between 3 and 6 months	Between 6 and 12 months	Over 12 months	Total
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
2024
Expected loss rate %	1%	50%	8%	28%	47%	65%	8%
Gross carrying amount	1,448	4	357	81	64	114	2,068
Loss allowance	(11)	(2)	(29)	(23)	(30)	(74)	(169)
Net carrying amount	1,437	2	328	58	34	40	1,899
2023
Expected loss rate %	1%	75%	10%	46%	41%	52%	11%
Gross carrying amount	1,030	20	265	48	59	141	1,563
Loss allowance	(8)	(15)	(26)	(22)	(24)	(73)	(168)
Net carrying amount	1,022	5	239	26	35	68	1,395

Trade receivables not past due and accrued income are analysed below by CFU.


	Trade receivables not past due		Accrued income
	2024	2023	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m
Consumer	375	309	81	82
Businessa	900	713	4	2
Openreach	161	—	75	70
Other	1	—	2	4
Total	1,437	1,022	162	158

a Comparatives for the year ended 31 March 2023 have been re-presented for the impact of the creation of our Business customer-facing unit, formed through the merger of our

Enterprise and Global units, see note 1 .

Given the broad and varied nature of our customer base, the analysis of trade receivables not past due and accrued income by CFU is

considered the most appropriate disclosure of credit concentrations.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

15. Trade and other receivables continued

Deferred contract costs



	Material accounting policies that apply to deferred contract costs We capitalise certain costs associated with the acquisition and fulfilment of contracts with customers and amortise them over the period that we transfer the associated services. Connection costs are deferred as contract fulfilment costs because they allow satisfaction of the associated connection performance obligation and are considered recoverable. Sales commissions and other third party contract acquisition costs are capitalised as costs to acquire a contract unless the associated contract term is less than 12 months, in which case they are expensed as incurred. Capitalised costs are amortised over the minimum contract term. A portfolio approach is used to determine contract term. Where the initial set-up, transition and transformation phases of long-term contractual arrangements represent distinct performance obligations, costs in delivering these services are expensed as incurred. Where these services are not distinct performance obligations, we capitalise eligible costs as a cost of fulfilling the related service. Capitalised costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over the remaining contract term, unless the pattern of service delivery indicates a more appropriate profile. To be eligible for capitalisation, costs must be directly attributable to specific contracts, relate to future activity, and generate future economic benefits. Capitalised costs are regularly assessed for recoverability.

The following table shows the movement on deferred costs:


	Deferred connection costs	Deferred contract acquisition costs – commissions	Deferred contract acquisition costs – dealer incentives	Transition and transformation	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	24	124	324	90	562
Additions	15	100	285	70	470
Amortisation	(15)	(94)	(276)	(67)	(452)
Impairment	—	(1)	(1)	—	(2)
Other	(2)	2	(2)	4	2
At 31 March 2023	22	131	330	97	580
Additions	10	134	315	57	516
Amortisation	(11)	(118)	(292)	(56)	(477)
Impairment	—	(2)	(7)	—	(9)
Other	(8)	2	3	5	2
At 31 March 2024	13	147	349	103	612

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

15. Trade and other receivables continued



	Material accounting policies that apply to trade and other payables We initially recognise trade and other payables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. We subsequently carry them at amortised cost using the effective interest method. We use a supply chain financing programme to extend payment terms with a limited number of suppliers to a more typical payment term. We also use a separate supply chain financing programme to allow suppliers to receive funding earlier than the invoice due date. We assess these arrangements against indicators to assess if debts which vendors have sold to the funder under the supplier financing schemes continue to meet the definition of trade payables or should be classified as borrowings. At 31 March 2024 under the terms of the arrangement the funder's payment to the supplier does not legally extinguish our obligation to the supplier so it remains within trade and other payables. Cash flows only occur when the trade payable is extinguished and are therefore presented in cash flows from operating activities.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Current
Trade payables	4,119	4,196
Amounts owed to ultimate parent company	36	11
Other taxation and social security	544	581
Minimum guarantee with sports joint venturea	194	195
Accrued expenses	543	458
Deferred incomeb	355	532
Other payablesc	532	535
	6,323	6,508
Non-current
Minimum guarantee with sports joint venturea	271	465
Deferred incomeb	342	403
Other payables	24	26
	637	894

aLiability recognised on the minimum revenue guarantee in BT’s distribution agreement with the sports joint venture (see note 20). Movement in the liability driven by £211m

payments made during the year less £16m finance cost recorded from unwinding the impact of discounting.

bDeferred income includes £106m (FY23: £258m) current and £122m ( FY23 : £169m) non-current liabilities relating to Building Digital UK, for which grants received by the group

may be subject to re-investment or repayment depending on the level of take-up.

c Includes £41m relating to an estimate of customer refunds, refer to note 5.

Current trade and other payables at 31 March 2024 include:

– £101m (31 March 2023 : £348m) of trade payables that have been factored in a supply chain financing programme. The facility size of

£350m remains consistent with prior periods. These programmes are used with a limited number of suppliers with short payment terms

to extend them to a more typical payment term.

– £224 m (31 March 2023: £169m) of trade payables in a separate supply chain financing programme that allows suppliers the

opportunity to receive funding earlier than the invoice due date. Financial institutions are used to support this programme but we

continue to recognise the underlying payables as we continue to cash settle the supplier invoices in accordance with their terms.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

16. Trade and other payables

Our provisions principally relate to obligations arising from property rationalisation programmes, restructuring programmes, asset

retirement obligations, network assets, third party claims, litigation and regulatory risks. Contingent liabilities primarily arise from litigation

and regulatory matters that are not sufficiently certain to meet the criteria for recognition as provisions.



	Material accounting policies that apply to provisions & contingent liabilities We recognise provisions when the group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated. Where these criteria are not met we disclose a contingent liability if the group has a possible obligation, or has a present obligation with an outflow that is not probable or which cannot be reliably estimated. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a nominal pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. Cash flows are adjusted for the effect of inflation where appropriate.



	Significant judgements made in identifying contingent liabilities Contingent liabilities are not recognised as liabilities on our balance sheet. By their nature, contingencies will be resolved only when one or more uncertain future events occur or fail to occur. We assess the likelihood that a potential claim or liability will arise and also quantify the possible range of financial outcomes where this can be reasonably determined. In identifying contingent liabilities we make key judgements in relation to applicable law and any historical and pending court rulings, and the likelihood, timing and cost of resolution. Establishing contingent liabilities associated with litigation brought against the group may involve the use of significant judgements and assumptions, in particular around the ability to form a reliable estimate of any probable outflow. We provide further information in relation to specific matters in the ‘contingent liabilities' section below.



	Key accounting estimates and significant judgements made in accounting for provisions We exercise judgement in determining the quantum of all provisions to be recognised. Our assessment includes consideration of whether we have a present obligation, whether payment is probable and if so whether the amount can be estimated reliably. When measuring provisions we reflect the impact of inflation as appropriate, particularly in relation to our property, asset retirement obligation and third party claims provisions. Although this involves a degree of estimation, it does not represent a significant source of estimation uncertainty having regard to the quantum of the balances in question and the anticipated timing of outflows. Property provisions relate to obligations arising in relation to our property portfolio, in particular costs to restore leased properties on vacation where this is required under the lease agreement. In measuring property provisions, we have made estimates of the costs associated with the restoration of properties by reference to any relevant guidance such as rate cards. Cash outflows occur as and when properties are vacated and the obligations are settled. Asset retirement obligations (AROs) relate to obligations to dismantle equipment and restore network sites on vacation of the site. The provision represents the group’s best estimate of the costs to dismantle equipment and restore the sites. Obligations are settled as and when sites are vacated and the timing is largely influenced by the group’s network strategy. Our regulatory provision represents our best estimate of the cost to settle our present obligation in relation to historical regulatory matters. The charge/credit for the year represents the outcome of management’s re-assessment of the estimates and regulatory risks across a range of issues, including price and service issues. The prices at which certain services are charged are regulated and may be subject to retrospective adjustment by regulators. When estimating the likely value of regulatory risk we make key judgements, including in regard to interpreting Ofcom regulations and past and current claims. The precise outcome of each matter depends on whether it becomes an active issue, and the extent to which negotiation or regulatory and compliance decisions will result in financial settlement. The ultimate liability may vary from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any settlement. Litigation provisions represent the best estimate to settle present obligations recognised in respect of claims brought against the group. The estimate reflects the specific facts and circumstances of each individual matter and any relevant external advice received. Provisions recognised are inherently judgemental and could change over time as matters progress. Third party claims provisions (previously described as insurance provisions) represent our exposure to claims from third parties, with latent disease claims from former colleagues and motor vehicle claims making up the majority of the balance. We engage an independent actuary to provide an estimate of the most likely outcomes in respect of latent disease and third party motor vehicle accident claims, and our in-house insurance teams review our exposure to other risks. Other provisions do not include any individually material provisions. For all risks, the ultimate liability may vary materially from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any settlement.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

17. Provisions & contingent liabilities


	Property	Network ARO	Regulatory	Litigation	Third party claims	Other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	142	181	65	85	92	108	673
Additions	43	—	16	6	35	15	115
Unwind of discount	1	3	—	—	—	—	4
Utilised	(8)	(4)	(1)	(41)	(30)	(7)	(91)
Released	(37)	(87)	(16)	(9)	(43)	(42)	(234)
Transfersa	—	—	4	—	132	(11)	125
Exchange differences	1	—	—	3	1	1	6
At 31 March 2023	142	93	68	44	187	64	598
Additions	42	42	72	—	73	9	238
Unwind of discount	1	4	—	—	1	—	6
Utilised	(15)	(6)	(37)	(1)	(75)	(3)	(137)
Released	(17)	—	(17)	—	(32)	(3)	(69)
Transfersa	4	—	—	—	—	10	14
Exchange differences	(1)	—	—	—	—	—	(1)
At 31 March 2024	156	133	86	43	154	77	649

aTransfers relate to the reclassification of balances previously presented in other payables (note 16) following reassessment of the level of certainty over the timing and amount of any

outflow of resources.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Analysed as:
Current	238	229
Non-current	411	369
	649	598

Contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

In the ordinary course of business, we are periodically notified of actual or threatened litigation, and regulatory and compliance matters

and investigations. We have disclosed below a number of such matters including any matters where we believe a material adverse impact

on the operations or financial condition of the group is possible and the likelihood of a material outflow of resources is more than remote.

Where the outflow of resources is considered probable, and a reasonable estimate can be made of the amount of that obligation, a

provision is recognised for these amounts and reflected in the table above. Where an outflow is not probable but is possible, or a

reasonable estimate of the obligation cannot be made, a contingent liability exists.

In respect of each of the claims below, the nature and progression of such proceedings and investigations can make it difficult to predict

the impact they will have on the group. There are many reasons why we cannot make these assessments with certainty, including, among

others, that they are in early stages, no damages or remedies have been specified, and/or the often slow pace of litigation.

Class action claim – combined mobile and handset services

In November 2023, Justin Gutmann, represented by law firm Charles Lyndon applied to the Competition Appeal Tribunal to bring a

proposed class action claim for damages estimated at £1.1bn (inclusive of simple interest) on behalf of customers who purchased

combined handset and airtime contracts who are outside their minimum contract terms but who continue to pay the same price as during

their minimum contract terms. The claim alleges this approach was an anti-competitive abuse of a dominant position. Similar claims have

also been brought against Vodafone, Three and O2 with the total damages claimed £3.285bn (inclusive of simple interest). At the

reporting date we are not aware of any evidence to indicate that a present obligation exists such that any amount should be provided for.

Class actions must be certified by the Competition Appeal Tribunal at a Collective Proceedings Order (CPO) hearing before proceeding to

a substantive trial. A first case management conference to determine next procedural steps is scheduled for 23 May 2024. If the class

action is certified the substantive trial will not conclude during FY25. BT intends to defend itself vigorously.

Italian business

Milan Public Prosecutor prosecutions: In FY20 proceedings were initiated against BT Italia for certain potential offences, namely the

charge of having adopted, from 2011 to 2016, an inadequate management and control organisation model for the purposes of Articles 5

and 25 of Legislative Decree 231/2001. BT Italia disputed this and maintained in a defence brief filed in April 2019 that: (a) BT Italia did

not gain any interest or benefit from the conduct in question; and (b) in any event, it had a sufficient organisational, management and

audit model that was circumvented/overridden by individuals acting in their own self-interest. The trial commenced on 26 January 2021.

On 23 April 2021, the Court allowed some parties to be joined to the criminal proceedings as civil parties (‘parte civile’) – a procedural

feature of the Italian criminal law system. These claims were directed at certain individual defendants (which include former BT/ BT Italia

employees). Those parties successfully joined BT Italia as a respondent to their civil claims (‘responsabile civile’) on the basis that it is

vicariously responsible for the individuals’ wrongdoing.

The first instance phase of the trial has now concluded with the Court handing down its decision on 25 January 2024. The Court convicted

certain individuals (including certain former BT Italia employees) for manipulation of BT Italia’s financial statements for the financial year

ending 31 March 2016 and for fraud against an Italian company, Sed Multitel S.r.l. The Court dismissed all charges that had been brought

against BT Italia but ordered that BT Italia indemnify certain individual minority shareholders in the company and Sed Multitel for their

losses. The Court has not quantified the indemnification amount, such that the indemnified parties must now seek to recover these

amounts from BT Italia by agreement or separate civil proceedings. The quantum of those claims, if they are pursued successfully, is not

anticipated to be material.

Phones 4U

Since 2015 the administrators of Phones 4U Limited have made allegations that EE and other mobile network operators colluded to

procure Phones 4U’s insolvency. Legal proceedings for an unquantified amount were issued in December 2018 by the administrators. The

trial on the question of liability/breach ran from May to July 2022. In November 2023 the High Court dismissed Phones 4U’s claim in its

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

17. Provisions & contingent liabilities continued

entirety. Phones 4U has subsequently appealed that judgment to the Court of Appeal and a hearing is expected in May 2025. We continue

to dispute these allegations vigorously.

18. Retirement benefit plans

Background to BT Group’s pension plans

The group has both Defined Benefit and Defined Contribution retirement benefit plans. The group’s main plans are in the UK:

– The BT Pension Scheme (BTPS) is the largest UK Defined Benefit plan sponsored by BT Group, constituting 97% of BT Group’s IAS 19

liability. It was closed to future benefit accrual in 2018 for the majority of members, and has 55,000 deferred members and 210,000

pensioners. All BTPS members receive pension benefits at retirement based on salary and years of service; some members also receive

a lump sum payment at retirement. Increases for the majority of benefits are linked to either the Retail Price Index (RPI) or the

Consumer Price Index (CPI).

– The EE Pension Scheme (EEPS) has a Defined Benefit section that was closed to future benefit accrual in 2014 and a Defined

Contribution section which was closed to future accrual in July 2023. The Defined Benefit section constitutes 2% of BT Group’s IAS 19

liability.

– The BT Retirement Saving Scheme (BTRSS) is a Defined Contribution, contract-based, plan operated by Standard Life which new UK

employees join. There are around 67,000 employees currently contributing to the BTRSS.

The group also has retirement arrangements around the world in line with local markets and culture; the principal ones being in the

Netherlands and Germany.



	Types of retirement benefit plans
	Defined Benefit (DB) plans
	DB plan benefits are determined by the plan rules, typically dependent on factors such as years of service and pensionable pay, but not on the value of actual contributions made by the group or members. The group is exposed to investment and other experience risks and may need to make additional contributions where it is estimated that the benefits will not be met from assets held, regular contributions and expected investment income. The net defined benefit liability, or deficit, is the present value of all expected future benefit cash flows to be paid by each plan, calculated using the projected unit credit method by professionally qualified actuaries (also known as the Defined Benefit Obligation, DBO or liabilities) less the fair value of the plan assets. A net defined benefit asset, or surplus, occurs when the fair value of assets exceeds the liabilities.

	Defined Contribution (DC) plans
	DC plan benefits are linked to the value of each member’s fund, which is based on contributions paid and the performance of each individual’s chosen investments. The group has no exposure to investment and other experience risks (including longevity).

Amounts in the financial statements

Group income statement

The expense arising from the group’s retirement benefit arrangements as recognised in the group income statement is shown below.


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Recognised in the income statement before specific items (note 6)
– Service cost:
– DB plans	12	17
– DC plans	541	537
– Past service cost/(credit)	—	(2)
– Administration expenses and PPF levy	29	38
Subtotal	582	590
Recognised in the income statement as specific items (note 9)
– Costs to close BTPS and provide transition paymentsa for affected employees	—	13
– Interest on pensions deficit	121	18
Subtotal	121	31
Total recognised in the income statement	703	621

aAll employees impacted by the closure of the BTPS were eligible for transition payments from the date of closure into their BTRSS pot for a period linked to the employee’s age.

Group balance sheet

The net defined benefit liability in respect of defined benefit plans reported in the group balance sheet is set out below. Plans in surplus

are presented within non-current assets and plans in deficit within non-current liabilities.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

17. Provisions & contingent liabilities continued


	2024			2023
At 31 March	Assets £m	Liabilities £m	Surplus/ (Deficit)a £m	Assets £m	Liabilities £m	Surplus/ (Deficit)a £m
Recognised in non-current liabilities
BTPS	35,391	(40,038)	(4,647)	38,673	(41,575)	(2,902)
Unfunded plans	—	(88)	(88)	—	(92)	(92)
Other funded plans	33	(180)	(147)	65	(210)	(145)
Sub-total	35,424	(40,306)	(4,882)	38,738	(41,877)	(3,139)
Recognised in non-current assets
EEPS	769	(710)	59	749	(713)	36
Funded plansa	361	(350)	11	321	(305)	16
Sub-total	1,130	(1,060)	70	1,070	(1,018)	52
Total	36,554	(41,366)	(4,812)	39,808	(42,895)	(3,087)

a Figures shown net of a £4m adjustment in relation to IFRIC 14. With the exception of some of the group's smaller plans, the group is not required to limit any pension surplus or

recognise additional pension liabilities in individual plans as economic benefits are available in the form of either future refunds or reductions to future contributions. For example, a

refund of surplus is available following the gradual settlement of the liabilities over time when there are no members remaining in the BTPS or EEPS.

The table below shows the group’s defined benefit liability net of tax.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Balance sheet position (net of tax)
Surplus/(deficit)	(4,812)	(3,087)
Deferred tax asset (note 10)	968	618
Total (net of tax)	(3,844)	(2,469)

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

Movements in defined benefit plan assets and liabilities

The table below shows the movements in the defined benefit plan assets and liabilities and shows where they are reflected in the financial

statements.


	Assets	Liabilities	Deficit
	£m	£m	£m
At 31 March 2022	54,937	(56,080)	(1,143)
Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)	(38)	(17)	(55)
Past service credit	—	2	2
Interest on net pension deficit	1,480	(1,498)	(18)
Included in the group income statement			(71)
Return on plan assets below the amount included in the group income statement	(14,911)	—	(14,911)
Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions	—	12,279	12,279
Actuarial gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions	—	891	891
Actuarial (loss) arising from experience adjustmentsa	—	(1,135)	(1,135)
Included in the group statement of comprehensive income			(2,876)
Regular contributions by employer	22	—	22
Deficit contributions by employer	994	—	994
Included in the group cash flow statement			1,016
Contributions by employees	1	(1)	—
Benefits paid	(2,686)	2,686	—
Other (e.g. foreign exchange)	9	(22)	(13)
Other movements			(13)
At 31 March 2023	39,808	(42,895)	(3,087)
Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)	(29)	(12)	(41)
Past service credit	—	—	—
Interest on net pension deficit	1,886	(2,007)	(121)
Included in the group income statement			(162)
Return on plan assets below the amount included in the group income statement	(3,140)	—	(3,140)
Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions	—	563	563
Actuarial gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions	—	652	652
Actuarial (loss) arising from experience adjustmentsa	—	(519)	(519)
Included in the group statement of comprehensive income			(2,444)
Regular contributions by employer	55	—	55
Deficit contributions by employer	823	—	823
Included in the group cash flow statement			878
Contributions by employees	—	—	—
Benefits paid	(2,840)	2,840	—
Other (e.g. foreign exchange)	(9)	12	3
Other movements			3
At 31 March 2024	36,554	(41,366)	(4,812)

a Primarily reflects the impact on the liabilities of actual inflation being higher than assumed at the prior reporting date, which has been broadly offset by increases to inflation-linked

assets from higher inflation.

How is the BTPS governed and managed?

BT Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Trustee) has been appointed by BT Group as an independent trustee to administer and manage

the BTPS on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the BTPS Trust Deed and Rules and relevant legislation (principally

the Pensions Acts of 1993, 1995, 2004 and 2021). The Trustee’s key powers include setting the investment strategy of BTPS (after

consultation with BT Group) and agreeing with BT Group the actuarial assumptions to be used when assessing the BTPS funding position

and the resulting contributions that will be paid.

There are nine Trustee directors, all of whom are appointed by BT Group, as illustrated below. Trustee directors are usually appointed for a

three-year term but are then eligible for re-appointment.



Chair of the Trustee directors	Member nominated Trustee directors	Employer nominated Trustee directors
Appointed by BT after consultation with, and with the agreement of, the relevant trade unions.	Appointed by BT based on nominations by trade unions.	Appointed by BT. Two normally hold senior positions within the group and two normally hold (or have held) senior positions in commerce or industry.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

BTPS IAS 19 assets



	Critical accounting estimates and significant judgements made when valuing the BTPS assets Under IAS 19, plan assets are measured at fair value at the balance sheet date and include quoted and unquoted investments. Valuation of main quoted investments – Equities listed on recognised stock exchanges are valued at closing bid prices. – Bonds that are regularly traded are valued using broker quotes, based on sale/bid prices. – Exchange traded derivative contracts are valued based on closing bid prices. Valuation of main unquoted investments A portion of unquoted investments are valued based on inputs that are not directly observable, which require more judgement. The assumptions used in valuing unquoted investments are affected by market conditions. – Equities are valued using the International Private Equity and Venture Capital (IPEVC) guidelines where the most significant assumptions are the discount rate and earnings assumptions. – Property investments are valued on the basis of open market value by an independent valuer using RICS guidelines. The significant assumptions used in the valuation are rental yields and occupancy rates. – Bonds, including those issued by BT Group, that are not regularly traded are valued by an independent valuer using pricing models making assumptions for credit risk, market risk and market yield curves. – Holdings in investment funds are typically valued at the Net Asset Value provided by the fund administrator or investment manager. The significant assumption used in the valuation is the Net Asset Value. – Infrastructure investments are valued by an independent valuer using a model-based valuation such as a discounted cash flow approach, or at the price of recent market transactions if they represent fair value. Where a discounted cash flow model is used, the significant assumptions used in the valuation are the discount rate and the expected cash flows. – Over the counter derivatives are valued by an independent valuer using cash flows discounted at market rates. The significant assumptions used in the valuation are the yield curves and cost of carry. – The BTPS entered into a longevity insurance contract in 2014, and a second in August 2023. The two longevity insurance contracts are valued by discounting the fixed cash flows payable by the BTPS and the floating cash flows payable by the insurers under the contracts (projected by an actuary, consistent with the terms of the contracts). The significant assumptions used to value the assets are the discount rate (set as a margin above a risk-free rate to reflect credit and liquidity risk) and the mortality assumptions. £5.7bn of unquoted investments that are formally valued periodically by the investment manager have a latest valuation that precedes the balance sheet date. These assets consist of: £2.4bn non-core credit; £1.0bn mature infrastructure; £1.2bn private equity; £0.9bn secure income assets; and £0.2bn property. These valuations have been adjusted for cash movements between the previous valuation date and 31 March 2024. The valuation approach and inputs for these investments would only be approximately updated where there were indications of significant movements, for example implied by public market indicators. No such adjustment was required at 31 March 2024. Asset-Backed Funding (ABF) arrangement The ABF arrangement, issued to the BTPS in May 2021, has a fair value of £1.2bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.3bn) calculated as the present value of the future stream of payments, allowing for the probability of the BTPS becoming fully funded and therefore the payments to the BTPS ending early. It is not recognised as a pension asset when measuring the group’s IAS 19 net defined benefit liability as it is a non-transferable financial instrument issued by the group.

How are the BTPS assets invested?

The Trustee regularly reviews the allocation of assets between different investment classes, taking into account current market conditions

and trends. The allocations reflect the Trustee’s views on a range of areas, including: i) the balance between seeking returns and incurring

risk; ii) the extent to which the assets should be allocated to match movements in the liabilities due to changes in interest rates, inflation

and/or longevity (i.e. liability-driven investments, or LDI); iii) the extent to which the assets should provide cash flows to meet expected

payments to beneficiaries; and iv) liquidity needed to meet benefit payments and collateral requirements for derivatives contracts.

Financial derivatives (e.g. swaps) are used to reduce the mismatch between movements in the liabilities and the assets from changes in

interest rates, inflation, longevity, and exchange rates. This provides greater stability in the funding position, and therefore the deficit

contributions that may be required from BT Group. The sensitivity chart on page 84 shows how the use of some of these derivatives

adjusts outcomes for the BTPS. While the use of derivatives reduces funding risk, it increases the BTPS’s liquidity requirements which is

factored into the overall investment strategy. Following the impact of the September 2022 mini-budget on derivatives, the Bank of

England and the Pensions Regulator issued guidance on the minimum level of collateral pension schemes should hold. At 31 March 2024

(and 31 March 2023), the BTPS held more collateral than these minimum levels.

The table below analyses the fair value of the BTPS assets by asset category, subdivided by valuations based on a quoted market price in

an active market, and those that are not (such as investment funds).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued


		2024		2023
		Total assetsa	of which quoted	Total assetsa	of which quoted
At 31 March		£bn	£bn	£bn	£bn
Growth
Equities	UK	0.1	—	0.1	—
	Overseas Developed	2.3	1.1	1.7	0.6
	Emerging Markets	—	—	—	—
Private Equity		1.3	—	1.1	—
Property	UK	2.3	—	2.6	—
	Overseas	0.6	—	0.8	—
Other growth assets	Absolute Returnb	1.2	—	0.9	—
	Non-Core Creditc	4.2	0.4	4.2	0.4
	Mature Infrastructure	1.0	—	1.2	—
Liability matching
Government bondsd	UK	14.6	14.5	13.2	13.1
Investment grade credit	Global	10.3	7.7	10.4	8.2
Secure income assetse		4.0	—	3.7	—
Cash, derivatives and other
Cash balances		0.8	—	3.0	—
Financial derivative contracts		(4.9)	—	(4.2)	—
Longevity insurance contractf		(0.9)	—	(0.8)	—
Otherg		(1.5)	—	0.8	—
Totalh		35.4	23.7	38.7	22.3

aAt 31 March 2024, the BTPS held nil (FY23: nil) equity issued by the group and £1.7bn (FY23: £1.6bn) of bonds issued by the group.

bThis allocation seeks to generate a positive return in all market conditions.

cThis allocation includes a range of credit investments, including emerging market, sub-investment grade and unrated credit. The allocation seeks to exploit investment opportunities

within credit markets using the expertise of a range of specialist investment managers.

dAround 77% (FY23: 72%) of these are index-linked gilts with the remainder in conventional gilts.

eThis allocation consists of assets which aim to provide the BTPS with contractual bond-like income, often inflation-protected. The assets include property, infrastructure and

investment-grade private credit.

fThe value reflects experience to date on the contract from higher than expected deaths; this has partly offset a corresponding reduction in BTPS’s liabilities over the same period.

g Other balances comprise net amounts receivable/(payable) by the BTPS, including balances due to investment counterparties relating to repurchase agreements.

hOf which held in the co-investment vehicle: £0.1bn (FY23: <£1m).

BTPS IAS 19 Liabilities



	Critical accounting estimates and significant judgements made when valuing our pension liabilities The measurement of the service cost and the liabilities involves judgement about uncertain events including the life expectancy of members, price inflation and the discount rate used to calculate the net present value of the future pension payments. We use estimates for all of these uncertain events. Our assumptions reflect historical experience, market expectations (where relevant), actuarial advice and our judgement regarding future expectations at the balance sheet date. While assumptions are made for these events, actual benefit payments in a given year may be higher or lower than the assumption, for example if members retire sooner or later than assumed. The liabilities are the present value of the future expected benefit payments.

What are the forecast benefits payable from the BTPS?

There are c.265,000 members, and their dependants, who will be receiving benefits from the BTPS for the remainder of their lives.

Members currently receiving pension benefits make up around 73% of the liabilities and 79% of the membership by number.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

The chart below illustrates how the forecast benefits payable from the BTPS, and IAS 19 liabilities, projected using the IAS 19 assumptions

evolve over time.

FinancialStatements_LineChart_ForecastBenefitsPayableBtpsUnaudited.svg

The estimated duration of the BTPS liabilities, which is an indicator of the weighted average term of the discounted future payments, is

11 years (FY23: 12 years) using the IAS 19 assumptions. The duration is sensitive to the assumptions and has reduced mainly due to the

increase in bond yields, and therefore discount rate, over the year.

What are the most significant assumptions, and how have they been set?

The most significant financial assumptions used to calculate the IAS 19 liabilities for the BTPS are the discount rate and inflation. The most

significant demographic assumption used is how life expectancy will evolve over time which is illustrated as forecast life expectancies in

the table below.


At 31 March	2024	2023
Discount rate	4.90%	4.85%
Inflation – RPI	3.25%	3.35%
Inflation – CPI	2.80%	2.85%
Life expectancy – male aged 60 in lower pension bracket	24.9 years	24.7 years
Life expectancy – male aged 60 in higher pension bracket	26.7 years	26.9 years
Life expectancy – female aged 60	27.4 years	27.5 years
Average additional life expectancy for a male member retiring at age 60 in 10 years’ time	0.4 years	0.4 years

While the financial assumptions are typically scheme-specific, the average financial assumptions weighted by liabilities across all schemes

are within 0.05% of the figures shown in the table above.

The table below summarises how these assumptions have been set, including key changes over the year.


	Detail
Discount rate	The discount rate assumption is calculated by applying the projected BTPS benefit cash flows to a corporate bond yield curve constructed by our external actuary based on the yield on AA-rated £-denominated corporate bonds at the balance sheet date. In setting the yield curve, judgement is required on the selection of appropriate bonds to be included in the universe and the approach used to then derive the yield curve. The increase in the discount rate over the year reflects changes in the market yield of corporate bonds.
RPI and CPI inflation	RPI inflation expectations are calculated by applying the projected BTPS benefit cash flows to an inflation curve derived from market yields on UK government bonds, and making a deduction for an inflation risk premium (to reflect the extra premium paid by investors for inflation linked assets) of 0.2% pa before 2030 and 0.3% pa thereafter. CPI inflation expectations are set with reference to the RPI inflation assumption taking into account market data and independent estimates of the expected difference. Before 2030, CPI inflation is assumed to be 1.0% lower than RPI inflation (FY23: 1.0%). RPI will be aligned with CPIH from 2030, and we assume a nil gap between CPI and CPIH inflation as historically these measures have been broadly comparable.
Pension increases	Under the BTPS rules, benefit increases prior to retirement are primarily linked to CPI capped at 5%, and the majority of benefits increase after retirement linked to either CPI for Sections A and B or RPI with a 5% cap for Section C. Benefits are assumed to increase in line with the RPI or CPI inflation assumptions.
Longevity	The longevity assumption takes into account: – the actual mortality experience of the BTPS pensioners, based on a formal review carried out for the 2023 triennial funding valuation; and – future improvements in longevity based on the CMI’s 2022 Mortality Projections model published by the UK actuarial profession. There is significant uncertainty for future life expectancy assumptions following the Covid-19 pandemic. We continue to assume that following the pandemic there is a short-term increase in deaths compared to the assumptions adopted prior to the pandemic and we have fully allowed for population mortality data from 2022, but not data from 2020 and 2021. Allowing for the published 2022 CMI model has reduced the BTPS liabilities by £0.4bn. We continue to assume mortality will improve in the long-term by 1% per year.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

Risks to BT Group arising from the BTPS

Background

A large increase in our pension scheme obligations could lead to an increased deficit, resulting in additional contributions being required,

potentially impacting our business plans. Changes in factors, such as bond yields, life expectancy or inflation can have an impact on the IAS

19 and funding assumptions, impacting the measurement of BTPS liabilities. These factors can also impact the BTPS assets. A summary of

changes and potential impacts is set out in the table below.


Change in	Impact
Government bond yields	A fall in government bond yields will: – increase the IAS 19 liabilities, driven by the fall in the discount rate; and – increase the assets, driven by an increase in the value of government bonds, corporate bonds and interest rate derivatives held by the BTPS.
Credit spreads	A fall in credit spreads will lead to a fall in corporate bond yields, and therefore an increase in the IAS 19 liabilities and a corresponding but smaller increase in both asset values and funding liabilities.
Inflation expectations	A significant proportion of the benefits paid to members are currently increased in line with RPI or CPI inflation. The risk of high inflation is limited by caps on some of the inflationary increases under the BTPS rules e.g. benefit increases prior to retirement are primarily linked to CPI capped at 5%, and for Section C members benefits primarily increase after retirement in line with RPI with a 5% cap. Changes in average inflation expectations over the lifetime of the plan An increase in average inflation expectations will: – increase the IAS 19 liabilities; and – increase the value of index-linked bonds, other inflation linked assets and inflation derivatives held by the BTPS. Changes in inflation over the next year If inflation over the next year is lower or higher than assumed, it would lead to a fall or increase in the IAS 19 liabilities. We estimate the change in asset values will broadly offset the movement in both the IAS 19 liabilities and funding liabilities. If inflation is higher than the caps that apply to benefits, the assets will increase by more than the liabilities. Similarly, in a deflationary environment, the asset values are expected to fall by more than the IAS 19 liabilities and funding liabilities since the payments on index-linked gilts would be reduced but pensions paid by the BTPS would not necessarily fall to fully offset the fall in asset values. Hedging CPI benefits The BTPS primarily holds RPI inflation-linked assets and derivatives to hedge inflation-linked benefits. Around two- thirds of the inflation-linked benefits increase with reference to CPI. A 0.25% a year increase in CPI inflation expectations before 2030 (with no corresponding change in RPI inflation expectations) would increase the IAS 19 deficit by around £0.3bn as at 31 March 2024.
Growth assets	A significant proportion of the BTPS assets are invested in growth assets, such as equities and property. The BTPS has temporary hedges in place to partly offset the impact of a fall in equity markets, and adopts a diverse portfolio. A fall in these growth assets will increase the IAS 19 and funding deficit.
Life expectancy	An increase in the life expectancy of members will result in benefits being paid out for longer, leading to an increase in the IAS 19 liabilities and funding liabilities. The BTPS holds two longevity insurance contracts which covers around 32% of the BTPS’s total exposure to improvements in longevity, providing long-term protection and income to the BTPS in the event that members live longer than currently expected.

Other risks include: changes in legislation or regulation which impact the value of the liabilities or assets; and member take-up of options

before and at retirement to reshape their benefits. The scale of the BTPS means that investment changes and any future de-risking

actions need to be planned and executed carefully, potentially over an extended timeframe or multiple transactions.

Scenario analysis

The potential negative impact of these risks is illustrated by the following five scenarios. These have been assessed by BT Group’s

independent actuary as scenarios that might occur no more than once in every 20 years. The scenarios have been updated to reflect

market experience over the last year.


Scenario	1-in-20 events
Scenario	2024	2023
1. Fall in bond yieldsa	1.2%	1.2%
2. Increase in credit spreadsb	0.9%	0.9%
3. Increase to average inflation expectations over the lifetime of the planc	1.1%	1.1%
4. Fall in growth assetsd	15.0%	20.0%
5. Increase to life expectancy	1.2 years	1.3 years

aScenario assumes a fall in the yields on both government and corporate bonds.

bScenario assumes an increase in the yield on corporate bonds, with no change to yield on government bonds.

cScenario assumes average RPI and CPI inflation expectations over the lifetime of the plan increase by the same amount.

dImpact includes the dampening effect of temporary equity hedges held by the BTPS. Scenario considers combinations of changes to the key inputs used to value the growth assets,

leading to a 15% (FY23: 20%) fall in the aggregate value of the growth assets prior to temporary hedges held by the BTPS.

The impact shown under each scenario looks at each event in isolation and reflects the liabilities, assets and investment strategy at

31 March 2024. In practice a combination of events could arise, and the effects are not additive nor are they linear (e.g. doubling the

change in bond yields assumed will not double the impact). The asset allocation is not fixed and changes over the year may impact the

sensitivities shown.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

Impact of illustrative scenarios which might occur no more than once in every 20 years

FinancialStatements_ColumnChart_ScenarioAnalysisPositionIAS19.svg

The sensitivities have been prepared using the same approach as FY23 which involves calculating the liabilities and assets allowing for the

change in market conditions assumed under the scenario as if they had occurred at the reporting date. The change in impact from FY23 is

due to a combination of: changes in the scenarios, changes in asset and liability values over the year, and changes in the scheme’s

investment strategy in line with the agreed de-risking plan.

BTPS funding

Triennial funding valuation

A funding valuation is carried out for the Trustee by a professionally qualified independent actuary at least every three years. The funding

valuation assesses the on-going financial health of the BTPS. If there are insufficient assets to meet the estimated future benefit payments

to members (i.e. a funding deficit), BT Group and the Trustee agree the amount and timing of additional cash contributions. It is prepared

using the principles set out in UK pension legislation, such as the 2004 and 2021 Pensions Acts, and uses a prudent approach overall when

setting the actuarial assumptions. Some of the key differences compared to the IAS 19 deficit are set out in the table below.


	IAS 19	Funding
Purpose	Balance sheet in BT Group accounts	Assessing the on-going financial health and setting cash payments
Regulation	IFRS	UK pensions legislation
Frequency	Semi-annually	At least every three years
Key assumptions
Determined by	BT Group	BT Group and BTPS agreement
Discount rate	Yield curve based on AA corporate bonds	Yield curve reflecting prudent return expected from BTPS assets
Other assumptions	Best estimate	Prudent overall approach
Assets	BT Group accounts excludes ABF value	Includes ABF value

The different purpose and principles lead to different assumptions being used, and therefore a different estimate for the liabilities and deficit.

The latest funding valuation was performed as at 30 June 2023. The next funding valuation will have an effective date of no later than

30 June 2026.

The results of the two most recent triennial valuations are shown below.


	30 June 2023	30 June 2020
	£bn	£bn
Funding liabilities	(40.9)	(65.3)
Assets	37.2	57.3
BTPS Funding deficit	(3.7)	(8.0)
Percentage of accrued benefits covered by the BTPS assets at valuation date	91%	88%

Key assumptions at valuation date:
Discount ratea	5.3%	1.4%
Inflation – RPI	3.6%	3.2%
Inflation – CPI	3.2%	2.4%
Life expectancy – male aged 60 in lower pension bracket	25.5 years	25.8 years
Life expectancy – male aged 60 in higher pension bracket	27.2 years	28.0 years
Life expectancy – female aged 60	28.0 years	28.5 years
Average additional life expectancy for a male member retiring at age 60 in 10 years’ time	0.8 years	0.9 years

aThe discount rate has been derived from prudent return expectations that reflect the investment strategy over time, allowing for the BTPS to de-risk to a portfolio consisting

predominantly of bond and bond-like investments by 2034.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

Scenario analysis of the funding position (unaudited)

The impact of changes in market conditions on the funding liabilities differs to the impact on the IAS 19 liabilities due to the size of the

liabilities and how the assumptions are set. For example, the funding liabilities use a discount rate linked to a risk-free rate plus a margin

based on the BTPS’s investment strategy, whereas the IAS 19 liabilities use a discount rate based on corporate bond yields. The chart

below illustrates the approximate impact of the scenarios set on page 82 on the 30 June 2023 funding position.

FinancialStatements_ColumnChart_ScenarioAnalysisFundingPositionJune23.svg

The figures shown in the table apply to the BTPS assets and funding liabilities as at 30 June 2023; an increase in the assets or funding

liabilities will increase the impact of the scenarios shown.

Deficit payments from the Group

In November 2023, the 2023 triennial funding valuation was finalised, agreed with the Trustee, and certified by the Scheme Actuary. The

funding deficit at 30 June 2023 was £3.7bn, down from £8.0bn at the 2020 funding valuation following £4.4bn of deficit contributions.

Annual contribution amounts remain unchanged, at £600m in each financial year until 31 March 2030, a final payment of £490m before

30 April 2030, and the £180m pa payments due under the ABF arrangement agreed at the 2020 valuation.

No payments are currently payable under the future funding commitment (see page 85).

These payments are summarised in the table below.


Year to 31 March (£m)	2025	2026	2027	2028	2029	2030	2031	2032	2033	2034
Payments from BT plca	600b	600b	600b	600b	600b	600b	490	—	—	—
Future funding commitment payments	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Payments from ABF	180	180	180	180	180	180	180	180	180	180
Total	780	780	780	780	780	780	670	180	180	180

aPayments are due by 30 April each year.

b£10m is directly payable to the BTPS, and BT Group currently intends to pay the balance into the co-investment vehicle.

ABF

Under the ABF, £180m pa is paid into the BTPS until June 2033, secured on EE Limited. If the BTPS reaches full funding as calculated by

the Scheme Actuary at any 30 June, the ABF payments to the BTPS will cease. BT Group received tax relief at inception of the ABF based

on the original market value of £1.7bn, and will receive further tax-relief if payments are made to the BTPS in excess of this amount.

Assuming they are all paid, future payments from the ABF have a present value of £1.3bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.4bn). The fair value

of the ABF is £1.2bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.3bn) which allows for the probability of the BTPS becoming fully funded, and the

payments to the BTPS ending early.

The fair value of the ABF is included in the assets of the BTPS when assessing the funding deficit. Payments from the ABF to the BTPS are

treated in the same way as coupon payments from bonds, and do not affect the funding deficit when they are paid.

The fair value of the ABF is not included in the assets of the BTPS when assessing the IAS 19 deficit in the group consolidated accounts, as

it is a non-transferable asset issued by the group. Payments from the ABF to the BTPS are treated as deficit contributions, and reduce the

IAS 19 deficit, when they are paid.

Co-investment vehicle

A co-investment vehicle was set up in 2021 which provides BT Group with some protection against the risk of overfunding and therefore

enables BT Group to provide upfront funding with greater confidence. BT Group is eligible for future refunds if some or all of the co-

investment vehicle funds are surplus to the BTPS’s requirements, unless the BTPS, acting prudently but reasonably, decides to defer or

reduce these payments. Assessments will be carried out over a series of dates between June 2032 and June 2041.

Payments made by BT Group into the co-investment vehicle will be invested as if part of the overall BTPS investment strategy. BT Group

will receive tax relief in respect of any funds paid to the BTPS from the vehicle but does not receive tax relief when payments are made to

the co-investment vehicle.

The fair value of assets in the co-investment vehicle, £0.1bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: <£1m), is included in the assets of the BTPS when

assessing both the IAS 19 and funding deficits.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

Protections for BTPS (going concern)

BT Group has agreed to provide the Trustee with certain protections to 2035.


Feature	Detail
Future funding commitment	BT Group will provide additional contributions, of between £150m pa and £300m pa, should the funding deficit fall behind plan by more than an agreed threshold at any two consecutive reviews. The reviews will be carried out every June and December and until the 2026 valuation the threshold is £1bn. Payments are due within 12 months of the payments being switched on. Payments will stop once the semi-annual assessment shows the funding deficit is back on plan, i.e. outstanding deficit contributions are sufficient to address the funding deficit. At the 31 December 2023 assessment date, the funding position was within the above limit. The next test will be carried out as at 30 June 2024.
Shareholder distributions	BT Group will provide additional payments to the BTPS by the amount that shareholder distributions exceed a threshold. For the three years following the 2023 valuation, the threshold allows for 10% per year dividend per share growth based on dividends of 7.7p per share in FY23, adjusted to reflect the interim dividend declared at our half-year results. BT Group has agreed to implement a similar protection at each subsequent valuation, with the terms to be negotiated at the time. BT Group will consult with the Trustee if: – it considers share buybacks for any purpose other than relating to employee share awards; – it considers making any shareholder distributions in any of the next three years if annual normalised free cash flow of the group is below £1bn in the year and distributions within the year would be in excess of 120% of the above threshold; or – it considers making a special dividend.
Material corporate events	In the event that BT Group generates net cash proceeds greater than a threshold from disposals (net of acquisitions) in any financial year, BT Group will make additional contributions to the BTPS. The threshold is £750m pa to 30 June 2026. The amount payable is one-third of the total net cash proceeds.
Material corporate events	BT Group will consult with the Trustee if: – it considers making acquisitions with a total cost of more than £1.0bn in any 12-month period; – it considers making any disposal of more than £1.0bn; – it considers making a Class 1 transaction which will have a material impact on the BTPS (acquisition or disposal); – it is likely to be subject to a takeover offer; or – there are any other corporate or third-party events which may have a materially detrimental impact on BT Group’s covenant to the BTPS (in which case BT Group will use its best endeavours to agree appropriate mitigation). This obligation is on-going until otherwise terminated.
Negative pledge	A negative pledge that future creditors will not be granted superior security to the BTPS in excess of £0.5bn, to cover any member of the BT Group. Business as usual financing arrangements are not included within the £0.5bn.

No additional contributions were triggered during FY24.

Protections for BTPS (insolvency)

The Scheme Actuary assumes that in the highly unlikely event that BT Group were to become insolvent, the Trustee would continue to run the

Scheme with a low-risk, closely-matched investment strategy including additional margins for risk. On this basis and assuming no further

contribution from BT Group, it was estimated that at 30 June 2023 the assets of the Scheme would have met around 80% of the liabilities.

Were this to occur, BTPS members would benefit from the following additional protections.


Feature	Detail
Crown Guarantee	The Crown Guarantee was granted by the Government when BT was privatised in 1984; it would only come into effect upon the insolvency of BT plc. In July 2014, the courts established that: – the Crown Guarantee covers BT plc’s funding obligation in relation to the benefits of members of the BTPS who joined post-privatisation as well as those who joined pre-privatisation (subject to certain exceptions); and – the funding obligation to which the Crown Guarantee relates is measured with reference to BT plc’s obligation to pay deficit contributions under the rules of the BTPS. The Crown Guarantee is not taken into account for the purposes of the actuarial valuation of the BTPS and is an entirely separate matter, only being relevant in the highly unlikely event that BT plc becomes insolvent.
Pension Protection Fund (PPF)	Further protection is also provided by the PPF which is the fund responsible for paying compensation in respect of schemes where the employer becomes insolvent.

EEPS funding valuation

The most recent triennial valuation of the defined benefit section was performed as at 31 December 2021 and agreed in March 2023. This

showed a funding deficit of £218m. The group is scheduled to contribute £1.7m each month until 31 July 2025 and a final payment of up

to £80m by 31 March 2026. £31.7m (FY23: £13.3m) of deficit contributions were paid by the group to the EEPS during the year.

At the triennial valuation date, the EEPS had a diversified investment strategy, investing scheme assets in: global equities (25%), property

& illiquid alternatives (20%), an absolute return portfolio (24%) and a liability-driven investment portfolio (31%).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued



	Material accounting policies that apply to share-based payments BT Group plc operates a number of equity-settled share-based payment arrangements, under which the group receives services from employees in consideration for equity instruments (share options and shares) in BT Group plc. Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value is recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the group’s estimate of the options or shares that will eventually vest. Fair value of share option schemes is measured using a Binomial options pricing model. Service conditions are vesting conditions. Any other conditions are non-vesting conditions which are taken into account to determine the fair value of equity instruments granted. When an award or option does not vest as a result of a failure to meet a non- vesting condition that is within the control of either counterparty, it is accounted for as a cancellation. Cancellations are treated as accelerated vesting and all remaining future charges are immediately recognised in the income statement. As the requirement to save under an employee saveshare arrangement is a non-vesting condition, employee cancellations, other than through a termination of service, are treated as an accelerated vesting. No adjustment is made to total equity for awards that lapse or are forfeited after the vesting date.


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Employee saveshare plans	13	21
Yourshare	13	12
Executive share plans:
Deferred Bonus Plan (DBP)	8	10
Retention and Restricted Share Plans (RSP)	34	34
	68	77

What share incentive arrangements do we have?

Our plans include savings-related share option plans for employees and those of participating subsidiaries and several share plans for

executives. All share-based payment plans are equity-settled. Details of these plans are set out below.

Employee Saveshare Plans

Under HMRC-approved savings-related share option plans, employees save on a monthly basis, over a three- or five-year period, towards

the purchase of shares at a fixed price determined when the option is granted. This price is set at a 20% discount to the market price for

five-year plans and 10% for three-year plans. The options must be exercised within six months of maturity of the savings contract,

otherwise they lapse. Similar plans operate for our overseas employees. The scheme did not operate in FY24 or FY23.

Yourshare

In FY21 and FY22, all eligible employees of the group were awarded £500 of BT shares. The shares are held in trust for a three-year

vesting period after which they will be transferred to employees, providing they have been continuously employed during that time. A

similar plan operated for overseas employees. Under the terms of Yourshare and the executive share plans, dividends are reinvested in

shares that are added to the relevant share awards, unless the employee has elected to receive dividends in cash.

Deferred Bonus Plan (DBP)

Awards are granted annually to selected senior employees where part of their bonus is awarded in shares in the group. These shares vest

after three years.

Retention and Restricted Share Plans (RSP)

Awards are granted to selected employees. Shares in the group are transferred to participants at the end of a specified retention or

restricted period if they continue to be employed by the group throughout that period.

Incentive Share Plan (ISP)

Under this scheme, certain employees were awarded shares if the group met performance measures linked to total shareholder return,

normalised free cash flow and revenue growth over a three year period. The last ISP was granted in 2019 and vested in 2022.

Employee Saveshare Plans

Movements in Employee Saveshare options are shown below.


	Number of share options		Weighted average exercise price
	2024	2023	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	millions	millions	pence	pence
Outstanding at 1 April	269	342	102	102
Granted	—	—	—	—
Forfeited	(23)	(42)	118	130
Exercised	(64)	(5)	89	96
Expired	(26)	(26)	151	208
Outstanding at 31 March	156	269	103	102
Exercisable at 31 March	—	—	—	—

The weighted average share price for all options exercised during FY24 was 118p (FY23: 153p).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Share-based payments

The following table summarises information relating to options outstanding and exercisable under Employee Saveshare plans at 31 March

2024.


Normal dates of vesting and exercise (based on calendar years)	Exercise price per share	Weighted average exercise price	Number of outstanding options millions	Weighted average remaining contractual life (months)
2024	164p	164p	27	10
2025	82p	82p	129	22
Total		96p	156	20

Executive share plans

Movements in executive share plan awards are shown below:


	Number of shares (millions)
	ISP	DBP	RSP	Total
At 1 April 2022	27	19	53	99
Awards granted	—	5	27	32
Awards vested	(4)	(5)	(4)	(13)
Awards lapsed	(23)	(1)	(7)	(31)
Dividend shares reinvested	—	2	4	6
At 31 March 2023	—	20	73	93
Awards granted	—	5	41	46
Awards vested	—	(8)	(26)	(34)
Awards lapsed	—	(1)	(8)	(9)
Dividend shares reinvested	—	1	6	7
At 31 March 2024	—	17	86	103

Fair values

There were no grants under Employee Saveshare or the ISP in FY24 or FY23.

Volatility has been determined by reference to BT’s historical volatility which is expected to reflect the BT Group plc share price in the

future. An expected life of six months after vesting date is assumed for Employee Saveshare options. The risk-free interest rate is based on

the UK gilt curve in effect at the time of the grant, for the expected life of the option.

The fair values for the DBP and RSP were determined using the market price of the shares at the grant date. The weighted average share

price for DBP awards granted in FY24 was 135p (FY23: 188p) and for RSP awards granted in FY24 was 112p (FY23: 183p).

20. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale



	Material accounting policies that apply to divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale We classify non-current assets or a group of assets and associated liabilities, together forming a disposal group, as ‘held for sale’ when their carrying amount will be recovered principally through disposal rather than continuing use and the sale is highly probable. Sale is considered to be highly probable when management are committed to a plan to sell the asset or disposal group and the sale should be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed divestment within one year from the date of classification. We measure non-current assets or disposal groups classified as held for sale at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value less costs of disposal. Intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets classified as held for sale are not depreciated or amortised. Upon completion of a divestment, we recognise a profit or loss on disposal calculated as the difference between (i) the aggregate of the fair value of the consideration received and the fair value of any retained interest less costs incurred in disposing of the asset or disposal group and (ii) the carrying amount of the asset or disposal group (including goodwill). The profit or loss on disposal is recognised as a specific item, see note 9. In the event that non-current assets or disposal groups held for sale form a separate and identifiable major line of business, the results for both the current and comparative periods are reclassified as ‘discontinued operations’.

Divestments

During the year, we completed the disposals of certain city fibre networks and associated infrastructure assets in Germany and Pelipod

Limited, both of which were classified as held for sale in FY23, and the disposal of BT Enia, a subsidiary of BT Italia. We recognised a net

profit on disposal after tax of £25m through specific items from these divestments, see below for further details.

In FY23, we completed the disposal of BT Sport operations through forming a sports joint venture (Sports JV) with Warner Bros. Discovery

(WBD) recognising a profit on disposal after tax of £28m through specific items. During the current year, we recorded £10m additional net

transaction costs through specific items and received £24m from the deferred cash consideration recorded at completion of the

transaction.

The disposals in the current or prior year have not been reclassified as discontinued operations as they do not meet our definition of a

separate major line of business.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Share-based payments continued

The net consideration recognised on completion of these divestments was as follows:


	2024	2023a
	£m	£m
Intangible assets, including allocated goodwill of £18m (FY23: £83m)	19	88
Property, plant and equipment	13	13
Right-of-use assets	3	1
Other assetsb	8	760
Liabilitiesb	(8)	(357)
Net assets of operations disposed	35	505
Net financial liabilities recognisedc	—	534
Net impact on the consolidated balance sheet	35	1,039
Profit on disposal, after tax (note 9)	25	28
Net consideration from divestments completed in the year	60	1,067
Additional net transaction costs on the BT Sport disposal (note 9)	(10)	—
Net consideration	50	1,067

Satisfied by
Proceeds received in the year per the cash flow statement	81	29
Deferred cash consideration on BT Sport disposald	(24)	70
Deferred cash consideration from other divestments	5	—
Transaction costs	(2)	(35)
Investment in A preference shares in Sports JV (note 22 )	—	428
Investment in C preference shares in Sports JVe	—	161
Ordinary equity interest in Sports JV (note 24)	—	414
Net consideration from divestments completed in the year	60	1,067
Additional net transaction costs on the BT Sport disposal (note 9)	(10)	—
Net consideration	50	1,067

aBalances in FY23 relate to the BT Sport disposal.

b Other assets in FY23 included £632m of capitalised programme rights and £104m prepayments relating to programme rights payments made for licence periods that had not yet

started. Liabilities included £351m relating to outstanding trade payables to broadcast rights holders for the current licence period.

c Net financial liabilities in FY23 the fair value of BT’s obligation under the minimum revenue commitment of £712m, less tax credit of £178m.

d Deferred cash consideration on the BT Sport disposal relates to the discounted cash flows due to BT from the remaining fixed consideration payable by WBD, of which £24m has

been received in FY24. £52m of deferred consideration is outstanding at 31 March 2024 and held in trade and other receivables, see note 16.

e BT’s C preference shares in the Sports JV are expected to be sold to WBD at the end of BT’s earn-out entitlement in consideration for any programme rights funded by BT and is

therefore akin to deferred consideration for pre-funded programme rights contributed by BT in to the Sports JV at formation. See note 24 for further details.

BT Sport

In August 2022 the group formed a sports joint venture (Sports JV) with Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD) combining BT Sport and WBD’s

Eurosport UK business. As part of the transaction, the group’s wholly owned subsidiary, British Telecommunications plc (BT plc or BT) and

WBD each contributed, sub-licensed or delivered the benefit of their respective sports rights and distribution businesses for the UK &

Ireland to the Sports JV. Both parties each hold a 50% interest and equal voting rights in the Sports JV.

BT Sport’s distribution agreement with Virgin Media transferred to the Sports JV, and the Sports JV also entered into an agreement with

Sky extending beyond 2030 to provide for its distribution of the Sports JV’s combined sports content.

The production and operational assets of BT Sport transferred to WBD who manage and operate the production of the Sports JV’s sport

content.

BT plc entered into a distribution agreement with the Sports JV to procure the sport content required to continue to supply our

broadband, TV and mobile customers. BT plc’s agreement with the Sports JV will extend beyond 2030 and the first four years includes a

minimum revenue guarantee of approximately £500m per annum, after which the agreement will change to a fully variable arrangement.

BT no longer has control of the BT Sport operations based on the assessment of ownership and joint control over the key decisions of the

Sports JV (50/50 with WBD) established through the Sports JV agreement. The group’s retained ordinary equity interest in the combined

business has been classified as a joint venture under IFRS 11, see note 24.

WBD have the option to acquire BT plc’s 50% interest in the Sports JV at specified points during the first four years of the Sports JV (Call

Option). The price payable under the Call Option will be 50% of the fair market value of the Sports JV to be determined at the time of the

exercise, plus any unpaid fixed consideration and remaining earn-out as described below. If the Call Option is not exercised, BT plc will

have the ability to exit its shareholding in the Sports JV either through a sale or IPO after the initial four-year period.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

20. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale continued



	Critical & key accounting estimates and significant judgements made in accounting for the BT Sport disposal in FY23 Following critical and key accounting estimates and significant judgements were made in accounting for the BT Sport disposal in FY23 only and are not considered to be ongoing significant judgements. Assessment of whether BT has joint control over the Sports JV See note 22 for assessment of control.
	Valuation of investment in A preference shares (akin to contingent consideration) BT will receive an earn-out from the Sports JV (subject to liquidity and usual UK company law requirements), which will end at the earliest of: – four years post completion of the transaction; – the exercise by WBD of the Call Option; and – if the earn-out reaches an agreed cap. The earn-out cash flows to BT are dependent on the cash profit generation of the Sports JV over the earn-out period and is therefore akin to contingent consideration, initially recorded at a fair value of £428m reflecting the present value of expected cash flows. Subsequent to the initial recognition, the group’s carried forward investment in A preference shares are remeasured to fair value at each reporting date in accordance with IFRS 9, see note 22.
	Valuation of the minimum revenue guarantee in BT’s distribution agreement with the Sports JV BT plc’s obligation under the minimum revenue guarantee of c. £2bn over the first four years of the Sports JV represents both a trading arrangement on market terms and a financing arrangement for the off-market element of the revenue guarantee, which has been recorded as a financial liability at an initial fair value of £712m. The valuation of this financial liability, and what a fair cost-per-subscriber would be, is sensitive to a number of assumptions on volumes and price, and there is a range of outcomes which we could have arrived at. Alternative scenarios considered, based on the different prices and terms used with other market participants, could have resulted in a liability ranging from £543m to £837m. The key assumptions in calculating the financial liability are in estimating what is a market wholesale price at market volume commitment that is supported by the forecast volumes for the related revenue streams. The volumes used are consistent with those included in the jointly-agreed business plan for the Sports JV. We note that the bottom of the range disclosed above is based on the price that we will pay when the minimum revenue guarantee has ended, however we do not believe that is an appropriate rate from the outset due to existing volume commitments. The liability is held at amortised cost within trade and other payables on the balance sheet (see note 16) – the carrying amount at 31 March 2024 has reduced to £465m (FY23: £660m) after payments made to the Sports JV on the minimum revenue guarantee.
	Valuation of BT’s equity interest in the Sports JV WBD has the option to acquire BT plc’s 50% interest in the Sports JV at specified points during the first four years of the Sports JV. If the Call Option is not exercised, BT plc will have the ability to exit its shareholding in the JV either through a sale or IPO. The group valued its interest in the Sports JV based on the estimated fair value at exit and using the following key assumptions: – BT expect to realise its interest in the Sports JV through exit rather than ongoing value in use. – BT expect WBD to exercise its option to acquire BT’s 50% interest in the Sports JV at the end of the first four years of the Sports JV. – An earnings multiple has been applied to the expected year 5 EBITDA per the jointly-agreed business plan - the multiple is at the lower end of a possible range identified from comparable peers and transactions in the premium sports subscription and broadcasting market. The investment is subsequently accounted for using the equity method and will be subject to impairment testing at each reporting period, with any impairment losses recognised through specific items, see note 22.
	Discounting of cash flows All cash flows expected to be received or paid over time were discounted at a rate applicable to the risks associated with the cash flows: – Deferred payments due to BT from WBD have been discounted at an appropriate post-tax cost of debt; – BT’s earn-out from the Sports JV has been discounted at the weighted average cost of capital for the Sports JV at completion date; and – BT’s commitments under the minimum guarantee have been discounted at the group’s post-tax cost of debt. We do not consider the net present value of the transaction would be materially affected by a reasonable change in the discount rate.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

20. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale continued

Assets and liabilities held for sale

At 31 March 2024 there are no assets and liabilities classified as held for sale.

Assets and liabilities classified as held for sale at 31 March 2023 related to certain city fibre networks and associated infrastructure assets

in Germany and Pelipod Limited. These divestments completed during FY24, and information on the gains and losses on disposal is

disclosed above.

The disposal groups held for sale comprised the following assets and liabilities:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Assets
Intangible assetsa	—	13
Property, plant and equipment	—	4
Right-of-use assets	—	3
Inventories	—	—
Trade and other receivables	—	1
Assets held for sale	—	21
Liabilities
Trade and other payables	—	1
Lease liabilities	—	3
Liabilities held for sale	—	4

aIntangible assets in FY23 include goodwill of £13m that has been allocated to the disposal group.

21. Investments



	Material accounting policies that apply to investments Investments classified as amortised cost These investments are measured at amortised cost. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value. Any gain or loss on derecognition is recognised in the income statement. Investments classified as fair value through profit and loss These investments are initially recognised at fair value plus direct transaction costs. They are re-measured at subsequent reporting dates to fair value and changes are recognised directly in the income statement. Equity instruments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income We have made an irrevocable election to present changes in the fair value of equity investments that are not held for trading in other comprehensive income. All gains or losses, aside from dividends, are recognised in other comprehensive income and are not reclassified to the income statement when the investments are disposed of, instead any balance remaining in other comprehensive income is transferred to retained earnings. Dividends which are recognised in the income statement when our right to receive payment is established. Equity investments are recorded in non-current assets unless they are expected to be sold within one year.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Non-current assets
Fair value through other comprehensive income	23	23
Amounts owed by ultimate parent and parent company	11,633	10,916
Fair value through profit or loss	6	6
Total non-current asset investments	11,662	10,945
Current assets
Investments held at amortised cost	2,366	3,548
Current asset investments	2,366	3,548

Investments held at amortised cost relate to money market investments denominated in sterling of £2,355m (FY23: £3,094m), in euros of

£5m (FY23: £446m) and US dollars of £6m (FY23: £8m). Within these amounts are investments in liquidity funds of £1,815m (FY23:

£3,491m), collateral paid on swaps of £40m (FY23: £48m), interest on investments of £11m (FY23: £9m) and gilt repurchase agreements

£500m (FY23: £nil).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

20. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale continued

Fair value estimation


Fair value hierarchy	Level 1	Level 2	Level 3	Total held at fair value
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m
Non-current and current investments
Fair value through other comprehensive income	—	—	23	23
Fair value through profit or loss	6	—	—	6
Total	6	—	23	29

At 31 March 2023
Non-current and current investments
Fair value through other comprehensive income	—	—	23	23
Fair value through profit or loss	6	—	—	6
Total	6	—	23	29

The three levels of valuation methodology used are:

Level 1 – uses quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

Level 2 – uses inputs for the asset or liability other than quoted prices that are observable either directly or indirectly.

Level 3 – uses inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data, such as internal models or other valuation

methods.

Level 3 balances consist of investments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income of £23m (FY23: £23m) which

represent investments in a number of private companies. If specific market data is not available, these investments are held at cost,

adjusted as necessary for impairments, which approximates to fair value.

22. Joint ventures and associates


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Interest in joint ventures	302	354
Interest in associates	5	5
Total	307	359

Share of post tax loss of associates and joint ventures included in the income statement of £21m (FY23: £59m loss) includes £41m loss

(FY23: £60m) relating to our sports joint venture (Sports JV) with Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD) and £20m profit (FY23: £1m) relating to

our other joint ventures and associates including Rugby Radio Station. The Sports JV is the only material equity-accounted investment

held by the group, see below for further details.

Sports JV

In FY23 we formed the Sports JV (known externally as TNT Sports) with WBD, combining BT Sport and WBD’s Eurosport UK business.

Further details on the transaction are provided in note 20.

Key developments in the Sports JV during the year:

– BT Sport’s linear channels and live content were rebranded to TNT Sports prior to the start of the 2023/24 football season with

streaming customers migrated to WBD’s discovery+ platform in October 2023. Eurosport UK rebranding will follow later in the year.

– Underlying trading, before adjustments made to align with the group’s accounting policies (see below), was profitable with stable

subscriber volumes.

– Premier League rights were extended with a four-year deal to air 52 exclusively live matches per season until 2029, and a four-year deal

was agreed with the Football Association to show the FA Cup from 2025.

The group holds both ordinary equity shares and preference shares in the Sports JV entity.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

21. Investments continued



	Material accounting policies that apply to the Sports JV Assessment of whether BT has joint control over the Sports JV The Sports JV is classified as a joint venture based on an assessment under IFRS 10 and 11 of the ownership, voting power and joint control established through the joint venture agreement between BT and WBD. Factors relevant to our assessment: – Equal voting rights over the activities that most significantly impact the returns of the Sports JV, namely decisions around new or existing sports rights and distribution arrangements. – Unequal cash distribution during the first four years of the JV due to the earn-out mechanism and larger business contributed into the JV by BT. – Revolving credit facility (RCF) provided by BT to fund short-term liquidity required by the Sports JV for working capital and commitments to sports rights holders. – WBD’s call option to acquire BT’s 50% interest in the Sports JV is not exercisable before key decisions over material activities of the Sports JV are made such that joint control still applies. The assessment whether joint control remains in place is reviewed at each reporting period.
	Accounting policies adopted by the Sports JV The Sports JV has a financial year-end of 31 July and has not yet prepared its first set of audited financial statements. In order to recognise our share of the Sports JV’s results for our equity-accounted investment, we have prepared the Sports JV’s financial information disclosed below based on management accounts for the period ending 31 March 2024 after making certain adjustments to comply with IFRS. Significant judgements made in preparing the Sports JV’s financial information: – IFRS 3 acquisition accounting should be applied by the Sports JV over the business combination achieved through the transfer of the BT Sport and Eurosport UK businesses from BT and WBD respectively, recognising acquired intangibles on the current and future value of programme rights, and goodwill. – Revenues from the minimum guarantee in the Sports JV’s distribution agreement with BT should be adjusted to reflect a trading agreement on market terms with a separate financing arrangement for the off-market portion accounted for under IFRS 9 – this mirrors the accounting treatment applied by BT (see note 20). – A and C preference shares issued by the Sports JV to BT should be classified as a financial liability at fair value through profit or loss under IFRS 9, as cash flows of the liability can be modified by both financial and non-financial factors that are not closely related to the instrument itself. – Hedge accounting should be applied on the Sports JV’s forward contracts with BT (see note 29) with fair value movements on the derivatives recognised in other comprehensive income and held in the cash flow hedge reserve until recycle on settlement of the forward contracts. – Programme rights should be recognised on the balance sheet from the point at which the licence period begins and are consumed by the Sports JV on a straight-line basis over the programming period which is generally 12 months. This is consistent with accounting policy applied in our previous BT Sport operations that have been transferred to the Sports JV. Accounting policies in other areas are consistent with those applied by the group.



	Key accounting estimates made in accounting for the Sports JV Valuation of investment in A preference shares We expect the group’s A preference shares to be redeemed by the Sports JV for the distribution of cash to BT under our earn-out entitlement. BT’s return on the shares is driven by the underlying cash profit generation of the Sports JV and therefore have been classified as a fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) financial asset under IFRS 9 and is remeasured to fair value at each reporting date. The fair value recorded is supported by a jointly-agreed business plan and internal valuation model with the following key assumptions: – Approximately 45% of revenues and 90% of costs during the remaining earn out period are contractually committed. – Material contracts are renewed at an economic value no less than current terms. – Total premium sports subscriber base does not materially grow or decline over the remaining earn-out period.

Ordinary equity shares

Our retained ordinary equity interest in the Sports JV is held under the equity method of accounting, consistent with our accounting policy

on associates and joint ventures.


	2024	2023
	£m	£m
Carrying amount at 1 April	352	414
Share of total comprehensive loss for the year	(52)	(62)
Dividends received during the year	—	—
Carrying amount at 31 March	300	352

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22. Joint ventures and associates continued

As required by IAS 36, we have assessed the investment for impairment. There is no impairment at 31 March 2024 as the fair value less

costs to sell is higher than the carrying amount of the investment. See below for sensitivities we have applied in determining the fair value

less costs to sell.

The following is summarised and unaudited financial information for the Sports JV prepared in accordance with IFRS and including

adjustments required to align with the group’s accounting policies and fair value adjustments.


	2024	2023
Summarised statement of total comprehensive income for year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Revenue	918	557
Loss for the yeara	(82)	(121)
Other comprehensive loss	(22)	(2)
Total comprehensive loss	(104)	(123)

	2024	2023b
Summarised balance sheet at 31 March	£m	£m
Current assetsc	863	1,098
Non-current assetsd	1,085	1,286
Current liabilitiese	(413)	(702)
Non-current liabilitiesf	(575)	(618)
Net assets	960	1,064
Attributable to fair value of BT’s A preference shares (see below)	(387)	(429)
BT’s share of residual net assets (50%)	287	318
Other fair value adjustments	13	34
Carrying amount of interest in Sports JV	300	352

a Includes amortisation of £27m (FY23: £56m) on acquired intangibles; net finance income of £5m (FY23: £6m); and tax income of £57m (FY23: £17m) driven by current tax charge of

£10m (FY23: £4m) offset by deferred tax credit of £67m (FY23: £21m).

b Restated to reflect true-up to opening balance sheet from finalising fair value adjustments.

c Includes cash and cash and cash equivalents of £11m (FY23: £11m).

d Includes goodwill and acquired intangibles of £668m (FY23: £695m restated).

e Includes current financial liabilities (excluding trade and other payables and provisions) of £(244)m (FY23: £(281)m) of which £(163)m (FY23: £(268)m) relates to the outstanding

liability on the RCF provided by BT (see note 29).

f Includes non-current financial liabilities (excluding trade and other payables and provisions) of £(305)m (FY23: £(416)m).

The Sports JV had a loss after tax for the year of £82m, after adjustments made to align with the group’s accounting policies, and reflects

amortisation of acquired intangibles from the BT Sport and Eurosport UK business transfers and adjustments for the off-market minimum

guarantee with BT (see note 20). Underlying trading before these adjustments was profitable. In addition, the Sports JV had other

comprehensive losses of £22m relating to fair value movements on its foreign exchange hedging arrangement with the group (see note

29) that have been designated as cash flow hedges.

Our share of the Sports JV’s results in FY23 included amortisation from provisional fair value adjustments, which were subject to true-up

within 12 months from the Sports JV formation. We have subsequently finalised these fair value adjustments and recorded a £25m credit

in the current year as a true-up to the amount recorded in FY23, of which our 50% share is £13m. The difference is not material and

therefore we have not retrospectively adjusted our share of total comprehensive loss in FY23.

Preference shares

In addition to BT’s ordinary shareholding, BT held the following investments in preference shares in the Sports JV that have not been

included within the equity-accounted interest above.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Investment in A preference shares	387	429
Investment in C preference shares	146	126
Total	533	555

A net £22m movement has been recorded on the group’s preference share investments relating to fair value changes only, see below for

further details.

– A preference shares – a £42m fair value loss has been recognised through specific items (see note 9), largely driven by a reduction in

forecast cash flows following the Sports JV’s investment in new sports content, leading to lower cash available for distribution under

BT’s earn-out entitlement.

– C preference shares – these shares are expected to be sold to WBD at the end of BT’s earn-out entitlement in consideration for any

sports rights funded by BT at that point. BT’s return on the shares is driven by changes in the Sports JV’s sports rights portfolio which in

turn is dependent on changes in the wider sports rights market and the Sports JV’s financial performance and are therefore held as a

financial asset at FVTPL under IFRS 9. A £20m fair value gain has been recognised through specific items (see note 9) driven by an

expected growth in the Sports JV content portfolio, which will increase the payment to BT for pre-funded sports rights up to the end of

BT’s earn-out entitlement.

The preference shares are held at Level 3 on the fair value hierarchy, reflecting a valuation methodology that does not use inputs based on

observable market data – see note 21 for further details on the fair value hierarchy. See below for sensitivities we have applied in

determining the fair value.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22. Joint ventures and associates continued

Sensitivities

The group’s ordinary equity and preference share investments in the Sports JV, carry both upside and downside risk from changes in micro

and macroeconomic factors affecting the sports content subscription market and risk appetite of investors in that market. Further, a key

decision point in the next 12 months, relating to the renewal of a material customer contract, could significantly impact the value of our

investments.

We have applied the following sensitivities to these risk factors:

– EBITDA decline from loss of revenue or improvement from outperformance against revised forecasts.

– Increase or decrease in the valuation multiple achieved.

– Increase or decrease in the discount rate applied.


Sensitivity	Fair value of A and C preference shares in Sports JV	Headroom on impairment test over equity-accounted investment
20% increase or decrease in EBITDA	+/- £112m	+/- £117m
10% increase or decrease in discount rate	+/- £4m	+/- £14m
10% change in valuation multiple	—	+/- £57m

None of these sensitivities generated an impairment on the group’s equity-accounted investment in the Sports JV.

In valuing our investments, we have assumed an exit after the earn-out period ends on the fourth anniversary of forming the Sports JV.

However, an earlier exit would not have a material impact on the amounts recorded.

23. Cash and cash equivalents



	Material accounting policies that apply to cash and cash equivalents Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and current balances with banks and similar institutions, which are readily convertible to cash, are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value and have an original maturity of three months or less. All are held at amortised cost on the balance sheet, equating to fair value. For the purpose of the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents are as defined above net of outstanding bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included within the current element of loans and other borrowings (note 24 ).


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Cash at bank and in hand	327	328
Cash equivalents
Indian rupee deposits	74	55
Other deposits	8	1
Total cash equivalents	82	56
Total cash and cash equivalents	409	384
Bank overdrafts (note 24)	(58)	(11)
Cash and cash equivalents per the cash flow statement	351	373

Majority of cash at bank balance was held at counterparties with a credit rating of A2/A or above. Cash and cash equivalents include

restricted cash of £71m (FY23 : £131m), of which £14m (FY23: £23m) was held in countries where local capital or exchange controls

currently prevent us from accessing cash balances. The remaining balance of £57m (FY23: £108m ) was held in escrow accounts, or in

commercial arrangements akin to escrow.

24. Loans and other borrowings

Material accounting policies that apply to loans and other borrowings

We initially recognise loans and other borrowings at the fair value of amounts received net of transaction costs. They are subsequently

measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method and, if included in a fair value hedge relationship, are re-valued to reflect

the fair value movements on the associated hedged risk. The resulting amortisation of fair value movements, on de-designation of the

hedge, is recognised in the income statement.

Capital management policy

The capital structure is managed by BT Group plc, the ultimate parent of the group. Its capital management policy is set out in the Report

of the Directors on page 28.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22. Joint ventures and associates continued

The table below shows the key components of external gross debt and of the decrease of £223m (FY23: increase of 1,327m).


	At 31 March 2023	Cash flows	Net lease additionsa	Foreign exchange	Transfer to within one year	Other movementsd	At 31 March 2024
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and other borrowings due within one yearb	1,772	(1,615)	—	(12)	1,227	23	1,395
Loans and other borrowings due after one year	16,749	1,800	—	(287)	(1,227)	96	17,131
Total loans and other borrowings	18,521	185	—	(299)	—	119	18,526
Lease liabilities due within one year	800	(882)	—	(1)	849	—	766
Lease liabilities due after one year	4,559	—	487	(8)	(849)	—	4,189
Lease liabilities classified as held for sale	3	—	—	—	—	(3)	—
Total lease liabilities	5,362	(882)	487	(9)	—	(3)	4,955
Gross debt	23,883	(697)	487	(308)	—	116	23,481
Impact of cross-currency swapsc	(819)	—	—	307	—	—	(512)
Removal of the accrued interest and fair value adjustments	(264)	—	—	—	—	(22)	(286)
Removal of loans with joint ventures	(11)	(1)	—	—	—	1	(11)
Removal of loans related to the forward sale of redundant copper	—	(105)	—	—	—	(1)	(106)
External gross debt	22,789	(803)	487	(1)	—	94	22,566

	At 31 March 2022	Cash flows	Net lease additionsa	Foreign exchange	Transfer to within one year	Other movementsd	At 31 March 2023
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and other borrowings due within one yearb	873	(136)	—	65	943	27	1,772
Loans and other borrowings due after one year	15,312	1,746	—	525	(943)	109	16,749
Total loans and other borrowings	16,185	1,610	—	590	—	136	18,521
Lease liabilities due within one year	795	(860)	—	2	863	—	800
Lease liabilities due after one year	4,965	—	449	11	(863)	(3)	4,559
Lease liabilities classified as held for sale	2	—	—	—	—	1	3
Total lease liabilities	5,762	(860)	449	13	—	(2)	5,362
Gross debt	21,947	750	449	603	—	134	23,883
Impact of cross-currency swapsc	(234)	—	—	(585)	—	—	(819)
Removal of the accrued interest and fair value adjustments	(251)	—	—	—	—	(13)	(264)
Removal of loans with joint ventures	—	(11)	—	—	—	—	(11)
External gross debt	21,462	739	449	18	—	121	22,789

aNet lease additions are net non-cash movements in lease liabilities during the period, and primarily comprise new and terminated leases, remeasurements of existing leases and

lease interest charges.

bIncludes accrued interest and bank overdrafts.

cTranslation of debt balances at swap rates where hedged by cross-currency swaps.

dOther movements include removal of accrued interest applied to reflect the effective interest rate method, removal of fair value adjustments and movements relating to held for sale

assets and liabilities (see note 20).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

24. Loans and other borrowings continued

The table below gives details of the listed bonds and other debt.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
0.875% €306m bond due September 2023a	—	270
4.5% $675m bond due December 2023a	—	554
1% €469m bond due June 2024a,d	—	415
1% €825m bond due November 2024a	708	726
3.50% £250m index linked bond due April 2025	575	524
0.5% €650m bond due September 2025a	557	571
1.75% €1,300m bond due March 2026a	1,112	1,143
1.5% €1,150m bond due June 2027a	991	1,017
2.75% €700m bond due August 2027a,f	601	530
2.125% €500m bond due September 2028a	431	442
5.125% $700m bond due December 2028a	561	573
5.75% £600m bond due December 2028	658	669
1.125% €750m bond due September 2029a	640	657
3.25% $1,000m bond due November 2029a	796	812
9.625% $2,670m bond due December 2030a (minimum 8.625%b)	2,166	2,214
3.75% €800m bond due February 2031a	704	704
3.125% £500m bond due November 2031	503	503
3.375% €500m bond due August 2032a	433	445
4.25% €850m bond due January 2033a	725	—
3.64% £330m bond due June 2033	339	339
1.613% £330m index linked bond due June 2033	394	380
6.375% £500m bond due June 2037	523	523
3.883% £330m bond due June 2039	340	340
1.739% £330m index linked bond due June 2039	394	381
5.75% £450m bond due February 2041f	445	347
3.924% £340m bond due June 2042	350	350
1.774% £340m index linked bond due June 2042	406	392
2.08% JPY10,000m bond due February 2043a	52	61
3.625% £250m bond due November 2047	251	250
4.25% $500m bond due November 2049a	400	408
1.874% €500m hybrid bond due August 2080a,c	432	443
4.250% $500m hybrid bond due November 2081a,c	396	404
4.875% $500m hybrid bond due November 2081a,c	401	409
8.375% £700m hybrid bond due December 2083c	710	—
Total listed bonds	17,994	17,796
Loans related to cash flows related to the sale of contract assetse	341	100
Loans related to the forward sale of redundant copper	106	—
Other loans	27	614
Bank overdrafts (note 23)	58	11
Total other loans and borrowings	532	725
Total loans and other borrowings	18,526	18,521

aDesignated in a cash flow hedge relationship.

bThe interest rate payable on this bond attracts an additional 0.25% for rating category downgrade by either Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s to the group’s senior unsecured debt below

A3/A– respectively. In addition, if Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s subsequently increase the ratings then the interest rate will be decreased by 0.25% for each rating category upgrade

by either rating agency. In no event will the interest rate be reduced below the minimum rate reflected in the above table.

cIncludes call options between 1.5 years and 7.5 years.

d Redeemed in March 2024.

ePerformance obligations have been substantially delivered to the customer in relation to these cash flows related to contract assets that have been sold but the right to receive cash

is dependent on the group’s future performance in relation to airtime and so a financial liability has been recognised. The related cash flows have been included within financing

activities in the cash flow statement. £318m of the liability relates to sales of cash flows related to contract assets in FY24 and so is removed from our net debt measure, the remaining

£23m relates to sales in FY23.

fIncreased the issue size on €700m bond due August 2027 by €100m in November 2023 and on £450m bond due February 2041 by £100m in December 2023 .

Unless previously designated in a fair value hedge relationship, all loans and other borrowings are carried on our balance sheet and in the

table above at amortised cost. The fair value of listed bonds is £17,820m (FY23: £16,979m).

The fair value of our listed bonds is estimated on the basis of quoted market prices (Level 1).

The carrying amount of other loans and bank overdrafts equates to fair value due to the short maturity of these items (Level 3).

The interest rates payable on loans and borrowings disclosed above reflect the coupons on the underlying issued loans and borrowings

and not the interest rates achieved through applying associated cross-currency and interest rate swaps in hedge arrangements.

During the period the group entered into a forward agreement to sell copper granules created from BT’s surplus copper cables. The right

to receive cash is dependent on the initial buyer receiving payment from the end customer and so a financial liability of £106m including

accrued interest has been recognised. This should be the only cash flow that occurs as part of this transaction and so the cash receipt of

£105m has been included in a separate line within investing activities in the cash flow statement.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

24. Loans and other borrowings continued

Loans and other borrowings are analysed as follows:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Current liabilities
Listed bonds	996	1,075
Amounts owed to joint ventures	11	11
Other loans and bank overdraftsa	388	686
Total current liabilities	1,395	1,772
Non-current liabilities
Listed bonds	16,998	16,722
Other loans and bank overdrafts	133	27
Total non-current liabilities	17,131	16,749
Total loans and other borrowings	18,526	18,521

aIncludes collateral received on swaps of £15m (FY23: £557m).

The carrying values disclosed in the above table reflect balances at amortised cost adjusted for accrued interest and fair value

adjustments to the relevant loans or borrowings. These do not reflect the final principal repayments that will arise after taking account of

the relevant derivatives in hedging relationships which are reflected in the table below. All borrowings as at 31 March 2024 were

unsecured.

The principal repayments of loans and borrowings at hedged rates amounted to £17,728m (FY23: £17,442m) and repayments fall due as

follows:


	2024			2023
	Carrying amount	Effect of hedging and interest	Principal repayments at hedged rates	Carrying amount	Effect of hedging and interest	Principal repayments at hedged rates
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Within one year, or on demand	1,395	(258)	1,137	1,772	(271)	1,501
Between one and two years	2,727	(85)	2,642	1,165	15	1,180
Between two and three years	431	(24)	407	2,669	(141)	2,528
Between three and four years	1,614	29	1,643	404	(33)	371
Between four and five years	2,282	6	2,288	1,539	(14)	1,525
After five years	10,107	(496)	9,611	10,983	(646)	10,337
Total due for repayment after more than one year	17,161	(570)	16,591	16,760	(819)	15,941
Total repayments	18,556	(828)	17,728	18,532	(1,090)	17,442
Non cash adjustmentsa	(30)			(11)
Total loans and other borrowings	18,526			18,521

aFair value adjustments and unamortised bond fees.

25. Finance expense and income


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Finance expense
Interest on:
Financial liabilities at amortised cost and associated derivatives	872	753
Lease liabilities	134	133
Derivatives	4	9
Fair value movements on derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship	(1)	1
Reclassification of cash flow hedge from other comprehensive income	38	(21)
Unwinding of discount on provisions and other payables	20	14
Interest payable on ultimate parent company borrowings	—	5
Total finance expense before specific items	1,067	894
Specific items (note 9)a	121	5
Total finance expense	1,188	899

aIncludes £nil (FY23: £13m credit) reclassification of cash flow hedge from other comprehensive income.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

24. Loans and other borrowings continued


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Finance income
Interest on:
Bank deposits and cash equivalents	28	16
Investments held at amortised cost	140	40
Other finance income	13	7
Interest income on loans to immediate and ultimate parent company	709	389
Total finance income before specific items	890	452
Total finance income	890	452


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Net finance expense before specific items	177	442
Specific items (note 9)a	121	5
Net finance expense	298	447

aIncludes £13m credit (FY23: £8m charge) reclassification of cash flow hedge from other comprehensive income.

26. Financial instruments and risk management

Risk management is performed by BT Group plc, the ultimate parent company of the group.

We issue or hold financial instruments mainly to finance our operations; to finance corporate transactions such as share buybacks and

acquisitions; for the temporary investment of short-term funds; and to manage currency and interest rate risks. In addition, various

financial instruments, for example trade receivables and payables arise directly from operations.

How do we manage financial risk?

Our activities expose us to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk), credit risk and

liquidity risk.

Treasury operation

We have a centralised treasury operation whose primary role is to manage liquidity and funding requirements as well as our exposure to

associated market risks, and credit risk.

Treasury policy

Treasury policy is set by the BT Group plc Board. Group treasury activities are subject to a set of controls appropriate for the magnitude of

borrowing, investments and group-wide exposures. The BT Group plc Board has delegated authority to operate these policies to a series

of panels responsible for the management of key treasury risks and operations. Appointment to and removal from the key panels requires

approval from two of the following: the Chairman, the Chief Executive or the Chief Financial Officer of BT Group plc.

There has been no change in the nature of our risk profile between 31 March 2024 and the date of approval of these financial statements.

How do we manage interest rate risk?

Management policy

Interest rate risk arises primarily from our long-term borrowings. Interest cash flow risk arises from borrowings issued at variable rates,

partially offset by cash held at variable rates. Fair value interest rate risk arises from borrowings issued at fixed rates.

Our policy, as set by the BT Group plc Board, is to ensure that at least 70% of ongoing net debt is at fixed rates. Short-term interest rate

management is delegated to the treasury operation while long-term interest rate management decisions require further approval by the

Chief Financial Officer, the Corporate Finance Director or the Group Treasury Director of BT Group plc who each have been delegated

such authority from the BT Group plc Board.

Hedging strategy

In order to manage our interest rate profile, we enter into cross-currency and interest rate swap agreements to vary the amounts and

periods for which interest rates on borrowings are fixed. The duration of the swap agreements matches the duration of the debt

instruments. The majority of the group’s long-term borrowings are subject to fixed sterling interest rates after applying the impact of

these hedging instruments.

How do we manage foreign exchange risk?

Management policy

Foreign currency hedging activities protect the group from the risk that changes in exchange rates will adversely affect future net cash flows.

The BT Group plc Board’s policy for foreign exchange risk management defines the types of transactions typically covered, including

significant operational, funding and currency interest exposures, and the period over which cover should extend for each type of

transaction.

The BT Group plc Board has delegated short-term foreign exchange management to the treasury operation and long-term foreign exchange

management decisions require further approval from the Chief Financial Officer, the Corporate Finance Director or the Group Treasury Director

of BT Group plc.

Hedging strategy

A significant proportion of our external revenue and costs arise within the UK and are denominated in sterling. Our non-UK operations

generally trade and are funded in their functional currency which limits their exposure to foreign exchange volatility. We do not have a

material exposure to hyperinflationary economies.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Finance expense and income continued

We enter into forward currency contracts to hedge foreign currency capital purchases, purchase and sale commitments, interest expense

and foreign currency investments. The commitments hedged are principally denominated in US dollars, euros, Indian rupees and

Hungarian forints. As a result, our exposure to foreign currency arises mainly on non-UK subsidiary investments and on residual currency

trading flows.

We use cross-currency swaps to swap foreign currency borrowings into sterling. The table below reflects the currency and interest rate

profile of our loans and borrowings after the impact of hedging.


	2024			2023
	Fixed rate interest	Floating rate interest	Total	Fixed rate interest	Floating rate interest	Total
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Sterling	15,899	1,780	17,679	15,210	1,773	16,983
Euro	—	—	—	—	443	443
Other	—	49	49	—	16	16
Total	15,899	1,829	17,728	15,210	2,232	17,442
Ratio of fixed to floating	90%	10%	100%	87%	13%	100%
Weighted average effective fixed interest rate – sterling	4.6%			4.0%

The floating rate loans and borrowings and committed facilities bear interest rates fixed in advance for periods up to one year, primarily by

reference to RPI, CPI and ARRs where applicable.

Sensitivity analysis

The income statement and shareholders’ equity are exposed to volatility arising from changes in interest rates, foreign exchange rates and

energy prices. To demonstrate this volatility, management has concluded that the following are reasonable benchmarks for performing

sensitivity analysis:

– For interest, a 1% increase in interest rates and parallel shift in yield curves across sterling, US dollar and euro currencies.

– For foreign exchange, a 10% strengthening of sterling against other currencies.

– For energy, a 10% increase in energy prices.

The impact on equity, before tax and excluding any impact related to retirement benefit plans, of a 1% increase in interest rates,

a 10% strengthening of sterling against other currencies, and a 10% increase in energy prices is as detailed below:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m Increase (reduce)	£m Increase (reduce)
Sterling interest rates	602	579
US dollar interest rates	(300)	(371)
Euro interest rates	(316)	(284)
Sterling strengthening	(142)	(169)
Energy prices	27	45

A 1% decrease in interest rates, 10% weakening of sterling against other currencies would have broadly the same impact in the opposite

direction.

The impact of a 1% change in interest rates on the group’s annual net finance expense would have been a decrease of £103m (FY23:

£104m). The impact of a 10% change in energy prices on group’s income statement and our exposure to foreign exchange volatility in the

income statement, after hedging (excluding translation exposures), would not have been material in FY24 and FY23.

Credit ratings

BT Group plc continues to target a BBB+/Baa1 credit rating over the cycle, with a BBB/Baa2 floor. We regularly review the liquidity of the

group and our funding strategy takes account of medium-term requirements. These include the pension deficit and shareholder

distributions.

Our December 2030 bond contains terms that require us to pay higher rates of interest when BT Group plc's credit ratings are below A3 in

the case of Moody’s or A– in the case of Standard & Poor’s (S&P). Additional interest of 0.25% per year accrues for each ratings category

downgrade by each agency below those levels effective from the next coupon date following a downgrade. Based on the total notional

value of debt outstanding of £2.1bn at 31 March 2024, our finance expense would increase/decrease by approximately £11m a year if the

group’s credit rating were to be downgraded/upgraded, respectively, by one credit rating category by both agencies.

BT Group plc's credit ratings were as detailed below:


At 31 March	2024		2023
At 31 March	Rating	Outlook	Rating	Outlook
Rating agency
Fitch	BBB	Stable	BBB	Stable
Moody’s	Baa2	Stable	Baa2	Stable
Standard & Poor’s	BBB	Stable	BBB	Stable

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

How do we manage liquidity risk?

Management policy

We maintain liquidity by entering into short and long-term financial instruments to support operational and other funding requirements,

determined by using short- and long-term cash forecasts. These forecasts are supplemented by a financial headroom analysis which is

used to assess funding adequacy for at least a 12-month period. On at least an annual basis the BT Group plc Board reviews and approves

the long-term funding requirements of the group and on an ongoing basis considers any related matters. We manage refinancing risk by

limiting the amount of borrowing that matures within any specified period and having appropriate strategies in place to manage

refinancing needs as they arise. The maturity profile of our loans and borrowings at 31 March 2024 is disclosed in note 24. We have term

debt maturities of £0.7bn in FY25.

Our treasury operation reviews and manages our short-term requirements within the parameters of the policies set by the BT Group plc

Board. We hold cash, cash equivalents and current investments in order to manage short-term liquidity requirements. At 31 March 2024

we had undrawn committed borrowing facilities of £2.1bn (FY23: £2.1bn) maturing in March 2027.

The following table provides an analysis of the remaining cash flows including interest payable for our non-derivative financial liabilities on

an undiscounted basis, which may therefore differ from both the carrying value and fair value.


Non-derivative financial liabilities	Loans and other borrowings	Interest on loans and other borrowings	Trade and other payablesc	Lease liabilities	Provisionsd	Total
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Due within one year	1,103	738	5,434	765	—	8,040
Between one and two years	2,727	737	189	730	—	4,383
Between two and three years	431	697	88	696	—	1,912
Between three and four years	1,614	680	—	663	—	2,957
Between four and five years	2,282	649	—	634	—	3,565
After five years	10,107	2,569	—	2,103	—	14,779
	18,264	6,070	5,711	5,591	—	35,636
Interest payments not yet accrued	—	(5,778)	—	—	—	(5,778)
Fair value adjustment	(30)	—	—	—	—	(30)
Impact of discounting	—	—	(16)	(636)	—	(652)
Carrying value on the balance sheeta,b	18,234	292	5,695	4,955	—	29,176

At 31 March 2023 (restated)c
Due within one year	1,512	643	5,411	800	3	8,369
Between one and two yearsc	1,165	637	204	774	2	2,782
Between two and three yearsc	2,669	616	189	676	2	4,152
Between three and four yearsc	404	575	88	640	2	1,709
Between four and five years	1,539	558	—	612	2	2,711
After five years	10,983	2,891	—	2,529	—	16,403
	18,272	5,920	5,892	6,031	11	36,126
Interest payments not yet accrued	—	(5,660)	—	—	—	(5,660)
Fair value adjustment	(11)	—	—	—	—	(11)
Impact of discounting	—	—	(32)	(672)	(1)	(705)
Carrying value on the balance sheeta,b,c	18,261	260	5,860	5,359	10	29,750

aForeign currency-related cash flows were translated at closing foreign exchange rates as at the relevant reporting date. Future variable interest cash flows were calculated using the

most recent interest or indexation rates at the relevant balance sheet date.

bThe carrying amount of trade and other payables excludes £366m (FY23: £429m) of non-current trade and other payables which relates to non-financial liabilities, and £899m

(FY23: £1,113m) of other taxation, social security and deferred income.

cFY23 comparatives have been restated to include the financial liability for the minimum guarantee provided to the Sports JV due in more than one year, totalling £465m.These

amounts had been omitted from this table within the prior year accounts.

dNo provisions meeting the definition of a financial liability have been identified in FY24.

Trade and other payables are held at amortised cost. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value due to the short

maturity of amounts payable.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

100

The following table provides an analysis of the contractually agreed cash flows in respect of the group’s derivative financial instruments.

Cash flows are presented on a net or gross basis in accordance with settlement arrangements of the instruments.


Derivative financial liabilities	Net settled	Gross settled outflows	Gross settled inflows	Total
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m
Due within one year	17	2,274	(2,135)	156
Between one and two years	16	1,152	(1,028)	140
Between two and three years	16	519	(430)	105
Between three and four years	17	1,935	(1,857)	95
Between four and five years	17	597	(528)	86
After five years	12	3,071	(2,866)	217
Totala,b	95	9,548	(8,844)	799

At 31 March 2023
Due within one year	47	2,184	(2,088)	143
Between one and two years	47	1,125	(1,058)	114
Between two and three years	94	939	(882)	151
Between three and four years	111	381	(364)	128
Between four and five years	16	161	(135)	42
After five years	47	2,127	(2,011)	163
Totala,b	362	6,917	(6,538)	741

aAnalysed by earliest payment date, certain derivative financial instruments contain break clauses whereby either the group or bank counterparty have the right to terminate the swap

on certain dates. If the break clause was exercised, the mark to market position would be settled in cash.

bForeign currency-related cash flows were translated at closing foreign exchange rates as at the relevant reporting date. Future variable interest rate cash flows were calculated using

the most recent rate applied at the relevant balance sheet date.

How do we manage energy price risk?

Management policy

UK (excluding Northern Ireland) and European energy prices continue to be exposed to volatility driven by fears of reduced gas supply as

Europe continues the shift from Russian gas to LNG and renewables (which themselves are subject to short-term fluctuations given their

intermittent nature). In order to manage our exposure to fluctuating energy prices, we have a target for UK (excluding Northern Ireland)

energy demand to be at least 80% hedged one quarter before the start of the next financial year, and 50% hedged for the following

financial year. We achieve this through forward over the counter hedges and a mixture of new and existing power purchase agreements

(PPAs) and derivative virtual PPAs (vPPAs).

Hedging strategy

In each financial year our strategy is to build on our existing PPA and vPPA portfolio, exploring opportunities with 5-10 year contracts

delivering favourable net present values. We complement this by monitoring the markets and forward purchasing electricity (power)

when the market is favourable. In the forthcoming financial year the aim is to be 95% hedged, which allows for headroom for increased

outputs from the renewable sources should weather conditions prevail.

How do we manage credit risk?

Management policy

Our exposure to credit risk arises from financial assets transacted by the treasury operation (primarily derivatives, investments, cash and

cash equivalents) and from trading-related receivables.

For treasury-related balances, the BT Group plc Board’s defined policy restricts exposure to any one counterparty by setting credit limits

based on the credit quality as defined by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s. The minimum credit ratings permitted with counterparties in

respect of new transactions are A3/A– for long-term and P1/A1 for short-term investments. If counterparties in respect of existing

transactions fall below the permitted criteria we will take action where appropriate.

The treasury operation continuously reviews the limits applied to counterparties and will adjust the limit according to the nature and credit

standing of the counterparty, and in response to market conditions, up to the maximum allowable limit set by the BT Group plc Board.

Operational management policy

Our credit policy for trading-related financial assets is applied and managed by each of the customer-facing units (CFUs) to ensure

compliance. The policy requires that the creditworthiness and financial strength of customers are assessed at inception and on an ongoing

basis. Payment terms are set in accordance with industry standards. Where appropriate, we may minimise risks by requesting securities

such as deposits, guarantees and letters of credit. We take proactive steps including constantly reviewing credit ratings of counterparties

to minimise the impact of adverse market conditions on trading-related financial assets.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

101

Exposures

The maximum credit risk exposure of the group’s financial assets at the balance sheet date is as follows:


		2024	2023
At 31 March	Notes	£m	£m
Derivative financial assets		1,070	1,479
Investments	21	14,028	14,493
Trade and other receivablesa	15	2,249	1,847
Contract assets	5	1,740	1,934
Cash and cash equivalents	23	409	384
Total		19,496	20,137

a The carrying amount excludes £641m (FY23: £503m) of non-current trade and other receivables which relate to non-financial assets, and £1,340m (FY23: £1,240m) of

prepayments, deferred contract costs, finance lease receivables and other assets.

The credit quality and credit concentration of cash equivalents, current asset investments and derivative financial assets are detailed in

the tables below. Where the opinion of Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s (S&P) differ, the lower rating is used.


Moody’s/S&P credit rating of counterparty	2024	2023
Moody’s/S&P credit rating of counterparty	£m	£m
Aa2/AA and above	1,823	3,498
Aa3/AA–	585	115
A1/A+	819	957
A2/A	261	400
A3/A–	—	53
Baa1/BBB+	—	—
Baa2/BBB and belowa	30	60
Totalb	3,518	5,083

aBaa2/BBB rated exposure represents the energy derivatives and carrying value of forward currency contracts with Sports JV.

bWe hold cash collateral of £15m (FY23: £557m) in respect of derivative financial assets with certain counterparties, this has reduced during the year as a result of derivative portfolio

management.

The concentration of credit risk for our trading balances is provided in note 15, which analyses outstanding balances by CFU. Where multiple

transactions are undertaken with a single financial counterparty or group of related counterparties, we enter into netting arrangements to reduce

our exposure to credit risk by making use of standard International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) documentation. We have also

entered into credit support agreements with certain swap counterparties whereby, on a daily, weekly and monthly basis, the fair value position on

notional £1,047m (FY23: £2,024m) of long-dated cross-currency swaps and interest rate swaps is collateralised.

Offsetting of financial instruments

The table below shows our financial assets and liabilities that are subject to offset in the group’s balance sheet and the impact of

enforceable master netting or similar agreements.


Financial assets and liabilities		Related amounts not set off in the balance sheet
Financial assets and liabilities	Amounts presented in the balance sheet	Right of set off with derivative counterparties	Cash collateral	Net amount
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m
Derivative financial assets	1,070	(356)	(15)	699
Derivative financial liabilities	(539)	356	40	(143)
Total	531	—	25	556

At 31 March 2023
Derivative financial assets	1,479	(323)	(557)	599
Derivative financial liabilities	(383)	323	48	(12)
Total	1,096	—	(509)	587

Derivatives and hedging

We use derivative financial instruments mainly to reduce exposure to foreign exchange and interest rate risks. Derivatives may qualify as

hedges for accounting purposes if they meet the criteria for designation as cash flow hedges or fair value hedges in accordance with IFRS 9.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

102



	Material accounting policies that apply to derivatives and hedge accounting All of our derivative financial instruments are held at fair value on the balance sheet. Derivatives designated in a cash flow hedge The group designates certain derivatives in a cash flow hedge relationship. Where derivatives qualify for hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss depends on the nature of the hedge. To qualify for hedge accounting, hedge documentation must be prepared at inception, the hedge must be in line with BT Group plc's risk management strategy and there must be an economic relationship based on the currency, amount and timing of the respective cash flows of the hedging instrument and hedged item. This is assessed at inception and in subsequent periods in which the hedge remains in operation. Hedge accounting is discontinued when it is no longer in line with BT Group plc's risk management strategy or if it no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. BT Group plc targets a one-to-one hedge ratio. The economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument is assessed on an ongoing basis. Ineffectiveness can arise from subsequent change in the forecast transactions as a result of altered timing, cash flows or value. When a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset or liability, or a highly probable transaction, the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument is recognised directly in equity. For cash flow hedges of recognised assets or liabilities, the associated cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in the same line of the income statement and in the same period or periods that the hedged transaction affects the income statement. Any ineffectiveness arising on a cash flow hedge is recognised immediately in the income statement. Other derivatives BT Group's policy is not to use derivatives for trading purposes. However, due to the complex nature of hedge accounting, some derivatives may not qualify for hedge accounting, or may be specifically not designated as a hedge because natural offset is more appropriate. We effectively operate a process to identify any embedded derivatives within revenue, supply, leasing and financing contracts, including those relating to inflationary features. These derivatives are classified as fair value through profit and loss and are recognised at fair value. Any direct transaction costs are recognised immediately in the income statement. Gains and losses on re- measurement are recognised in the income statement in the line that most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction to which they relate. Where the fair value of a derivative contract at initial recognition is not supported by observable market data and differs from the transaction price, a day one gain or loss will arise which is not recognised in the income statement. Such gains and losses are deferred and amortised to the income statement based on the remaining contractual term and as observable market data becomes available. The fair values of outstanding swaps and foreign exchange contracts are estimated using discounted cash flow models and market rates of interest and foreign exchange at the balance sheet date.


	Current asset	Non-current asset	Current liability	Non-current liability
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m
Designated in a cash flow hedge	34	947	80	383
Other	16	73	14	62
Total derivatives	50	1,020	94	445

At 31 March 2023
Designated in a cash flow hedge	78	1,330	62	255
Other	4	67	24	42
Total derivatives	82	1,397	86	297

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

All derivative financial instruments are categorised at Level 2, with the exception of the energy contracts which are categorised at Level 3

of the fair value hierarchy as defined in note 21.

Instruments designated in a cash flow hedge include interest rate swaps and cross-currency swaps hedging euro, US dollar and Japanese

yen denominated borrowings. Forward currency contracts are taken out to hedge step-up interest on currency denominated borrowings

relating to the group’s 2030 US dollar bond. The hedged cash flows will affect the group’s income statement as interest and principal

amounts are repaid over the remaining term of the borrowings (see note 24).

We hedge forecast foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollars, euros, Indian rupees and Hungarian forints 12

months forward with certain specific transactions hedged further forward. The related cash flows are recognised in the income statement

over this period.

All hedge relationships were fully effective in the period.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

103

The amounts related to items designated as hedging instruments were as follows:


Hedged items	Notional principal	Asset	Liability	Balance in cash flow hedge related reserves (gain)/loss	Fair value (gain)/loss recognised in OCI	Amount recycled from cash flow hedge related reserves to P&L
At 31 March 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Sterling, euro, US dollar and Japanese yen denominated borrowings a	13,583	960	(355)	(213)	464	(361)
Step up interest on the 2030 US dollar bondb	112	—	(2)	(25)	2	4
Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollars, euros, Indian rupees and Hungarian forints c	1,308	18	(11)	(12)	15	8
Other, including energy contractsd		3	(95)	90	161	(7)
Total cash flow hedges	15,003	981	(463)	(160)	642	(356)
Deferred tax		—	—	27
Derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship		89	(76)	—
Carrying value on the balance sheet		1,070	(539)	(133)

At 31 March 2023
Sterling, euro, US dollar and Japanese yen denominated borrowingsa	12,888	1,316	(290)	(316)	(887)	597
Step up interest on the 2030 US dollar bondb	115	—	(2)	(31)	(8)	6
Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollars, euros, Indian rupees and Hungarian forintsc	1,211	34	(24)	(35)	(75)	61
Other, including energy contractsd		58	(1)	(64)	(85)	49
Total cash flow hedges	14,214	1,408	(317)	(446)	(1,055)	713
Deferred tax		—	—	106
Derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship		71	(66)	—
Carrying value on the balance sheet		1,479	(383)	(340)

aSterling, euro, US dollar and Japanese yen denominated borrowings are hedged using cross-currency swaps and interest rate swaps. Amounts recycled to profit and loss are

presented within finance expense. Range of hedged rates: sterling interest: 5.9% - 6.0% (FY23: 5.9% - 6.0%), euro FX: 1.12 - 1.29 (FY23: 1.11 - 1.29), US dollar FX: 1.28 - 1.80

(FY23: 1.28 - 1.80), Japanese yen FX: 156.92 (FY23: 156.92).

bStep up interest on US dollar denominated borrowings are hedged using forward currency contracts. Amounts recycled to profit and loss are presented within finance expense.

Range of hedged FX rates: 1.21 - 1.28 (FY23: 1.17 - 1.24).

cForeign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollars, euros, Indian rupees and Hungarian forints are hedged using forward currency contracts. Amounts recycled to

profit and loss are presented within cost of sales or operating costs, in line with the underlying hedged item. Range of hedged FX rates: US dollar: 1.21 - 1.30 (FY23: 1.10 - 1.31),

euro: 1.12 - 1.17 (FY23: 1.11 - 1.18), Indian rupees: 106.05 - 120.97 (FY23: 106.05 - 120.97), Hungarian forint: 458.35 - 467.81 (FY23: 489.17 - 503.51).

dIncludes £(87)m liability (FY23: £57m asset) relating to energy contracts, these are hedged using contracts for difference and virtual power purchase agreements in order to provide

long-term power cost certainty. Amounts recycled to profit and loss are presented within operating costs. Range of strike price: 60 - 122 £/MWh (FY23: 60 - 125 £/MWh).

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Financial instruments and risk management continued

104


	Other comprehensive income
	Cash flow reservea	Fair valueb reserve	Cost of hedging reservec	Translation reserved	Merger and other reserves	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	(148)	(1)	236	381	858	1,326
Reclassificatione	472	—	(472)	—	—	—
Exchange differencesf	—	—	—	89	—	89
Net fair value gain (loss) on cash flow hedges	864	—	191	—	—	1,055
Movements in relation to cash flow hedges recognised in income and expense g	(721)	—	8	—	—	(713)
Fair value movement on assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	—	(3)	—	—	—	(3)
Tax recognised in other comprehensive income	(90)	—	—	—	—	(90)
At 31 March 2023	377	(4)	(37)	470	858	1,664
Exchange differencesf	—	—	—	(66)	—	(66)
Net fair value gain (loss) on cash flow hedges	(661)	—	19	—	—	(642)
Movements in relation to cash flow hedges recognised in income and expense g	349	—	7	—	—	356
Tax recognised in other comprehensive income	69	—	—	9	—	78
Transfer to realised profit	10	12	—	11	—	33
At 31 March 2024	144	8	(11)	424	858	1,423

aThe cash flow reserve is used to record the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments related to hedged transactions that have

not yet occurred. The transfer to realised profit includes a deferred tax adjustment.

bThe fair value reserve is used to record gains or losses on equity investments held at fair value through other comprehensive income. When these investments are disposed of any

remaining gains or losses in other comprehensive income are transferred to retained earnings.

cThe cost of hedging reserve reflects the gain or loss on the portion excluded from the designated hedging instrument that relates to the currency basis element of our cross-currency

swaps and forward points on certain foreign exchange contracts. It is initially recognised in other comprehensive income and accounted for similarly to gains or losses in the cash flow

reserve.

dThe translation reserve is used to record cumulative translation differences on the net assets of foreign operations. The cumulative translation differences are recycled to the income

statement on disposal of the foreign operation.

eReclassification on cash flow hedges in FY23 includes £472m reclassification from cash flow hedge reserve to cost of hedging reserve.

fExcludes £nil (FY23: £2m) of exchange differences in relation to retained earnings attributed to non-controlling interests.

gMovements in cash flow hedge-related reserves recognised in income and expense of £356m (FY23: £(713)m) include a net credit to other comprehensive income of £318m (FY23:

charge of £679m) which has been reclassified to operating costs, and a net credit of £38m (FY23: charge of £34m) which have been reclassified to finance expense (see note 25).

28. Directors’ emoluments and pensions

Martin Smith resigned as a director on 3 April 2023 and Roger Eyre was appointed on the same day. Neil Harris, Edward Heaton, Daniel

Rider and Simon Lowth served as directors throughout the year.

For the year ended 31 March 2024 the aggregate emoluments of the directors excluding deferred bonuses of £652,000 (FY23: £502,000)

were £2,648,000 (FY23: £2,804,000). Deferred bonuses are payable in 5p ordinary shares of BT Group plc in three years’ time subject to

continuous employment.

No retirement benefits were accruing to directors (FY23: none) under a money purchase scheme.

During the year two directors exercised options (FY23: none) under BT Group share option plans. Six directors who held office for the

whole or part of the year (FY23: five) received or are entitled to receive 5p ordinary shares of BT Group plc under BT long-term incentive

plans. The aggregate value of BT Group plc shares which vested to directors during the year under BT long-term incentive plans was

£1,988,000 (FY22: £418,000).

The emoluments of the highest paid director excluding his deferred bonus of £522,000 (FY23: £328,000) were £1,920,000 (FY23:

£1,502,000). He is entitled to receive 5,294,822 BT Group plc 5p ordinary shares under BT long-term incentive plans subject to

continuous employment.

Included in the above aggregate emoluments are those of Simon Lowth who is also a director of the ultimate holding company, BT Group

plc.

The emoluments of the directors are calculated in accordance with the statutory provisions applicable to the company.

29. Related party transactions

Key management personnel comprise Executive and Non-Executive Directors and members of the BT Group plc Executive Committee.

Compensation of key management personnel is disclosed in note 6.

Amounts paid to the group’s retirement benefit plans are set out in note 18.

Associates and joint ventures related parties include the Sports JV with Warner Bros formed during FY23 (see note 22).Sales of services to

the Sports JV during FY24 were £33m (FY23: £23m), and purchases from the Sports JV were £299m (FY23: £176m) excluding £211m

(FY23: £61m) additional payments made to settle the minimum guarantee liability (see note 17). The amount receivable from the Sports

JV as at 31 March 2024 was £3m (FY23: 10m) and the amount payable to the Sports JV was £94m (FY23: £123m).

As part of the BT Sport transaction, the group has committed to providing the Sports JV with a sterling Revolving Credit Facility (RCF), up

to a maximum for £300m, for short-term liquidity required by the Sports JV to fund its working capital and commitments to sports rights

holders. Amounts drawn down by the Sports JV under the RCF accrue interest at a market reference rate, consistent with the group’s

external short-term borrowings. The outstanding balance under the RCF of £163m (FY23: £268m) is treated as a loan receivable and held

at amortised cost, see note 16. The capacity of the RCF is expected to reduce to £200m during FY25. There is also a loan payable to the

Sports JV of £11m (FY23: £11m), see note 24.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

27. Other reserves

105

The Sports JV has a foreign exchange hedging arrangement with the group to secure Euros required to meet its commitments to certain

sports rights holders; the group has external forward contracts in place to purchase the Euros at an agreed sterling rate in order to

mitigate its exposure to exchange risk. The group holds a £29m (FY23: £14m) derivative liability in respect of forward contracts provided

to the Sports JV.

Transactions from commercial trading arrangements with associates and joint ventures, including the Sports JV, are shown below:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Sales of services to associates and joint ventures	37	29
Purchases from associates and joint ventures	338	216
Amounts receivable from associates and joint ventures	5	10
Amounts payable to associates and joint ventures	95	124

Other related party transactions include a dividend received from a joint venture of £12m (FY23: £nil) and in the prior year the purchase of

energy from an entity controlled by the BT Pension Scheme until FY24. FY23 total purchases were £13m and £1m was due to the other

party as at 31 March 2023.

British Telecommunications plc and certain of its subsidiaries act as a funder and deposit taker for cash related transactions for both its

parent and ultimate parent company. The loan arrangements described below with these companies reflect this. Cash transactions usually

arise where the parent and ultimate parent company are required to meet their external payment obligations or receive amounts from

third parties. These principally relate to the payment of dividends, the buyback of shares, the exercise of share options and the issuance of

ordinary shares. Transactions between the ultimate parent company, parent company and the group are settled on both a cash and non-

cash basis through these loan accounts depending on the nature of the transaction.

During FY24, a dividend of £850m (FY23: £850m) was settled with the parent company. The directors recommend payment of a final

dividend in respect of FY24 of £780m. See note 11 and the group statement of changes in equity.

As of 31 March 2024, there was only one balance between BT plc and the ultimate parent, which accrued interest at SONIA plus a margin

of 97.5bp, plus baseline CAS 45.4.

The loan facility between the parent company and British Telecommunications plc accrues interest at a rate of SONIA plus 142.9 bp with

an overall limit of £35bn. The parent company currently finances its obligations on this loan as they fall due through dividends paid by the

company.

A summary of the balances with the parent and ultimate parent companies and the finance income or expense arising in respect of these

balances is set out below:


		2024		2023
		Asset (liability) at 31 March	Finance income (expense)	Asset (liability) at 31 March	Finance income (expense)
	Notes	£m	£m	£m	£m
Amounts owed by (to) parent company
Non-current assets investments	21,25	11,208	692	10,613	385
Amounts owed by (to) ultimate parent company
Non-current assets investments	21,25	425	17	303	4
Non-current liabilities loans	24,25	—	—	—	(5)
Trade and other receivables	15	25	n/a	26	n/a
Trade and other payables	16	(36)	n/a	(11)	n/a

30. Financial commitments

Financial commitments as at 31 March 2024 include capital commitments of £1,049m (FY23: £1,480 m) and device purchase

commitments of £ 171m ( FY23: £217m).

TV programme rights commitments were transferred to the Sports JV formed with Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD) during FY23 (see note

20). Both the group and WBD have guaranteed the Sports JV’s obligations under certain programme rights commitments; the fair value

of these parent company guarantees is not material.

Other than as disclosed below and in note 17, there were no contingent liabilities or guarantees at 31 March 2024 other than those arising

in the ordinary course of the group’s business and on these no material losses are anticipated. We have insurance cover to certain limits for

major risks on property and major claims in connection with legal liabilities arising in the course of our operations. Otherwise, the group

generally carries its own risks.

Legal and regulatory proceedings

See note 17 for contingent liabilities associated with legal and regulatory proceedings.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

29. Related party transactions continued

106

We have re-presented certain FY23 comparatives to reflect changes to the methodology used to allocate certain shared costs, and the

creation of our Business CFU. See note 1 for more details.

The following disclosures are impacted by the creation of the Business unit only. Re-presentation of prior year comparatives is limited to

the combination of the balances previously reported in respect of the Enterprise and Global units, with no further adjustments:

– Note 5 Revenue: disaggregation of external revenue

– Note 7 Employees: number of employees

– Note 15 Trade and other receivables: trade receivables not past due and accrued income by CFU

Note 4 Segment information is also impacted by changes to the allocation of shared costs and therefore includes additional adjustments.

The tables below present a bridge between previously published financial information and re-presented comparatives for the affected

disclosures (segment revenue and profit; internal revenue and costs; and capital expenditure).

Note 4 Segment information: Segment revenue and profit


	Consumer	Enterprise	Global	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023: published	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Segment revenue	9,737	4,962	3,328	—	5,675	27	23,729
Internal revenue	(57)	(113)	—	—	(2,890)	—	(3,060)
Adjusteda revenue from external customers	9,680	4,849	3,328	—	2,785	27	20,669
Adjusted EBITDAb	2,623	1,394	458	—	3,449	6	7,930
Depreciation and amortisationa	(1,397)	(842)	(317)	—	(2,059)	(138)	(4,753)
Adjusteda operating profit (loss)	1,226	552	141	—	1,390	(132)	3,177

Year ended 31 March 2023: adjustments for creation of Business and change in cost allocation methodology
Segment revenue	—	(4,962)	(3,328)	8,258	—	—	(32)
Internal revenue	—	113	—	(81)	—	—	32
Adjusteda revenue from external customers	—	(4,849)	(3,328)	8,177	—	—	—
Adjusted EBITDAb	(154)	(1,394)	(458)	1,945	61	—	—
Depreciation and amortisationa	(206)	842	317	(1,047)	94	—	—
Adjusteda operating profit (loss)	(360)	(552)	(141)	898	155	—	—

Year ended 31 March 2023: re-presented
Segment revenue	9,737	—	—	8,258	5,675	27	23,697
Internal revenue	(57)	—	—	(81)	(2,890)	—	(3,028)
Adjusteda revenue from external customers	9,680	—	—	8,177	2,785	27	20,669
Adjusted EBITDAb	2,469	—	—	1,945	3,510	6	7,930
Depreciation and amortisationa	(1,603)	—	—	(1,047)	(1,965)	(138)	(4,753)
Adjusteda operating profit (loss)	866	—	—	898	1,545	(132)	3,177

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

31. Re-presentation of prior year comparatives

107

Note 4 Segment information: Internal revenue and costs


	Internal cost recorded by
	Consumer	Enterprise	Global	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023: published	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Internal revenue recorded by
Consumer	—	40	16	—	—	1	57
Enterprise	26	—	32	—	—	55	113
Global	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Business	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Openreach	1,805	888	184	—	—	13	2,890
Total	1,831	928	232	—	—	69	3,060

Year ended 31 March 2023: adjustments for creation of Business and change in cost allocation methodology
Consumer	—	(40)	(16)	56	—	—	—
Enterprise	(26)	—	(32)	—	—	(55)	(113)
Global	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Business	26	—	—	—	—	55	81
Openreach	—	(888)	(184)	1,072	—	—	—
Total	—	(928)	(232)	1,128	—	—	(32)

Year ended 31 March 2023: re-presented
Consumer	—	—	—	56	—	1	57
Enterprise	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Global	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Business	26	—	—	—	—	55	81
Openreach	1,805	—	—	1,072	—	13	2,890
Total	1,831	—	—	1,128	—	69	3,028

Note 4 Segment information: Capital expenditure


	Consumer	Enterprise	Global	Business	Openreach	Other	Total
Year ended 31 March 2023: published	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Intangible assets	530	257	81	—	87	63	1,018
Property, plant and equipment	663	351	171	—	2,709	144	4,038
Capital expenditure	1,193	608	252	—	2,796	207	5,056

Year ended 31 March 2023: adjustments for creation of Business and change in cost allocation methodology
Intangible assets	22	(257)	(81)	361	14	(59)	—
Property, plant and equipment	6	(351)	(171)	525	37	(46)	—
Capital expenditure	28	(608)	(252)	886	51	(105)	—

Year ended 31 March 2023: re-presented
Intangible assets	552	—	—	361	101	4	1,018
Property, plant and equipment	669	—	—	525	2,746	98	4,038
Capital expenditure	1,221	—	—	886	2,847	102	5,056

32. Post balance sheet events

On 3 April 2024, BT issued a EUR 750m hybrid bond due on 3 October 2054 under our European Medium Term Note programme with a

coupon of 5.125% until the first call date of 5.5 years.

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

31. Re-presentation of prior year comparatives continued

108


		2024	2023
At 31 March	Notes	£m	£m
Non-current assets
Intangible assets	4	1,962	2,407
Property, plant and equipment	5	20,247	19,242
Right-of-use assets	6	2,628	2,794
Derivative financial instruments	21	1,141	1,492
Investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures	7	16,132	16,246
Other investments	8	12,152	11,509
Trade and other receivables	9	302	290
Preference shares in joint venture	7	451	542
Contract assets		27	27
Retirement benefit surplus	18	11	15
Deferred tax assets		969	611
		56,022	55,175
Current assets
Inventories		212	195
Trade and other receivables	9	2,185	2,466
Preference shares in joint venture	7	82	13
Contract assets		161	188
Assets classified as held for sale	22	—	4
Current tax receivables		839	642
Derivative financial instruments	21	51	82
Other investments	8	3,682	4,733
Cash and cash equivalentsa		190	200
		7,402	8,523
Current liabilities
Loans and other borrowings	10	17,457	17,367
Derivative financial instruments	21	94	86
Trade and other payables	11	4,517	4,645
Contract liabilities		535	521
Liabilities classified as held for sale	22	—	—
Lease liabilities	6	506	508
Provisions	13	167	147
		23,276	23,274
Total assets less current liabilities		40,148	40,424
Non-current liabilities
Loans and other borrowings	10	17,085	16,722
Derivative financial instruments	21	445	297
Contract liabilities		100	129
Lease liabilities	6	3,366	3,587
Retirement benefit obligations	18	3,479	1,639
Other payables	12	1,418	1,646
Deferred taxation	14	705	810
Provisions	13	226	209
		26,824	25,039
Equity
Ordinary shares		2,172	2,172
Share premium		8,000	8,000
Other reserves	15	891	1,099
Retained earningsb		2,261	4,114
Equity shareholder’s funds		13,324	15,385
		40,148	40,424

aIncludes cash of £190m (FY23: £200m) and cash equivalents of £nil (FY23: £nil).

bAs permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, no income statement of the company is presented. The company’s profit for the financial year including dividends

received from subsidiary undertakings was £ 761m (FY23: £1,159m) before dividends paid of £850m (FY23: £850m).

The financial statements of the company on pages 109 to 138 were approved by the Board of Directors on 26 July 2024 and were signed

on its behalf by:

Simon Lowth

Director

British Telecommunications plc company balance sheet

Registered number 01800000

109


		Share capitala	Share premium accountb	Other reservesc	Retained earnings (loss)	Total equity
	Notes	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022		2,172	8,000	844	5,964	16,980
Profit for the yeard		—	—	—	1,159	1,159
Actuarial loss	18	—	—	—	(2,953)	(2,953)
Tax on actuarial loss		—	—	—	743	743
Share-based payments		—	—	—	59	59
Tax on share-based payments		—	—	—	(8)	(8)
Tax on items taken directly to equity	15	—	—	(89)	—	(89)
Net fair value gain on cash flow hedges	15	—	—	1,052	—	1,052
Dividendsd		—	—	—	(850)	(850)
Transferred to the income statement	15	—	—	(708)	—	(708)
At 31 March 2023		2,172	8,000	1,099	4,114	15,385
Profit for the yeard		—	—	—	761	761
Actuarial loss	18	—	—	—	(2,401)	(2,401)
Tax on actuarial loss		—	—	—	599	599
Share-based payments		—	—	—	51	51
Tax on share-based payments		—	—	—	(12)	(12)
Tax on items taken directly to equity	15	—	—	69	—	69
Net fair value loss on cash flow hedges	15	—	—	(641)	—	(641)
Dividendsd		—	—	—	(850)	(850)
Transferred to the income statement	15	—	—	358	—	358
Transfer to realised profit		—	—	6	(6)	—
Other movements		—	—	—	5	5
At 31 March 2024		2,172	8,000	891	2,261	13,324

aThe allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary share capital of the company at 31 March 2024 and 31 March 2023 was £2,172m representing 8,689,755,905 ordinary shares of 25p

each.

bThe share premium account, representing the premium on allotment of shares, is not available for distribution.

cA breakdown of other reserves is provided in note 15.

dAs permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, no income statement of the company is presented. The company’s profit for the financial year including dividends

received from subsidiary undertakings was £761 m (FY23 : £1,159m) before dividends paid of £850m (FY23 : £850m).

BT plc company statement of changes in equity

110

1. Basis of preparation

Preparation of the financial statements

The term ‘company’ refers to British Telecommunications plc (BT

plc). The consolidated group financial statements of BT plc have

been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international

accounting standards and with the requirements of the Companies

Act 2006. The company meets the definition of a qualifying entity

under FRS 101. Accordingly, these company financial statements

have been prepared in accordance with FRS 101 “Reduced

disclosure framework”. FRS 101 involves the application of

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) with a reduced

level of disclosure.

The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis

and on the historical cost basis, except for certain financial and

equity instruments that have been measured at fair value. Refer to

note 1 of the notes to the consolidated accounts for further

information. The financial statements are presented in sterling, the

functional currency of the company.

New and amended accounting standards effective during

the year

The following amended standards were effective during the year:

IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts

BT adopted IFRS 17 with retrospective application on 1 April 2023.

The standard establishes principles for the recognition,

measurement, presentation and disclosure of insurance contracts.

The measurement method for insurance contracts required by

IFRS 17 is a probability weighted discounted cash flow model,

including a best estimate and an adjustment for non-financial risk

calculated for groups of similar contracts.

IFRS 17 primarily impacts insurance entities, however, as it applies

to individual contracts it is possible that non-insurers could issue

contracts that are in scope of the standard such as product

breakdown contracts or warranties.

We have assessed the impact of the standard , and concluded that

its impact is not material. Contracts in scope of the standard

entered into by the company are restricted to intragroup insurance

arrangements; the company does not issue external insurance

contracts.

Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1

and IFRS Practice Statement 2)

These amendments require the disclosure of ‘material’ rather than

‘significant’ accounting policies. The amendments have not

resulted in any changes to accounting policies disclosures made in

these financial statements.

Other

The following changes have not had a significant impact on these

financial statements:

– Definition of Accounting Estimate (Amendments to IAS 8)

– Deferred Tax related to Assets and Liabilities arising from a

Single Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12)

IFRS Interpretations Committee agenda decisions

The IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) periodically issues

agenda decisions which explain and clarify how to apply the

principles and requirements of IFRS. Agenda decisions are

authoritative and may require the company to revise accounting

policies or practice to align with the interpretations set out in the

decision.

We regularly review IFRIC updates and assess the impact of

agenda decisions. No agenda decisions finalised during FY24 have

been assessed as having a significant impact on the company.

Exemptions

As permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, the

company's income statement has not been presented.

The company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101

in respect of the following disclosures:

– The requirements of paragraphs 45(b) and 46 to 52 of IFRS 2

‘Share-based Payments’ in relation to group-settled share-

based payments.

– The requirements of IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’.

– The requirements of paragraphs 91 to 99 of IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value

Measurement’.

– The requirements of the second sentence of paragraph 110 and

from paragraphs 113a,114,115,118,119(a) to (c),120 to 127

and 129 of IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’.

– The second sentence of paragraph 89, and paragraphs 90, 91

and 93 of IFRS 16 'Leases'.

– The requirement in paragraph 38 of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of

Financial Statements’ to present comparative information in

respect of: (i) paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of

Financial Statements’; (ii) paragraph 73(e) of IAS 16 ‘Property,

Plant and Equipment’; and (iii) paragraph 118(e) of IAS 38

‘Intangible Assets’.

– The following paragraphs of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial

Statements’:

◦ 10(d) (statement of cash flows);

◦ 10(f) (third statement of financial position);

◦ 16 (statement of compliance with all IFRS);

◦ 38A (requirement for minimum of two primary

statements including cash flow statements);

◦ 38B-D (additional comparative information);

◦ 40A-D (third statement of financial position);

◦ 111 (cash flow statement information); and

◦ 134 to 136 (capital management disclosures).

– The requirements of IAS 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’.

– The requirements of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related Party

Disclosures’.

– The requirements of paragraphs 30 and 31 of IAS 8 Accounting

Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and errors.

– The requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ to

disclose related party transactions entered into between two

or more members of a group, provided that any subsidiary

which is a party to the transaction is wholly owned by such a

member.

– The requirements of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related Party

Disclosures’.The requirements of paragraph 17 of IAS 24

‘Related Party Disclosures’.

– The requirements of paragraphs 130(f)(ii), 130(f)(iii), 134(d)

to 134(f) and 135(c) to 135(e) of IAS 36 Impairment of

Assets’.

The company intends to continue to take advantage of these

exemptions in future years.

Where required, equivalent disclosures have been given in the

consolidated group financial statements of BT plc.

The financial statements have been prepared on a consistent basis

with the prior year.

2. Critical & key accounting estimates and

significant judgements

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS

requires the use of accounting estimates and assumptions. It also

requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of

applying our accounting policies. We continually evaluate our

estimates, assumptions and judgements based on available

information and experience. As the use of estimates is inherent in

financial reporting, actual results could differ from these estimates.

Our critical accounting estimates are those estimates that carry a

significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying

amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. We

also make other key estimates when preparing the financial

statements, which, while not meeting the definition of a critical

estimate, involve a higher degree of complexity and can

reasonably be expected to be of relevance to a user of the financial

Notes to the company financial statements

British Telecommunications plc company accounting policies

111

statements. Management has discussed its critical and other key

accounting estimates and associated disclosures with the Audit

and Risk Committee of BT Group plc.

Significant judgements are those made by management in

applying our accounting policies that have a material impact on

the amounts presented in the financial statements. We may

exercise significant judgement in our critical and key accounting

estimates.

Our critical and key accounting estimates and significant

judgements are described in the following notes to the financial

statements.


Note	Critical estimate	Key estimate	Significant judgement
4. Goodwill impairment	ü		ü
5. Determining the point of sale of BT Tower			ü
6. Reasonable certainty and determination of lease terms			ü
7. Valuation of investment in A preference shares in Sports joint venture		ü
8. Other investments			ü
11. Estimate of customer refund liability		ü
13. Identifying contingent liabilities			ü
13. Provisions		ü	ü
14. Current and deferred income tax		ü	ü
18. Valuation of pension assets and liabilities	ü		ü

3. Material accounting policies that apply to the

overall financial statements

The material accounting policies applied in preparation of our

financial statements are set out below. Other material accounting

policies applicable to a particular area are disclosed in the relevant

note. We have applied all policies consistently to all the years

presented, unless otherwise stated.

Inventories

Network maintenance equipment and equipment to be sold to

customers are stated at the lower of cost or net realisable value,

taking into account expected revenue from the sale of packages

comprising a mobile handset and a subscription. Cost corresponds

to purchase or production cost determined by either the first in

first out (FIFO) or average cost method.

Government grants

Government grants are recognised when there is reasonable

assurance that the conditions associated with the grants have been

complied with and the grants will be received.

Grants for the purchase or production of property, plant and

equipment are recognised as deferred income and amortised over

the life of the related asset. Grants for the reimbursement of

operating expenditure are deducted from the related category of

costs in the income statement. Estimates and judgements applied

in accounting for government grants received in respect of BDUK

and other rural superfast broadband contracts are described in

note 5. Once a government grant is recognised, any related

deferred income is treated in accordance with IAS 20 ‘Accounting

for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance’.

Foreign currencies

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional

currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the

transaction. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the

settlement of transactions and the translation of monetary assets

and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at period end

exchange rates are recognised in the income statement line which

most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction.

Research and development

Research expenditure is recognised in the income statement in the

period in which it is incurred. Development expenditure, including

the cost of internally developed software, is recognised in the

income statement in the period in which it is incurred unless it is

probable that economic benefits will flow to the company from the

asset being developed, the cost of the asset can be reliably

measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which

case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet.

Capitalisation ceases when the asset being developed is ready for

use. Research and development costs include direct and indirect

labour, materials and directly attributable overheads.

Share-based payments

The ultimate parent of BT plc, BT Group plc, operates a number of

equity settled share-based arrangements, as detailed in note 19 to

the BT plc consolidated financial statements, under which the

company receives services from employees as consideration for

equity instruments (share options and shares) of BT Group plc. In

the company’s separate financial statements these are also

accounted for as equity settled.

Equity settled share-based payments are measured at fair value at

the date of grant. Market-based performance criteria and non-

vesting conditions (for example, the requirement for employees to

make contributions to the share purchase programme) are

reflected in this measurement of fair value. The fair value

determined at the grant date is recognised as an expense on a

straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the company’s

estimate of the options or shares that will eventually vest and

adjusted for the effect of non market-based vesting conditions.

Fair value is measured using either the Binomial options pricing

model or Monte Carlo simulations, whichever is more appropriate

to the share-based payment arrangement.

Service and performance conditions are vesting conditions. Any

other conditions are non-vesting conditions which are taken into

account to determine the fair value of equity instruments granted.

In the case that an award or option does not vest as a result of a

failure to meet a non-vesting condition that is within the control of

either counterparty, this is accounted for as a cancellation.

Cancellations are treated as accelerated vesting and all remaining

future charges are immediately recognised in the income

statement. As the requirement to save under an employee

saveshare arrangement is a non-vesting condition, employee

cancellations, other than through a termination of service, are

treated as an accelerated vesting. No adjustment is made to total

equity for awards that lapse or are forfeited after the vesting date.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and current

balances with banks and similar institutions, which are readily

convertible to cash and are subject to insignificant risk of changes

in value and have an original maturity of three months or less. Bank

overdrafts are included within loans and other borrowings, in

current liabilities on the balance sheet.

Dividends

Dividend distributions are recognised as a liability in the year in

which the dividends are approved by the Board. Interim dividends

are therefore recognised when they are paid; final dividends when

authorised by the Board.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

2. Critical & key accounting estimates and significant judgements continued

112


Material accounting policies that apply to intangible assets We recognise identifiable intangible assets where we control the asset, it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the asset will flow to the company, and we can reliably measure the cost of the asset. We amortise all intangible assets, other than goodwill, over their useful economic life. The method of amortisation reflects the pattern in which the assets are expected to be consumed. If the pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight-line method is used. Goodwill Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the company’s share of the identifiable net assets (including intangible assets) of the acquired business. Goodwill recognised in a business combination does not generate cash flows independently of other assets or groups of assets. As a result, the recoverable amount is determined at a cash generating unit (CGU) level. These CGUs represent the smallest identifiable groups of assets that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other groups of assets. Our CGUs are deemed to be Consumer and Business. We allocate goodwill to each of the CGUs that we expect to benefit from the business combination. Each CGU to which goodwill is allocated represents the lowest level within the group at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. When assessing recoverable amount using a fair value less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) approach we primarily use an income-based approach but also consider valuations under a multiples-based approach. The recoverable amount of each CGU under both value in use and income-based FVLCOD approaches is determined using risk-adjusted cash flow projections derived from financial plans approved by the BT Group plc Board covering a five-year period. They reflect management’s expectations of revenue, EBITDA growth, capital expenditure, working capital and operating cash flows, based on past experience and future expectations of business performance. Cash flows beyond the fifth year have been extrapolated using perpetuity growth rates. Goodwill in the company's separate financial statements relates to the excess of cost over the value of the company's share of the identifiable net assets acquired where the company has purchased a business. Below we discuss the critical accounting estimates and assumptions made for BT plc's impairment assessment. Computer software Computer software comprises computer software licences purchased from third parties, and also the cost of internally developed software. Computer software licences purchased from third parties are initially recorded at cost. We only capitalise costs directly associated with the production of internally developed software, including direct and indirect labour costs of development, where it is probable that the software will generate future economic benefits, the cost of the asset can be reliably measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet. Costs which do not meet these criteria and research costs are expensed as incurred. Our development costs which give rise to internally developed software include upgrading the network architecture or functionality and developing service platforms aimed at offering new services to our customers. Other Other intangible assets include customer relationships or brands acquired through business combinations, which are recorded at fair value at date of acquisition and subsequently carried at amortised cost, and website development costs and other licences which are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic life or the term of the contract.
Estimated useful economic lives The estimated useful economic lives assigned to the principal categories of intangible assets are as follows:
– Computer software	2 to 10 years
– Telecommunications licences	2 to 20 years
– Customer relationships and brands	1 to 15 years
Impairment of intangible assets Intangible assets with finite useful lives are tested for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, the recoverable amount is assessed by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant cash generating unit and the fair value less costs to dispose. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment at least annually as described below. Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement, as a specific item. If a cash generating unit is impaired, impairment losses are allocated firstly against goodwill, and secondly on a pro-rata basis against intangible and other assets.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

4. Intangible assets

113

Significant judgements and critical accounting estimates made in reviewing goodwill for

impairment

Determining our CGUs

The determination of our CGUs is judgemental. The identification of CGUs involves an assessment of whether the asset or group of assets

generate largely independent cash inflows. This involves consideration of how our core assets are operated and whether these generate

independent revenue streams.

In FY23 our CGUs were aligned with the Consumer, Enterprise and Global customer-facing units in existence at the time. From 1 April 2023

the Enterprise and Global units are managed and reported as a single combined unit, Business. During FY24 we have reviewed the

identification of our CGUs in light of the creation of Business. We concluded that the Enterprise and Global CGUs have been replaced with a

single Business CGU. In reaching this conclusion we considered the way in which the combined unit is monitored and the degree of

integration within the combined unit, specifically in relation to revenue streams and its asset base. This conclusion also reflects the fact that

the cash flows of the legacy Enterprise and Global units are no longer independent, and it is no longer possible to report the performance of

these units on an individual basis.

Accordingly, our CGUs are Consumer and Business from 1 April 2023.

Estimating recoverable amount

The recoverable amount is the higher of value in use and fair value less cost of disposal (FVLCOD).

We have determined that an income-based FVLCOD measure determined using discounted cash flows generates the higher recoverable

amount for CGUs within the BT plc company. This results from the impact of the cost transformation programme upon the cash flows

generated by the company, in particular the Business CGU. An income-based FVLCOD measure assumes that a third-party acquirer will

undertake a similar plan to generate the cash flows envisaged by BT in its forecasts, which is reliant on the successful implementation of the

cost transformation programme.

Our FVLCOD calculations require estimates in relation to uncertain items, including management’s expectations of future revenue growth,

operating costs, profit margins, operating cash flows, discount rate, and costs of disposal.

Future cash flows used in these calculations are on a nominal basis and based on risk-adjusted projections derived from the latest Board-

approved five-year financial plans, representing management's best risk-adjusted estimate of future growth. This includes the impact of

cost transformation (restructuring) programmes, direct and indirect impacts of inflation and associated mitigations. Expectations about

future growth reflect the expectations of growth in the markets to which the CGU relates and consideration of the overall variability relating

to individual assumptions at the unit level.

Financial plans are made on a consolidated customer-facing unit basis and adjustments are applied to arrive at a company-level CGU

forecast, this includes making assumptions about the allocations of relevant cash flows between British Telecommunications plc and other

entities within the CGU.

The future cash flows are discounted using a pre-tax nominal discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of

money. The discount rate used in each CGU is adjusted for the risk specific to the asset, including the countries in which cash flow will be

generated, for which the future cash flow estimates have not been adjusted.

Estimating terminal growth

A long-term growth rate into perpetuity is applied immediately at the end of the five-year forecast period. We calculate this for each CGU

as the lower of the nominal GDP growth rate forecasts and the long-term compound annual growth rate as estimated by management.

Long-term compound annual growth rates may be lower than forecast nominal GDP growth rates due to market-specific factors including

inflation expectations, the regulatory environment and competition intensity.

The company is required to test goodwill acquired in a business combination annually for impairment. This was carried out as at 31 March

2024. The carrying value of goodwill and the key assumptions used in performing the annual impairment assessment are disclosed below.


	Softwarea	Goodwill	Other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cost
At 1 April 2023	5,573	530	23	6,126
Additionsb	705	94	—	799
Disposals and adjustmentsc	(351)	—	(8)	(359)
Transfersd	119	—	—	119
At 31 March 2024	6,046	624	15	6,685
Accumulated amortisation
At 1 April 2023	3,706	—	13	3,719
Charge for the year	673	—	—	673
Impairment	—	624	—	624
Disposals and adjustmentsc	(334)	—	(8)	(342)
Transfersd	49	—	—	49
At 31 March 2024	4,094	624	5	4,723

Carrying amount
At 31 March 2023	1,867	530	10	2,407
At 31 March 2024	1,952	—	10	1,962

aIncludes a carrying amount of £283m (FY23: £674m) in respect of assets in course of construction, which are not yet amortised.

b Refer note 7 for more information on goodwill additions during FY24.

cFully depreciated assets in the company’s fixed asset registers were reviewed during the year, as part of the BT Group plc annual asset verification exercise, and certain assets that

were no longer in use have been written off, reducing cost and accumulated depreciation by £197m (FY23: £800m ).

d During FY24, assets with cost of £119m and accumulated depreciation of £49m were reclassified from property, plant and equipment to intangible assets following review of asset

registers.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

4. Intangible assets continued

114

Outcome of our annual impairment review

The full balance of goodwill recognised at 31 March 2024, £624m, is attributable to the Business CGU.

Our FY24 impairment testing exercise concluded that this balance is fully impaired. The impairment recognised reflects an excess of the

carrying value of the Business CGU over its recoverable amount, under both value in use and FVLCOD-based valuation approaches. An

income-based FVLCOD approach results in a higher recoverable amount.

No impairment was recognised in FY23 by reference to a value in use-based valuation approach. In FY24 we have identified that historical

trends including the transition from legacy products indicate risk within forecasts which we have made appropriate adjustment for in line

with IAS 36, so as to arrive at a risk adjusted estimate of future economic conditions which reflects long-term viability and trading risks

inherent in delivering against the company and wider group’s strategic pillars. At the same time, to acknowledge this risk we have reduced

terminal growth rate applied to cash flows when calculating the terminal value. The combined impact of these adjustments has led to a

recoverable amount for IAS 36 impairment testing purposes that is indicative of an impairment.

Calculating the recoverable amount has involved the application of assumptions and estimates that have had a material impact on the

impairment charge recognised. Management judge that the forecasts used to calculate recoverable amount support the carrying amount

of all other assets allocated to the Business CGU at 31 March 2024; along with it and the company’s future trading prospects.

What discount rate have we used?

The pre-tax discount rates applied to the cash flow forecasts are derived from our post-tax weighted average cost of capital. The

assumptions used in the calculation of the group’s weighted average cost of capital are benchmarked to externally available data. The

pre-tax discount rate used in performing the value in use calculation for Business was 9.25% (FY23: 9.4%).

What growth rates have we used?

The perpetuity growth rates are determined based on the forecast market growth rates of the regions in which the CGU operates and

reflect an assessment of the long-term growth prospects of that market. The growth rates have been benchmarked against external data

for the relevant markets and analysts’ expectations. None of the growth rates applied exceed the expected average long-term growth

rates for those markets or sectors. We have used a perpetuity growth rate of 0.7% for the Business CGU (FY23: 2.0% for Enterprise and

2.4% for Global, the CGUs prior to the formation of Business.

Key assumptions applied to testing goodwill allocated to the Business CGU

Key assumptions that recoverable amount (FVLCOD) is most sensitive to are the long term growth rate for the terminal period; the

realisation of restructuring benefits impacting the terminal period EBITDA; the weighted average cost of capital used to discount cash

flows; and costs of disposal.

– Application of the terminal growth rate of 0.7%, equivalent to compound annual growth within the terminal period, is viewed as a key

assumption with c.73% of the recoverable amount derived from terminal cash flows.

– 77% of the gross recoverable amount derives from the realisation of benefits from restructuring activity which is not yet committed,

most of which sit in the terminal period. The realisation of restructuring benefits impacting the terminal period EBITDA therefore

represents a key assumption.

– Recoverable amount is sensitive to the weighted average cost of capital used to discount future cash flows.

– Disposal of the Business CGU would incur significant costs to separate the unit from the remaining business. There are no readily

comparable transactions and as such it has been necessary to form an estimate which is sensitive to change. We have estimated costs

equivalent to 13% of CGU revenue, this reflects the high end of available external guidance due to the complexity inherent in separating

the Business CGU within the BT plc company from the Business CGU within the wider BT plc group.

We performed sensitivity testing over the £624m impairment charge recognised by reference to reasonably possible changes in these

assumptions. As the full balance of goodwill recognised by the Business CGU is impaired, sensitivity testing focussed on scenarios that

would result in a lower impairment charge.


	Outcome
Long term growth rate + 0.7%	£164m less impairment
Realisation of restructuring benefits impacting terminal period EBITDA + 20%	£298m less impairment
Weighted average cost of capital -1%	£294m less impairment
Disposal costs - 20%	£152m less impairment

We also considered the combined impact of all scenarios together which is considered a reasonably plausible outcome. This would result

in no impairment charge and headroom of £318m.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

4. Intangible assets continued

115


Material accounting policies that apply to property, plant and equipment Our property, plant and equipment is included at historical cost, net of accumulated depreciation and any impairment charges. Property, plant and equipment acquired through business combinations is initially recorded at fair value and subsequently accounted for on the same basis as our existing assets. We derecognise items of property, plant and equipment on disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. The difference between the sale proceeds and the net book value at the date of disposal is recognised in operating costs in the income statement. Included within the cost of network infrastructure and equipment are direct and indirect labour costs, materials and directly attributable overheads. We depreciate property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis from the time the asset is available for use, to write off the asset’s cost over the estimated useful life taking into account any expected residual value. Freehold land is not depreciated. Estimated useful economic lives The estimated useful lives assigned to principal categories of assets are as follows:
Land and buildings
– Freehold buildings	14 to 50 years
– Short-term leasehold improvements	Shorter of 10 years or lease term
– Leasehold land and buildings	Shorter of unexpired portion of lease or 40 years
Network infrastructure
Transmission equipment
– Duct	40 years
– Cable	3 to 25 years
– Fibre	5 to 20 years
Exchange equipment	2 to 13 years
Other network equipment	2 to 20 years
Other assets
– Motor vehicles	2 to 10 years
– Computers and office equipment	3 to 7 years
Residual values and useful lives are reassessed annually and, if necessary, changes are recognised prospectively. Impairment of property, plant and equipment We test property, plant and equipment for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, we assess the recoverable amount by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant asset and the fair value less costs to dispose. If it is not possible to determine the recoverable amount for the individual asset then we assess impairment by reference to the relevant cash generating unit as described in note 4. Building Digital UK (BDUK) government grants We receive government grants in relation to BDUK and other rural superfast broadband contracts. Where we have achieved certain service levels, or delivered the network more efficiently than anticipated, we have an obligation to either re-invest or repay grant funding. Where this is the case, we recognise deferred income in respect of the funding that will be re-invested or repaid, and make a corresponding adjustment to the carrying amount of the related property, plant and equipment. Assessing the timing of whether and when we change the estimated take-up assumption is judgemental as it involves considering information which is not always observable. Our consideration on whether and when to change the base case assumption is dependent on our expectation of the long-term take-up trend. Our assessment of how much grant income to defer includes consideration of the difference between the take-up percentage agreed with the local authority and the likelihood of actual take-up. The value of the government grants deferred is disclosed in notes 11 and 12.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

5. Property, plant and equipment

116


	Land and buildings	Network infrastructurea		Otherb	Assets under construction	Total
	Land and buildings	Held by Openreach	Held by other units	Otherb	Assets under construction	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cost
At 31 March 2023	692	33,775	17,507	1,340	1,122	54,436
Additions	—	1	177	—	3,216	3,394
Transfersc	82	2,562	302	235	(3,300)	(119)
Disposals and adjustmentsd	(57)	(208)	(1,701)	(116)	121	(1,961)
At 31 March 2024	717	36,130	16,285	1,459	1,159	55,750
Depreciation
At 31 March 2023	355	18,998	14,989	942	—	35,284
Charge for the year	40	1,489	461	229	—	2,219
Impairments	—	78	—	—	30	108
Transfersc	—	—	(49)	—	—	(49)
Disposals and adjustmentsd	7	(134)	(1,728)	(115)	—	(1,970)
At 31 March 2024	402	20,431	13,673	1,056	30	35,592

Carrying amount
At 31 March 2023	337	14,777	2,518	398	1,122	19,152
Engineering stores	—	—	—	—	90	90
At 31 March 2023	337	14,777	2,518	398	1,212	19,242
At 31 March 2024	315	15,699	2,612	403	1,129	20,158
Engineering stores	—	—	—	—	89	89
At 31 March 2024	315	15,699	2,612	403	1,218	20,247

aWithin network infrastructure are assets with net book value of £11.0bn (FY23: £10.3bn) which have useful economic lives of more than 18 years.

bOther mainly comprises motor vehicles, computers and fixtures and fittings.

cDuring FY24, assets with cost of £119m and accumulated depreciation of £49m were reclassified from property, plant and equipment to intangible assets following review of asset

registers

dDisposals and adjustments include the removal of assets from the company's fixed asset registers following disposals and the identification of fully depreciated assets including

through operation of the group’s annual asset verification exercise.

Included within the above disclosure are assets which are used in arrangements which meet the definition of operating leases under IFRS

16:

– £15,699m (FY23: £14,777m) of the carrying amount of the network infrastructure asset class represents Openreach's network

infrastructure. The majority of the associated assets are used to deliver fixed-line telecommunications services that have been

assessed as containing operating leases, to both internal and external communications providers. Network infrastructure held by

Openreach is presented separately in the table above; however it is not practicable to separate out infrastructure not used in

operating lease arrangements.

– Other assets include devices with a carrying amount of £160m (FY23: £163m) that are made available to retail customers under

arrangements that contain operating leases. These are not presented separately in the table above as they are not material

relative to the group's overall asset base.

The net book value of land and buildings comprised:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Freehold	38	41
Leasehold	277	296
Total net book value of land and buildings	315	337

BT Tower

In FY24 we agreed to the sale of the BT Tower for headline consideration of £275m, as part of the simplification of the group’s property

portfolio.

The carrying amount of the BT Tower asset is £4m at 31 March 2024. It is not considered to meet the IFRS 5 criteria for classification as

held for sale at the reporting date, reflecting the extent of decommissioning work needed to provide vacant possession of the site.

The useful economic lives of assets associated with the BT Tower have been reassessed in light of the anticipated disposal in FY30.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

5. Property, plant and equipment continued

117



	Significant judgements made in accounting for the BT Tower sale Exchange of contracts in respect of the BT Tower sale with MCR Hotels occurred during FY24, with transfer of legal title anticipated to take place in a three year window between 2028 and 2031 subject to achieving vacant possession of the site. We will continue to enjoy exclusive rights to occupy and access the site prior to completion. The delay between exchange and completion reflects the extensive work required to decommission the site. We have exercised significant judgement in concluding that control over BT Tower passes to the buyer at the point of completion rather than exchange. In doing so we performed a detailed assessment of the restrictions placed on BT’s use of the asset in the period following exchange, as well as the transaction pricing structure, and concluded that they were insufficient to represent a transfer to the buyer of sufficiently all the risks and rewards associated with ownership. We placed particular weight on the fact that legal title to the site does not transfer to the buyer until the point of completion. Had we concluded that control had passed on exchange of contracts in FY24, the transaction would have been treated as a sale and leaseback with profit on disposal recognised in the period and associated derecognition of the BT Tower asset and accounting for the leaseback.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

5. Property, plant and equipment continued

118

Material accounting policies that apply to leases

Identifying whether a lease exists

At inception of a contract, we determine whether the contract is, or contains, a lease. A lease exists if the contract conveys the right to

control the use of an identified asset, for a period of time, in exchange for consideration. In making this assessment, we consider whether:

– The contract involves the use of an identified asset, either explicitly or implicitly. The asset must be physically distinct or represent

substantially all the capacity of a physically distinct asset. Assets that a supplier has a substantive right to substitute are not considered

distinct.

– The lessee (either the company, or the company’s customers) has the right to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from the

use of the asset throughout the period of use; and

– The lessee has the right to direct the use of the asset, in other words, has the decision-making rights that are most relevant to changing

how and for what purpose the asset is used.

Where practicable, and by class of underlying asset, we have elected to account for leases containing a lease component and one or more

non-lease components as a single lease component. Where this election has been taken, it has been applied to the entire asset.

Lessee accounting

We recognise a lease liability and right-of-use asset at the commencement of the lease. Lease liabilities are initially measured at the present

value of lease payments that are due over the lease term, discounted using the group’s incremental borrowing rate.

The lease term is the non-cancellable period of the lease adjusted for the impact of any extension options that we are reasonably certain

that the lessee will exercise, or termination options that we are reasonably certain that the lessee will not exercise.

The incremental borrowing rate is the rate that we would have to pay for a loan of a similar term, and with similar security, to obtain an asset

of similar value.

Lease payments include:

– fixed payments

– variable lease payments that depend on an index or rate

– amounts expected to be paid under residual value guarantees

– the exercise price of any purchase options that we are reasonably certain to exercise

– payments due over optional renewal periods where we are reasonably certain to renew

– penalties for early termination of the lease where we are reasonably certain to terminate early

Lease liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. They are remeasured if there is a change

in future lease payments, including changes in the index or rate used to determine those payments, or the amount we expect to be payable

under a residual value guarantee.

We also remeasure lease liabilities where the lease term changes. This occurs when the non-cancellable period of the lease changes, or on

occurrence of a significant event or change in circumstances within the control of the lessee and which changes our initial assessment in

regard to whether the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise extension options or not to exercise termination options. Where the lease term

changes we remeasure the lease liability using the group’s incremental borrowing rate at the date of reassessment. Where a significant

event or change in circumstances does not occur, the lease term remains unchanged and the carrying amounts of the lease liability and

associated right-of-use asset will decline over time.

Right-of-use assets are initially measured at the initial amount of the corresponding lease liabilities, adjusted for any prepaid lease

payments, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of any decommissioning costs that have been recognised as provisions, less

any lease incentives received. They are subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method to the earlier of the end of the useful life of

the asset or the end of the lease term. Right-of-use assets are tested for impairment following the policy set out in note 5 and are adjusted

for any remeasurement of lease liabilities.

We have elected not to recognise lease liabilities and right-of-use assets for short-term leases that have a lease term of 12 months or less,

and leases of low-value assets with a purchase price under £5,000. We recognise payments for these items as an expense on a straight-line

basis over the lease term.

Any variable lease payments that do not depend on an index or rate, such as usage-based payments, are recognised as an expense in the

period to which the variability relates.

Lessor accounting

At inception of a contract, we determine whether the contract is, or contains, a lease. Arrangements meeting the definition of a lease in

which we act as lessor are classified as operating or finance leases at lease inception based on an overall assessment of whether the lease

transfers substantially all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the underlying asset. If this is the case then the lease is a finance

lease; if not, it is an operating lease. For sub-leases, we make this assessment by reference to the characteristics of the right-of-use asset

associated with the head lease rather than the underlying leased asset.

We recognise operating lease payments as income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any up front payments received, such as

connection fees, are deferred over the lease term. Where the contract contains both lease and non-lease components, the transaction price

is allocated between the components on the basis of relative standalone selling price.

Where an arrangement is assessed as a finance lease we derecognise the underlying asset and recognise a receivable equivalent to the net

investment in the lease. The receivable is measured based on future payments to be received discounted using the interest rate implicit in

the lease, adjustment for any direct costs.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

6. Leases

119

Significant judgements made in accounting for leases

The lease term is a key determinant of the size of the lease liability and right-of-use asset recognised where the company acts as lessee;

and the deferral period for any upfront connection charges where the company acts as lessor. Determining the lease term requires

judgement to evaluate whether we are reasonably certain the lessee will exercise extension options or will not exercise termination

options. Key facts and circumstances that create an incentive to exercise those options are considered; these include:

– Our anticipated operational, retail and office property requirements in the mid and long term.

– The availability of suitable alternative sites.

– Costs or penalties associated with exiting lease arrangements relative to the benefits to be gained, including costs of removing

leasehold improvements or relocating, and indirect costs such as disruption to business.

– Significant investments in leased sites, in particular those with useful lives beyond the lease term.

– Costs associated with extending lease arrangements including rent increases during secondary lease periods.

Our definition of ‘reasonable certainty’, and therefore the lease term, will often align with the judgements made in our medium-term plan,

in particular for leases of non-specialised property and equipment on rolling (or ‘evergreen’) arrangements that continue until terminated

and which can be exited without significant penalty.

Following initial determination of the lease term, we exercise judgement in evaluating whether events or changes in circumstances are

sufficiently significant to change the initial assessment of whether we are reasonably certain the lessee will exercise extension options or

will not exercise termination options; and in the subsequent reassessment of the lease term.

Key judgements exercised in setting the lease term

The quantum of the lease liability and right-of-use asset currently recognised on our balance sheet is most significantly affected by the

judgement exercised in setting the lease term for the arrangement under which the bulk of our operational UK property estate is held.

UK operational property portfolio

Substantially all of our leased property estate is held under an arrangement which can be terminated in 2031, at which point we may either

vacate some or all properties; or purchase the entire estate. If neither option is taken the lease continues to the next unilaterally available

break point in 2041. The lease liability recognised for the arrangement reflects a lease end date of 2031. On initial recognition we

concluded that, although the majority of these properties are expected to be needed on a long-term basis, we couldn’t be reasonably

certain that we wouldn’t exercise the termination option or that we would exercise the purchase option. In coming to this conclusion, we

had due regard to material sub-lease arrangements relating to the estate.

As time progresses our assessment may change; if this happens, we will remeasure the lease liability and right-of-use asset to reflect either

the rentals due for any properties we will continue to occupy, or the cost of purchasing the estate.

On remeasurement there would be an adjustment to both the lease liability and right-of-use asset, with no overall impact on net assets.

– Exercising the purchase option would lead to an estimated increase in the lease liability and right-of-use asset of between £3bn and

£5bn.

– Continuing to lease the estate beyond 2031 until the next available break in 2041 would lead to an estimated increase in the lease

liability and right-of-use asset of between £1bn and £2bn.

Our assessment will be directly linked to future strategic decisions, which will be resolved at some time prior to 2031, around the

development of the fixed network and the associated rationalisation of our exchange estate. The breadth of the ranges reflects the

significant uncertainty around key variables used to determine cash outflows, especially future inflation and which properties the company

will be able to exit prior to or in 2031.

Estimates are based on discounted cash outflows and do not reflect the likely and significant impact of cash inflows generated from the

disposal, repurposing or subleasing of properties retained post-2031.

We are permitted to hand a limited number of properties back to the lessor prior to 2031. On initial adoption of IFRS 16 we were not

reasonably certain which properties would be handed back and as such the lease term did not reflect the exercise of these options.

Subsequently we exercise judgement in identifying significant events that trigger reassessment of our initial conclusion. We exercise

similar judgement in identifying events triggering reassessment of whether we are reasonably certain we will not exercise termination

options associated with other leased properties.

In doing so we consider decisions associated with our ongoing workplace rationalisation programme, in particular decisions to exit a

particular location or lease an alternative property. Generally we remain reasonably certain that we will not exercise a termination option

until implementation of the associated business plan has progressed to a stage that we are committed to exiting the property. At that

point we reassess the lease term by reference to the time we expect to remain in occupation of the property and any notice period

associated with exercise of the option.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

6. Leases continued

120

Company as lessee

Right-of-use assets

Most of our right-of-use assets are associated with our leased property portfolio, specifically our office and exchange estate.


	Land and buildings	Network infrastructure	Motor vehicles	Other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	2,723	38	354	1	3,116
Additionsa	29	8	143	1	181
Depreciation charge for the year	(283)	(22)	(123)	(1)	(429)
Impairmentb	(65)	—	—	—	(65)
Other movementsc	(6)	(1)	(2)	—	(9)
At 1 April 2023	2,398	23	372	1	2,794
Additionsa	135	29	169	—	333
Depreciation charge for the yearb	(279)	(19)	(113)	(1)	(412)
Impairmentb	(10)	—	—	—	(10)
Other movementsc	(23)	1	(55)	—	(77)
At 31 March 2024	2,221	34	373	—	2,628

aAdditions comprise increases to right-of-use assets as a result of entering into new leases, and upwards remeasurement of existing leases arising from lease extensions or

reassessments and increases to lease payments.

bImpairment charge relate primarily to the early exit of leases as a result of ongoing property rationalisation activity.

cOther movements primarily relate to terminated leases and downwards remeasurements of right-of-use assets arising from reductions or reassessments of lease terms and

decreases in lease payments.

Lease liabilities

Lease liabilities recognised are as follows:


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Current	506	508
Non-current	3,366	3,587
	3,872	4,095

Note 10 presents a maturity analysis of the payments due over the remaining lease term for these liabilities.

At 31 March 2024 the company was committed to future minimum lease payments of £47m in respect of leases which have not yet

commenced and for which no lease liability has been recognised (31 March 2023: £139m).

Company as lessor

The company acts as lessor in a number of arrangements which have been classified as operating leases. These relate primarily to

Openreach's leases of fixed-line telecommunications infrastructure to external communications providers and leases of devices to

Consumer customers as part of fixed access subscription offerings. The following table analyses payments to be received across the

remaining term of operating lease arrangements where the company is lessor:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Less than one year	419	409
One to two years	115	132
Two to three years	39	48
Three to four years	11	15
Four to five years	11	15
More than five years	5	19
Total undiscounted lease payments	600	638

Lessor arrangements classified as finance leases are not material to the company.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

6. Leases continued

121

Material accounting policies that apply to investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures

Investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures are stated at cost and reviewed for impairment if there are indicators

that the carrying value may not be recoverable. Investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures are derecognised

when the company no longer owns the shares of the subsidiary, associate or joint venture or such is dissolved.

The company applies predecessor value method of accounting when it enters into a business transfer agreement with its subsidiary. This is

considered as business combinations under common control which is outside the scope of IFRS 3 Business Combinations. The predecessor

value method involves accounting for assets and liabilities of the acquired business at its carrying values. The carrying values of the assets

and liabilities of the acquired business is based on those reported in the BT plc consolidated financial statements.


	Subsidiary undertakings	Associates and joint ventures	Total
	£m	£m	£m
Cost
At 31 March 2023	33,643	454	34,097
Disposalsa	(114)	—	(114)
At 31 March 2024	33,529	454	33,983
Provisions and amounts written off
31 March 2023	17,812	39	17,851
Disposals	—	—	—
At 31 March 2024	17,812	39	17,851

Net book value at 31 March 2023	15,831	415	16,246
Net book value at 31 March 2024	15,717	415	16,132

aBT plc entered into a business transfer agreement with one of its subsidiaries on 31 March 2024. The carrying values of the acquired subsidiary's net assets and liabilities are now

included within the company's respective assets and liabilities.

Subsidiary undertakings

Details of the company’s subsidiary undertakings are set out on pages 139 to 143.

There were no indicators that the investment in subsidiary undertaking's net book value is not recoverable apart from one subsidiary with a

carrying value of £78m. We have performed an impairment review on this subsidiary in line using the same assumptions as disclosed in

note 12 of the consolidated financial statements. Our assessment concluded that there is significant headroom between the carrying

value and the calculated value in use of this investment and there are no reasonably possible changes to key assumptions that would result

in an impairment.

Associates and joint ventures - Sports JV

In FY23 we formed the Sports JV (known externally as TNT Sports) with WBD, combining BT Sport and WBD’s Eurosport UK business.

Further details on the transaction are provided in note 22 to the consolidated financial statements.

For key developments in the Sports JV during the year see note 22 to the consolidated financial statements.

The company holds both ordinary equity shares and preference shares in the Sports JV entity.



	Key accounting estimates made in accounting for the Sports JV Valuation of investment in A preference shares We expect the company’s A preference shares to be redeemed by the Sports JV for the distribution of cash to BT under our earn- out entitlement. BT’s return on the shares is driven by the underlying cash profit generation of the Sports JV and therefore have been classified as a fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) financial asset under IFRS 9 and is remeasured to fair value at each reporting date. The fair value recorded is supported by a jointly-agreed business plan and internal valuation model with the following key assumptions: – Approximately 45% of revenues and 90% of costs during the remaining earn out period are contractually committed. – Material contracts are renewed at an economic value no less than current terms. – Total premium sports subscriber base does not materially grow or decline over the remaining earn-out period.

Ordinary equity shares

The company records an investment on its ordinary equity interest held in the Sports JV at a deemed cost being the initial fair value of

£414m.

This investment is subsequently held at this deemed cost and reviewed for impairment. There is no impairment at 31 March 2024 (FY23:

no impairment) as the fair value less costs to sell is higher than the carrying amount of the investment, see note 22 to the consolidated

financial statements for sensitivities we have applied in determining the fair value less costs to sell.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

7. Investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures

122

Preference shares

In addition to the company's ordinary equity shareholding it held the following investments in preference shares in the Sports JV.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Investment in A preference shares	387	429
Investment in C preference shares	146	126
Total	533	555

– A preference shares – we expect these shares to be redeemed by the Sports JV for the distribution of cash to the company under our

earn-out entitlement. The company’s return on the shares is driven by the underlying cash profit generation of the Sports JV and

therefore have been classified as a fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) financial asset under IFRS 9.

– C preference shares – these shares are expected to be sold to WBD at the end of BT’s earn-out entitlement in consideration for any

sports rights funded by the company at that point. The company's return on the shares is driven by changes in the Sports JV’s sports

rights portfolio which in turn is dependent on changes in the wider sports rights market and the Sports JV’s financial performance and

are therefore held as a financial asset at FVTPL under IFRS 9.

The preference shares are remeasured to fair value at each reporting date with a combined net £22m (FY23: £34m) decrease in fair value

recorded during the year. See note 22 to the consolidated financial statements for further details on the fair value estimation and

sensitivities applied.

8. Other investments

Material accounting policies that apply to other investments

Equity instruments

Equity investments are recorded in non-current assets unless they are expected to be sold within one year.

Investments classified as amortised cost

These investments are measured at amortised cost.

Significant accounting judgements made in accounting for other investments

We extend loans to our subsidiaries in order to fund their activities. We regularly consider whether there is an indication of impairment. This

involves judgement in reviewing year-end financial position, current year performance, known indicators of future performance and cash-

flows, one-off events and contingent liabilities and assets. Based on this if there is an indication that the loan receivable may be impaired we

perform an assessment of the recoverable amount and make a provision for the portion that we consider irrecoverable. We exercise

judgement in determining whether the loan is fully or partially recoverable, which includes making assumptions regarding the future

performance of the subsidiary. These assumptions are normally based on financial plans or through extrapolating current performance

taking into account past experience and known future events. A provision of is held against these loans.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Non-current assets
Fair value through other comprehensive income	22	21
Fair value through profit or loss	5	5
Loans to group undertakings	510	567
Loans to parent undertakings	11,615	10,916
Total non-current asset investments	12,152	11,509
Current assets
Investments held at amortised cost	2,366	3,548
Loans to group undertakings	1,316	1,185
Total current asset investments	3,682	4,733

Investments held at amortised cost relate to money market investments denominated in sterling of £2,355m (FY23: £3,094m ), in euros of

£5m (FY23: £446m ) and in US dollars of £6m (FY23 : £8m). Within these amounts are investments in liquidity funds of £1,815m (FY23:

£3,491m), £40m collateral paid on swaps (FY23: £48m), interest on investments of £11m (FY23: £9m) and repurchase agreements

£500m (FY23: £nil).

Loans to group and parent undertakings total £13,441m (FY23: £12,668m). These consist of amounts denominated in sterling of

£12,258m (FY23: £11,523m ), euros of £781m (FY23: £772m), US dollars of £8m (FY23: £8m) and other currencies of £394m (FY23:

£365m).

British Telecommunications plc parent company accounting policies continued

7 . Investments in subsidiary undertakings, associates and joint ventures continued

123

9. Trade and other receivables

Material accounting policies that apply to trade and other receivables

Recognition of trade and other receivables

Trade receivables are recognised where the right to receive payment from customers is conditional only on the passage of time. We initially

recognise trade and other receivables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. They are subsequently carried at amortised

cost using the effective interest method. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value due to the short maturity of

amounts receivable.

Contingent assets such as any insurance recoveries, or prepaid programme rights which we expect to recoup, have not been recognised in

the financial statements as these are only recognised within trade and other receivables when their receipt is virtually certain.

The company utilises factoring arrangements for selected trade receivables. Trade receivables that are subject to debt factoring

arrangements are derecognised if they meet the conditions for derecognition detailed in IFRS 9 'Financial instruments'.

Allowance for doubtful debts

We provide services to consumer and business customers, mainly on credit terms. We know that certain debts due to us will not be paid

through the default of a small number of our customers. Because of this, we recognise an allowance for doubtful debts on initial recognition

of receivables, which is deducted from the gross carrying amount of the receivable. The allowance is calculated by reference to credit losses

expected to be incurred over the lifetime of the receivable. In estimating a loss allowance we consider historical experience and informed

credit assessment alongside other factors such as the current state of the economy and particular industry issues. We consider reasonable

and supportable information that is relevant and available without undue cost or effort.

Once recognised, trade receivables are continuously monitored and updated. Allowances are based on our historical loss experiences for

the relevant aged category as well as forward-looking information and general economic conditions. Allowances are calculated by

individual customer-facing units in order to reflect the specific nature of the customers relevant to that customer-facing unit.

Contract losses

We recognise immediately the entire estimated loss for a contract when we have evidence that the contract is unprofitable. If these

estimates indicate that any contract will be less profitable than previously forecast, contract assets may have to be written down to the

extent they are no longer considered to be fully recoverable. We perform ongoing profitability reviews of our contracts in order to

determine whether the latest estimates are appropriate. Key factors reviewed include:

- Transaction volumes or other inputs affecting future revenues which can vary depending on customer requirements, plans, market

position and other factors such as general economic conditions.

- Our ability to achieve key contract milestones connected with the transition, development, transformation and deployment phases

for customer contracts.

- The status of commercial relations with customers and the implications for future revenue and cost projections.

- Our estimates of future staff and third-party costs and the degree to which cost savings and efficiencies are deliverable.

Deferred contract costs

We capitalise certain costs associated with the acquisition and fulfilment of contracts with customers and amortise them over the period

that we transfer the associated services.

Connection costs are deferred as contract fulfilment costs because they allow satisfaction of the associated connection performance

obligation and are considered recoverable. Sales commissions and other third party contract acquisition costs are capitalised as costs to

acquire a contract unless the associated contract term is less than 12 months, in which case they are expensed as incurred. Capitalised costs

are amortised over the minimum contract term. A portfolio approach is used to determine contract term.

Where the initial set-up, transition and transformation phases of long-term contractual arrangements represent distinct performance

obligations, costs in delivering these services are expensed as incurred. Where these services are not distinct performance obligations, we

capitalise eligible costs as a cost of fulfilling the related service. Capitalised costs are amortised on a straight line basis over the remaining

contract term, unless the pattern of service delivery indicates a more appropriate profile. To be eligible for capitalisation, costs must be

directly attributable to specific contracts, relate to future activity, and generate future economic benefits. Capitalised costs are regularly

assessed for recoverability.

124


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Current receivables
Trade receivables	1,166	713
Amount owed by group undertakings	181	798
Amount owed by ultimate parent company	25	26
Prepayments	309	264
Accrued income	72	70
Deferred contract costs	146	137
Finance lease receivables	10	7
Amounts due from joint ventures	163	268
Other assetsa	113	183
Total current receivables	2,185	2,466
Non-current receivables
Deferred contract costs	157	137
Finance lease receivables	60	44
Other assetsa	85	109
Total non current receivables	302	290

aOther assets include £57m (FY23: £70m) of deferred cash consideration mainly relating to the disposal of BT Sport, see note 22.

Amounts due from joint ventures relates to a sterling Revolving Credit Facility (RCF) provided to the Sports JV formed, see note 22. The

expected loss provision is immaterial.

10. Loans and other borrowings

Material accounting policies that apply to loans and other borrowings

We initially recognise loans and other borrowings at the fair value of amounts received net of transaction costs. They are subsequently

measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method and, if included in a fair value hedge relationship, are re-valued to reflect

the fair value movements on the associated hedged risk. The resulting amortisation of fair value movements, on de-designation of the

hedge, is recognised in the income statement.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

9. Trade and other receivables continued

125

The table below gives details of the listed bonds and other debt.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
0.875% €306m bond due September 2023a	—	270
4.5% $675m bond due December 2023a	—	554
1% €469m bond due June 2024a,d	—	415
1% €825m bond due November 2024a	708	726
3.50% £250m index linked bond due April 2025	575	524
0.5% €650m bond due September 2025a	557	571
1.75% €1,300m bond due March 2026a	1,112	1,143
1.5% €1,150m bond due June 2027a	991	1,017
2.75% €700m bond due August 2027a,e	601	530
2.125% €500m bond due September 2028a	431	442
5.125% $700m bond due December 2028a	561	573
5.75% £600m bond due December 2028	658	669
1.125% €750m bond due September 2029a	640	657
3.25% $1,000m bond due November 2029a	796	812
9.625% $2,670m bond due December 2030a (minimum 8.625% b)	2,166	2,214
3.75% €800m bond due February 2031a	704	704
3.125% £500m bond due November 2031	503	503
3.375% €500m bond due August 2032a	433	445
4.25% €850m bond due January 2033a	725	—
3.64% £330m bond due June 2033	339	339
1.613% £330m index linked bond due June 2033	394	380
6.375% £500m bond due June 2037	523	523
3.883% £330m bond due June 2039	340	340
1.739% £330m index linked bond due June 2039	394	381
5.75% £450m bond due February 2041e	445	347
3.924% £340m bond due June 2042	350	350
1.774% £340m index linked bond due June 2042	406	392
2.08% JPY10,000m bond due February 2043a	52	61
3.625% £250m bond due November 2047	251	250
4.25% $500m bond due November 2049a	400	408
1.874% €500m hybrid bond due August 2080a,c	432	443
4.250% $500m hybrid bond due November 2081a,c	396	404
4.875% $500m hybrid bond due November 2081a,c	401	409
8.375% £700m hybrid bond due December 2083c	710	—
Total listed bonds	17,994	17,796
Loans from group undertakingsf	16,357	15,668
Loans related to the forward sale of redundant copper	106	—
Other loans	27	614
Bank overdrafts	58	11
Total other loans and borrowings	16,548	16,293
Total loans and borrowings	34,542	34,089

aDesignated in a cash flow hedge relationship.

bThe interest rate payable on this bond attracts an additional 0.25% for a downgrade by one credit rating by either Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s to the company’s senior unsecured

debt below A3/A-respectively. In addition, if Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s subsequently increase the ratings then the interest rate will be decreased by 0.25% for each rating

category upgrade by each rating agency. In no event will the interest rate be reduced below the minimum rate reflected in the above table.

cIncludes call options between 1.5 years and 7.5 years.

dRedeemed early in March 2024.

e Increased the issue size on €700m bond due August 2027 by €100m in November 2023 and on £450m bond due February 2041 by £100m in December 2023.

fLoans from group undertakings are £16,357m (FY23: £15,668m). These consist of £12,080m (FY23: £12,889m) denominated in sterling, £1,449m (FY23: £1,266m ) denominated in

euros, £2,045m (FY23: £684m) denominated in US dollars and £783m (FY23: £829m) denominated in other currencies.

Unless previously designated in a fair value hedge relationship, all loans and other borrowings are carried in the company balance sheet at

cost. The table above is presented at amortised cost. The fair value of listed bonds is £17,820m (FY23: £16,979m).

The interest rates payable on loans and borrowings disclosed above reflect the coupons on the underlying issued loans and borrowings

and not the interest rates achieved through applying associated cross-currency and interest rate swaps in hedge arrangements.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

10. Loans and other borrowings continued

126

Loans and other borrowings are analysed as follows:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Current liabilities
Listed bonds	996	1,075
Amount owed to joint ventures	11	11
Loans from group undertakings	16,357	15,668
Other loans and bank overdrafts	93	613
Total current liabilities	17,457	17,367
Non-current liabilities
Listed bonds	16,998	16,722
Other loans and bank overdrafts	87	—
Total non-current liabilities	17,085	16,722
Total	34,542	34,089


	2024			2023
	Lease liabilities	Loans and other borrowings	Total	Lease liabilities	Loans and other borrowings	Total
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Repayments falling due as follows:
Within one year, or on demand	506	17,457	17,963	508	17,367	17,875
Between one and two years	536	2,681	3,217	515	1,137	1,652
Between two and three years	530	431	961	505	2,669	3,174
Between three and four years	518	1,614	2,132	493	404	897
Between four and five years	511	2,282	2,793	484	1,539	2,023
After five years	1,792	10,107	11,899	2,139	10,984	13,123
Total due for repayment after more than one year	3,887	17,115	21,002	4,136	16,733	20,869
Total repayments	4,393	34,572	38,965	4,644	34,100	38,744
Non cash adjustmentsa	—	(30)	(30)	—	(11)	(11)
Impact of discounting	(521)	—	(521)	(549)	—	(549)
Total loans and other borrowings	3,872	34,542	38,414	4,095	34,089	38,184

aFair value adjustments and unamortised bond fees.

11. Current trade and other payables

Material accounting policies relating to trade and other payables

We initially recognise trade and other payables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. We subsequently carry them at

amortised cost using the effective interest method.

We use a separate supply chain financing programme to allow suppliers to receive funding earlier than the invoice due date. We assess

these arrangements against indicators to assess if debts which vendors have sold to the funder under the supplier financing schemes

continue to meet the definition of trade payables or should be classified as borrowings. At 31 March 2024 under the terms of the

arrangement the funder's payment to the supplier does not legally extinguish our obligation to the supplier so it remains within trade and

other payables. Cash flows only occur when the trade payables is extinguished and are therefore presented in cash flows from operating

activities.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Trade payables	2,534	2,366
Amounts owed to group undertakings	414	624
Amounts owed to ultimate parent company	36	11
Other taxation and social security	189	209
Minimum guarantee from BT Sport disposala	194	195
Accrued expenses	287	218
Deferred incomeb	402	564
Other payablesc	461	458
Total	4,517	4,645

a See note 22 .

b Deferred income includes £106m (FY23: £258m) relating to the Building Digital UK programme, for which grants received by the company may be subject to re-investment or

repayment depending on the level of take-up.

c Includes £41m relating to an estimate of customer refunds, see key accounting estimate disclosure below.

Current trade and other payables at 31 March 2024 includes £209m (31 March 2023: £150m) of trade payables in a supply chain

financing programme that allows suppliers the opportunity to receive funding earlier than the invoice due date. Financial institutions are

used to support this programme but we continue to recognise the underlying payables as we continue to cash settle the supplier invoices

in accordance with their terms.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

10. Loans and other borrowings continued

127



	Key accounting estimates made in accounting for other payables Estimate of customer refunds Revenue has been adjusted to reflect a risk of billing inaccuracy where there is a high level of manual processing through certain billing systems. This is associated with a small number of products within our Business unit which contain bespoke pricing. £41m has been recognised as an IFRS 9 financial liability and deducted from revenue, and has been derived from an estimate of the possible range of the adjustment from £24m to £64m based on the results of a sample of billing items. This is presented within current other payables and represents our best estimate required to cover ongoing billing adjustments to products relating to both current and prior periods. If the final quantum of adjustments is less than expected, the adjustment will be released.

12. Other non-current payables


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Minimum guarantee from BT Sport disposala	271	465
Deferred incomeb	1,143	1,167
Other payables	4	14
Total	1,418	1,646

a See note 22 .

b Deferred income includes £122m (FY23: £169m) relating to the Building Digital UK programme, for which grants received by the company may be subject to re-investment or

repayment depending on the level of take-up.

13. Provisions & contingent liabilities

Our provisions principally relate to obligations arising from property rationalisation programmes, restructuring programmes, third party

claims, litigation and regulatory risks. Contingent liabilities primarily arise from litigation and regulatory matters that are not sufficiently

certain to meet the criteria for recognition as provisions.

Material accounting policies that apply to provisions & contingent liabilities

We recognise provisions when the company has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an

outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated.

Where these criteria are not met we disclose a contingent liability if the company has a possible obligation, or has a present obligation with

an outflow that is not probable or which cannot be reliably estimated.

Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the

time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. Cash flows are adjusted for the effect of inflation where appropriate.

Significant judgements made in identifying contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are not recognised as liabilities on our balance sheet. By their nature, contingencies will be resolved only when one or

more uncertain future events occur or fail to occur. We assess the likelihood that a potential claim or liability will arise and also quantify the

possible range of financial outcomes where this can be reasonably determined.

In identifying contingent liabilities we make key judgements in relation to applicable law and any historical and pending court rulings, and

the likelihood, timing and cost of resolution.

Establishing contingent liabilities associated with litigation brought against the group may involve the use of significant judgements and

assumptions, in particular around the ability to form a reliable estimate of any probable outflow. We provide further information in relation

to specific matters in the 'contingent liabilities' section below.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

11. Current trade and other payables continued

128

Key accounting estimates and significant judgements made in accounting for provisions

We exercise judgement in determining the quantum of all provisions to be recognised. Our assessment includes consideration of whether

we have a present obligation, whether payment is probable and if so whether the amount can be estimated reliably.

When measuring provisions we reflect the impact of inflation as appropriate particularly in relation to our property and third party claims

provisions. Although this involves a degree of estimation it does not represent a significant source of estimation uncertainty having regard to

the quantum of the balances in question and the anticipated timing of outflows.

Property provisions relate to obligations arising in relation to our property portfolio, in particular costs to restore leased properties on

vacation where this is required under the lease agreement. In measuring property provisions, we have made estimates of the costs

association with the restoration of properties by reference to any relevant guidance such as rate cards. Cash outflows occur as and when

properties are vacated and the obligations are settled.

Our regulatory provision represents our best estimate of the cost to settle our present obligation in relation to historical regulatory matters.

The charge/credit for the year represents the outcome of management’s re-assessment of the estimates and regulatory risks across a range

of issues, including price and service issues. The prices at which certain services are charged are regulated and may be subject to

retrospective adjustment by regulators. When estimating the likely value of regulatory risk we make key judgements, including in regard to

interpreting Ofcom regulations and past and current claims. The precise outcome of each matter depends on whether it becomes an active

issue, and the extent to which negotiation or regulatory and compliance decisions will result in financial settlement. The ultimate liability

may vary from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any settlement.

Litigation provisions represent the best estimate to settle present obligations recognised in respect of claims brought against the company.

The estimate reflects the specific facts and circumstances of each individual matter and any relevant external advice received. Provisions

recognised are inherently judgemental and could change over time as matters progress.

Third party claims provisions (previously described as insurance provisions) represent our exposure to claims from third parties, with latent

disease claims from former colleagues and motor vehicle claims making up the majority of the balance. We engage an independent actuary

to provide an estimate of the most likely outcomes in respect of latent disease and third party motor vehicle accident claims, and our in-

house insurance teams review our exposure to other risks

Other provisions do not include any individually material provisions.

For all risks, the ultimate liability may vary materially from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any

settlement.


	Property	Regulatory	Litigation	Third party claims	Other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2022	78	65	26	49	55	273
Additions	36	16	2	11	—	65
Unwind of discount	1	—	—	—	—	1
Utilised	(4)	(1)	—	(13)	—	(18)
Released	(29)	(16)	—	(35)	(21)	(101)
Transfers	—	4	—	132	—	136
At 31 March 2023	82	68	28	144	34	356
Additions	39	72	—	42	2	155
Unwind of discount	—	—	—	—	—	—
Utilised	(9)	(37)	—	(52)		(98)
Released	(8)	(17)	—	(8)	(1)	(34)
Transfersa	—	—	(3)	—	17	14
At 31 March 2024	104	86	25	126	52	393

a Transfers relate to the reclassification of balances previously presented in other payables (note 12) following reassessment of the level of certainty over the timing and amount of any

outflow of resources.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Analysed as:
Current	167	147
Non-current	226	209
	393	356

Contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

In the ordinary course of business, we are periodically notified of actual or threatened litigation, and regulatory and compliance matters

and investigations. There are no matters brought against the company where we believe a material adverse impact on the operations or

financial condition of the company is possible and the likelihood of a material outflow of resources is more than remote.

Where the outflow of resources is considered probable, and a reasonable estimate can be made of the amount of that obligation, a

provision is recognised for these amounts and reflected in the table above. Where an outflow is not probable but is possible, or a

reasonable estimate of the obligation cannot be made, a contingent liability exists.

14. Taxation

The value of the company’s income tax asset is disclosed on the company balance sheet on page 109. The values of the company’s

deferred tax assets and liabilities are disclosed in note 18 and below. Deferred tax liabilities are provided for in full on certain temporary

differences.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

13. Provisions & contingent liabilities continued

129

Material accounting policies that apply to taxation

Current income tax is calculated on the basis of the tax laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. The company

periodically evaluates positions taken in tax returns with respect to situations in which applicable tax regulation is subject to interpretation,

and the company establishes provisions where appropriate on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to tax authorities.

Deferred tax is recognised, using the liability method, in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amount of the company’s

assets and liabilities and their tax base. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the asset

is realised or liability settled, based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax

liabilities and where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. Any remaining deferred tax asset is recognised only when, on

the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as probable that there will be suitable taxable profits, in the foreseeable future against

which the deductible temporary difference can be utilised.

Key accounting estimates and key judgements made in accounting for taxation

We seek to pay tax in accordance with the laws of the countries where we do business. However, in some areas these laws are unclear, and it

can take many years to agree an outcome with a tax authority or through litigation. We estimate our tax on country by-country and issue-

by-issue bases. Our key uncertainties are whether our intra-group trading model will be accepted by a particular tax authority and whether

intra-group payments are subject to withholding taxes. We provide for the predicted outcome where an outflow is probable, but the agreed

amount can differ materially from our estimates. Approximately 77% by value of the provisions are under active tax authority examination

and are therefore likely to be re-estimated or resolved in the coming 12 months. £86m (FY23: £78m) is included in current tax liabilities or

offset against current tax assets where netting is appropriate. We are subject to regular tax authority review, under a downside case an

additional amount of £123m could be required to be paid. This amount is not provided as we don’t consider this outcome to be probable.


	£m
At 1 April 2022	1,313
Credit recognised in the income statement	(333)
Transfer to deferred tax asset	—
Transfer to current tax	39
Credit recognised in reserves	(209)
At 1 April 2023	810
Charge recognised in the income statement	194
Transfer to deferred tax asset	—
Transfer to current tax	—
Credit recognised in reserves	(299)
At 31 March 2024	705


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Tax effect of temporary differences due to:
Excess capital allowances	3,686	2,955
Losses	(2,842)	(2,115)
Share-based payments	(26)	(42)
Other	(113)	12
Total provision for deferred taxation	705	810

The deferred taxation asset relating to the retirement benefit position is disclosed in note 18.

What factors affect our future tax charges?

We expect a large proportion of our capital spend on fibre rollout to be eligible for full expensing under the UK capital allowances regime,

which provides 100% tax relief in the year of spend on qualifying assets. These deductions drive a projected UK tax loss and no UK tax

payments for FY24. The enhanced and accelerated tax deductions arising under the Government’s super-deduction regime for qualifying

capital spend during FY22 and FY23, together with full expensing in FY24 and pension deficit contribution deductions, result in c. £11.3bn

of tax losses expected to be carried forward from FY24, to be utilised against future UK taxable profits.

The UK has enacted Pillar Two legislation which applies for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2024. Since the Pillar Two

legislation was not effective for the current period, the company has no related current tax exposure. Under the legislation, the group is

liable to pay a top-up tax for the difference between its Global Anti-Base Erosion (GloBE) effective tax rate per jurisdiction and the 15%

minimum rate. As the UK rate of corporation tax from FY24 will be 25%, and the group’s business is primarily in the UK, the impact of these

rules is not expected to be material.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

14. Taxation continued

130


	Cash flow reservea	Fair value reserve	Cost of hedging reserveb	Capital redemption reservec	Total other reserves
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
At 1 April 2023	(150)	6	236	752	844
Transferred to the income statement	(716)	—	8	—	(708)
Tax on items taken directly to equity	(89)	—	—	—	(89)
Net fair value gain on cash flow hedges	1,333	—	(281)	—	1,052
At 31 March 2023	378	6	(37)	752	1,099
Transferred to the income statement	351	—	7	—	358
Tax on items taken directly to equity	69	—	—	—	69
Net fair value loss on cash flow hedges	(660)	—	19	—	(641)
Transfer to realised profit	6	—	—	—	6
At 31 March 2024	144	6	(11)	752	891

aThe cash flow reserve is used to record the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments related to hedged transactions that have

not yet occurred.

bThe cost of hedging reserve reflects the gain or loss on the portion excluded from the designated hedging instrument that relates to the currency basis element of our cross-currency

swaps and forward points on certain foreign exchange contracts. It is initially recognised in other comprehensive income and accounted for similarly to gains or losses in the cash flow

reserve.

cThe capital redemption reserve is not available for distribution.

16. Related party transactions

The company is a wholly-owned subsidiary of BT Group Investment Limited, which is the immediate parent company. BT Group

Investments Limited is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the ultimate holding company and controlling entity, BT Group plc.

Amounts paid to the the company’s retirement benefit plans are set out in note 18.

Copies of the ultimate holding company's financial statements may be obtained from The Secretary, BT Group plc, 1 Braham Street,

London E1 8EE.

The results of the company are included in the consolidated financial statements of BT Group plc. As permitted by FRS 101, paragraph

8(k) and the Companies Act 2006, the company is exempt from the requirements of IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures to disclose related

party transactions entered into between two or more members of the group, provided that any subsidiary which is a party to the

transaction is wholly-owned by such a member.

Associates and joint ventures related parties include the Sports JV with Warner Bros formed during FY23 (see note 22). The amount

receivable from the Sports JV as at 31 March 2024 was £3m (FY23: 10m) and the amount payable to the Sports JV was £94m (FY23:

£123m).

As part of the BT Sport transaction, the company has committed to providing the Sports JV with a sterling Revolving Credit Facility (RCF),

up to a maximum for £300m, for short-term liquidity required by the Sports JV to fund its working capital and commitments to sports

rights holders. Amounts drawn down by the Sports JV under the RCF accrue interest at a market reference rate, consistent with the

company’s external short-term borrowings. The outstanding balance under the RCF of £163m (FY23: £268m) is treated as a loan

receivable and held at amortised cost. The capacity of the RCF is expected to reduce to £200m during FY25. There is also a loan payable

to the Sports JV of £11m (FY23: £11m).

The Sports JV has a foreign exchange hedging arrangement with the company to secure Euros required to meet its commitments to

certain sports rights holders; the company has external forward contracts in place to purchase the Euros at an agreed sterling rate in order

to mitigate its exposure to exchange risk. The company holds a £29m (FY23: £14m) derivative liability in respect of forward contracts

provided to the Sports JV.

Transactions from commercial trading arrangements with associates and joint ventures, including the Sports JV, are shown below:


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Amounts receivable from associates and joint ventures	5	10
Amounts payable to associates and joint ventures	95	124

Other related party transactions in the prior year include the purchase of energy from an entity controlled by the BT Pension Scheme until

FY24. FY23 total purchases were £13m and £1m was due to the other party as at 31 March 2023.

17. Financial commitments

Financial commitments as at 31 March 2024 include capital commitments of £794m (FY23: £1,124m) and other commitments of £1m

(FY23: £1m).

TV programme rights commitments were transferred to the Sports JV formed with Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD) during FY23 (see note

7); the company has guaranteed the Sports JV's obligations under certain programme rights commitments; the fair value of these parent

company guarantees is not material.

Other than as disclosed in note 13 in respect of legal and regulatory proceedings, there were no contingent liabilities or guarantees at 31

March 2024 other than those arising in the ordinary course of the company’s business and on these no material losses are anticipated. We

have insurance cover to certain limits for major risks on property and major claims in connection with legal liabilities arising in the course of

our operations. Otherwise, the company generally carries its own risks.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

15. Reconciliation of movement in other reserves

131

Background to BT’s pension plans

The company has both Defined Benefit and Defined Contribution retirement benefit plans. The company’s plans are in the UK and the

largest by membership is the BT Pension Scheme (BTPS). The BTPS is a Defined Benefit plan that was closed to future benefit accrual in

2018 for over 99% of the active membership at the time. The BT Hybrid Scheme (BTHS), which combines elements of both defined

benefit and defined contribution plans, was set up for non-management employees impacted by the closure of the BTPS, and was closed

to new entrants in 2019.

New entrants to BT in the UK are eligible to join a defined contribution plan, currently the BT Retirement Saving Scheme (BTRSS), a

contract-based arrangement operated by Standard Life.

Types of retirement benefit plans

Defined Benefit (DB) plans

DB plan benefits are determined by the plan rules, typically dependent on factors such as age, years of service and pensionable pay, and not

on the value of actual contributions made by the company and members. The company is exposed to investment and other experience risks

and may need to make additional contributions where it is estimated that the benefits will not be met from assets held, regular

contributions, and expected investment income.

The net defined benefit liability, or deficit, is the present value of all expected future benefit cash flows to be paid by each plan, calculated

using the projected unit credit method by professionally qualified actuaries (also known as the Defined Benefit Obligation, DBO or

liabilities) less the fair value of the plan assets. A net defined benefit asset or surplus occurs when the fair value of assets exceeds the

liabilities.

Defined Contribution (DC) plans

DC plan benefits are linked to the value of each member's fund, which is based on contributions paid and the performance of each

individual’s chosen investments. The company has no exposure to investment and other experience risks (including longevity).

Critical accounting estimates and significant judgements made when valuing our pension

liabilities

The measurement of the service cost and the liabilities involves judgement about uncertain events including the life expectancy of

members, price inflation and the discount rate used to calculate the net present value of the future pension payments. We use estimates for

all of these uncertain events. Our assumptions reflect historical experience, market expectations (where relevant), actuarial advice and our

judgement regarding future expectations at the balance sheet date.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans

132

Critical accounting estimates and significant judgements made when valuing the BTPS assets

Under IAS 19, plan assets are measured at fair value at the balance sheet date and include quoted and unquoted investments.

Valuation of main quoted investments

– Equities listed on recognised stock exchanges are valued at closing bid prices.

– Bonds that are regularly traded are valued using broker quotes.

– Exchange traded derivative contracts are valued based on closing bid prices.

Valuation of main unquoted investments

A portion of unquoted investments are valued based on inputs that are not directly observable, which require more judgement. The

assumptions used in valuing unquoted investments are affected by market conditions.

– Equities are valued using the International Private Equity and Venture Capital (IPEVC) guidelines where the most significant assumptions

are the discount rate and earnings assumptions.

– Property investments are valued on the basis of open market value by an independent valuer using RICS guidelines. The significant

assumptions used in the valuation are rental yields and occupancy rates.

– Bonds, including those issued by BT, that are not regularly traded are valued by an independent valuer using pricing models making

assumptions for credit risk, market risk and market yield curves.

– Holdings in investment funds are typically valued at the Net Asset Value provided by the fund administrator or investment manager. The

significant assumption used in the valuation is the Net Asset Value.

– Infrastructure investments are valued by an independent valuer using a model-based valuation such as a discounted cash flow approach,

or at the price of recent market transactions if they represent fair value. Where a discounted cash flow model is used, the significant

assumptions used in the valuation are the discount rate and the expected cash flows.

– Over the counter derivatives are valued by an independent valuer using cash flows discounted at market rates. The significant

assumptions used in the valuation are the yield curves and cost of carry.

– The BTPS entered into a longevity insurance contract in 2014, and a second in August 2023. The two longevity insurance contracts are

valued by discounting the fixed cash flows payable by the BTPS and the floating cash flows payable by the insurers under the contracts

(projected by an actuary, consistent with the terms of the contracts). The significant assumptions used to value the assets are the

discount rate (set as a margin above a risk-free rate to reflect credit and liquidity risk) and the mortality assumptions.

£5.7bn of unquoted investments that are formally valued periodically by the investment manager have a latest valuation that precedes the

balance sheet date. These assets consist of: £2.4bn non-core credit; £1.0bn mature infrastructure; £1.2bn private equity; £0.9bn secure

income; and £0.2bn property. These valuations have been adjusted for cash movements between the previous valuation date and 31 March

2024. The valuation approach and inputs for these investments would only be approximately updated where there were indications of

significant movements, for example implied by public market indicators. No such adjustment was required at 31 March 2024.

Asset-backed funding arrangement

The asset-backed funding arrangement, issued to the BTPS in May 2021, has a fair value of £1.2bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.3bn)

calculated as the present value of the future stream of payments, allowing for the probability of the BTPS becoming fully funded and

therefore the payments to the BTPS ending early. Under IFRS, the ABF is recognised as a plan asset in the company's balance sheet, but not

recognised at group level.

The net defined benefit liability in respect of defined benefit plans reported in the balance sheet is set out below.


	2024			2023
	Assets	Liabilities	Surplus / (Deficit)	Assets	Liabilities	Surplus / (Deficit)
At 31 March	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
BTPSa	36,601	(40,038)	(3,437)	39,983	(41,575)	(1,592)
Other plansb	104	(135)	(31)	92	(124)	(32)
Total (gross of tax)	36,705	(40,173)	(3,468)	40,075	(41,699)	(1,624)
Deferred tax asset			969			611
Total (net of tax)			(2,499)			(1,013)

aIncluded in the plan assets is £1.2bn (FY23: £1.3bn) related to the asset-backed funding arrangement.

bThe balance sheet position comprises of plans in surplus of £11m (FY23: £15m) and plans in deficit of £42m (FY23:£47m). Included in the liabilities is £39m (FY23: £40m) related to

unfunded plans.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

133

Movements in defined benefit plan assets and liabilities are shown below.


	Assets	Liabilities	Surplus / (Deficit)
	£m	£m	£m
At 31 March 2022	55,031	(54,490)	541
Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)	(36)	(13)	(49)
Interest on pension surplus	1,484	(1,461)	23
Return on plan assets below pensions interest on assets	(14,562)	—	(14,562)
Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions	—	11,783	11,783
Actuarial gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions	—	898	898
Actuarial (loss) arising from experience adjustments	—	(1,072)	(1,072)
Regular contributions by employer	13	—	13
Deficit contributions by employer	801	—	801
Benefits paid	(2,656)	2,656	—
At 31 March 2023	40,075	(41,699)	(1,624)
Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)	(30)	(8)	(38)
Interest on pension deficit	1,898	(1,959)	(61)
Return on plan assets below pensions interest on assets	(3,083)	—	(3,083)
Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions	—	539	539
Actuarial gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions	—	643	643
Actuarial (loss) arising from experience adjustments	—	(500)	(500)
Regular contributions by employer	44	—	44
Deficit contributions by employer	612	—	612
Benefits paid	(2,811)	2,811	—
At 31 March 2024	36,705	(40,173)	(3,468)

Asset-backed funding arrangement ("ABF")

Under the ABF, £180m pa is paid into the BTPS until June 2033, secured on EE Limited. If the BTPS reaches full funding as calculated by

the Scheme Actuary at any 30 June, the ABF payments to the BTPS will cease.

Assuming they are all paid, the future payments from the ABF have a present value of £1.3bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.4bn). The fair

value of the ABF is £1.2bn at 31 March 2024 (FY23: £1.3bn) and allows for the probability of the BTPS becoming fully funded, and

therefore the payments to the BTPS ending early.

The fair value of the ABF is included in the assets of the BTPS when assessing the funding deficit and the IAS 19 deficit in the company

accounts. Payments from the ABF to BTPS are treated in the same way as coupon payments from bonds, and do not affect the deficit

when they are paid. The ABF would be categorised as an unquoted secure income asset within the asset allocation table in note 18 of the

BT plc consolidated financial statements.

The fair value of the ABF is not included in the assets of the BTPS when assessing the IAS 19 deficit in the group consolidated accounts, as

it is a non-transferable asset issued by the group. Payments from the ABF to BTPS are treated as deficit contributions by the group, and

reduce the IAS 19 deficit, when they are paid.

Further information covering details of the BTPS, including the valuation methodology of plan assets and liabilities, funding valuation and

future funding obligations is disclosed in note 18 of the BT plc consolidated financial statements.

19. Employees and directors

The average number of persons employed by the company (including directors) during the year was:


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	000	000
Average monthly number of employeesa	24.7	31.0


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Wages and salaries	1,336	1,325
Share-based payments	55	44
Social security	187	164
Other pension costs	273	268
	1,851	1,801

aIncludes an average of 10 non-UK employees (FY23: 12 non-UK employees).

20. Directors’ remuneration

Information covering directors’ remuneration, interests in shares and share options of BT Group plc (the ultimate parent), and pension

benefits is included in note 28 to the consolidated financial statements of BT plc.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

18. Retirement benefit plans continued

134

We use derivative financial instruments mainly to reduce exposure to foreign exchange and interest rate risks. Derivatives may qualify as

hedges for accounting purposes if they meet the criteria for designation as cash flow hedges or fair value hedges in accordance with IFRS

Material accounting policies that apply to derivatives

All of the company’s derivative financial instruments are held at fair value on the company’s balance sheet.

Derivatives designated in a cash flow hedge

The company designates certain derivatives in a cash flow hedge relationship. Where derivatives qualify for hedge accounting, recognition

of any resultant gain or loss depends on the nature of the hedge. To qualify for hedge accounting, hedge documentation must be prepared

at inception, the hedge must be in line with BT Group plc’s risk management strategy and there must be an economic relationship based on

the currency, amount and timing of the respective cash flows of the hedging instrument and hedged item. This is assessed at inception and

in subsequent periods in which the hedge remains in operation. Hedge accounting is discontinued when it is no longer in line with BT Group

plc’s risk management strategy or if it no longer qualifies for hedge accounting.

In line with BT Group plc's policy the company targets a one-to-one hedge ratio. The economic relationship between the hedged item and

the hedging instrument is assessed on an ongoing basis. Ineffectiveness can arise from subsequent change in the forecast transactions as a

result of altered timing, cash flows or value.

When a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset or liability, or a highly

probable transaction, the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument is recognised directly in equity. For cash

flow hedges of recognised assets or liabilities, the associated cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in the same line

of the income statement and in the same period or periods that the hedged transaction affects the income statement. Any ineffectiveness

arising on a cash flow hedge is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Other derivatives

In line with BT Group, company's policy is not to use derivatives for trading purposes. However, due to the complex nature of hedge

accounting, some derivatives may not qualify for hedge accounting, or may be specifically not designated as a hedge because natural offset

is more appropriate. We effectively operate a process to identify any embedded derivatives within revenue, supply, leasing and financing

contracts, including those relating to inflationary features. These derivatives are classified as fair value through profit and loss and are

recognised at fair value. Any direct transaction costs are recognised immediately in the income statement. Gains and losses on re-

measurement are recognised in the income statement in the line that most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction to

which they relate.

Where the fair value of a derivative contract at initial recognition is not supported by observable market data and differs from the

transaction price, a day one gain or loss will arise which is not recognised in the income statement. Such gains and losses are deferred and

amortised to the income statement based on the remaining contractual term and as observable market data becomes available.

The fair values of outstanding swaps and foreign exchange contracts are estimated using discounted cash flow models and market rates of

interest and foreign exchange at the balance sheet date.


At 31 March 2024	Current asset £m	Non current asset £m	Current liability £m	Non current liability £m
Designated in a cash flow hedge	34	947	80	383
Other	17	194	14	62
Total derivatives	51	1,141	94	445

At 31 March 2023
Designated in a cash flow hedge	78	1,330	62	255
Other	4	162	24	42
Total derivatives	82	1,492	86	297

Instruments designated in a cash flow hedge include interest rate swaps and cross-currency swaps hedging euro, US dollar and Japanese

yen- denominated borrowings. Forward currency contracts are taken out to hedge step-up interest on currency denominated borrowings

relating to the group’s 2030 US dollar bond. The hedged cash flows will affect the group’s income statement as interest and principal

amounts are repaid over the remaining term of the borrowings (see note 10).

We hedge forecast foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro, Indian rupees and Hungarian forint 12 months

forward with certain specific transactions hedged further forward. The related cash flows are recognised in the income statement over this

period.

All hedge relationships were fully effective in the period. See note 15 for details of the movements in the cash flow hedge reserve.

Other derivatives include £121m (FY23 : £95m) in relation to BT plc's interest in the ABF funding arrangement for the BTPS. Further

information is disclosed in note 18 of the BT plc consolidated financial statements.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

21. Derivatives

135

Material accounting policies that apply to assets & liabilities classified as held for sale

We classify non-current assets or a group of assets and associated liabilities, together forming a disposal group, as ‘held for sale’ when their

carrying amount will be recovered principally through disposal rather than continuing use and the sale is highly probable. Sale is considered

to be highly probable when management are committed to a plan to sell the asset or disposal group and the sale should be expected to

qualify for recognition as a completed divestment within one year from the date of classification. We measure non-current assets or

disposal groups classified as held for sale at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value less costs of disposal. Intangible assets,

property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets classified as held for sale are not depreciated or amortised.

Divestments

During the year, the company completed the disposal of Pelipod Limited, a connected-locker business used in our UK supply chain

operations.

In FY23, we completed the disposal of BT Sport operations through forming a sports joint venture (Sports JV) with Warner Bros. Discovery

(WBD), see below.

The company does not present an income statement (see note 1) and accordingly does not provide a disclosure of the profit or loss

recognised on its divestments.

BT Sport disposal

In August 2022 the company formed the Sports JV with WBD combining BT Sport and WBD's Eurosport UK business. As part of the

transaction, the company and WBD has each contributed, sub-licensed or delivered the benefit of their respective sports rights and

distribution businesses for the UK & Ireland to the Sports JV. Both parties each hold a 50% ordinary equity interest and equal voting rights

in the Sports JV.

BT Sport’s distribution agreement with Virgin Media has transferred to the Sports JV, and the Sports JV has also entered into a new

agreement with Sky extending beyond 2030 to provide for its distribution of the Sports JV’s combined sports content. The production and

operational assets of BT Sport have transferred to WBD who will manage and operate the production of the Sports JV's sport content.

The company has entered into a distribution agreement with the Sports JV to procure the sport content required to continue to supply our

broadband, TV and mobile customers. BT plc’s agreement with the Sports JV will extend beyond 2030 and for the first four years includes

a minimum revenue guarantee of approximately £500m per annum, after which the agreement will change to a fully variable

arrangement.

WBD will have the option to acquire the company's 50% interest in the Sports JV at specified points during the first four years of the

Sports JV (Call Option). The price payable under the Call Option will be 50% of the fair market value of the Sports JV to be determined at

the time of the exercise, plus any unpaid fixed consideration and remaining earn-out as described below. If the Call Option is not

exercised, the company will have the ability to exit its shareholding in the Sports JV either through a sale or IPO after the initial four-year

period.

The net consideration recognised by the company was as follows:



	£m
Cash considerationa	99
Investment in A preference shares in Sports JV (note 7)	428
Investment in C preference shares in Sports JV (note 7)b	161
Ordinary equity interest in Sports JV (note 7)	414
Transaction costs	(35)
Net consideration recognised in FY23	1,067
Additional net transaction costs recognised in FY24	(10)
Net consideration	1,057

a £52m of cash consideration continues to be deferred and outstanding at 31 March 2024 and held in trade and other receivables, see note 9.

b BT C preference shares in the Sports JV are expected to be sold to WBD at the end of BT's earn-out entitlement in consideration for any programme rights funded by BT and is

therefore akin to deferred consideration for pre-funded programme rights contributed by BT into the Sports JV at formation.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

22. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale

136

Critical & key accounting estimates and significant judgements made in accounting for the BT Sport

disposal in FY23

Following critical and key accounting estimates and significant judgements were made in accounting for the BT Sport disposal in FY23 only

and are not considered to be ongoing significant judgements.

Valuation of investment in A preference shares (akin to contingent consideration)

The company will receive an earn-out from the Sports JV (subject to liquidity and usual UK company law requirements), which will end at

the earliest of:

– four years post completion of the transaction;

– the exercise by WBD of the Call Option; and

– if the earn-out reaches an agreed cap.

The earn-out cash flows to the company are dependent on the cash profit generation of the Sports JV over the earn-out period and is

therefore akin to contingent consideration, initially recorded at a fair value of £428m reflecting the present value of expected cash flows.

Subsequent to the initial recognition, the company's carried forward investment in A preference shares will be remeasured to fair value at

each reporting date in accordance with IFRS 9, see note 7.

Valuation of the minimum revenue guarantee in the company’s distribution agreement with the Sports JV

The company's obligation under the minimum revenue guarantee of c. £2bn over the first four years of the Sports JV represents both a

trading arrangement on market terms and a financing arrangement for the off-market element of the revenue guarantee, which has been

recorded as a financial liability at an initial fair value of £712m.

The valuation of this financial liability, and what a fair cost-per-subscriber would be, is sensitive to a number of assumptions on volumes and

price, and there is a range of outcomes which we could have arrived at. Alternative scenarios considered, based on the different prices and

terms used with other market participants, could have resulted in a liability ranging from £543m to £837m.

The key assumptions in calculating the financial liability are in estimating what is a market wholesale price at market volume commitment

that is supported by the forecast volumes for the related revenue streams. The volumes used are consistent with those included in the

jointly-agreed business plan as described above. The bottom of the range disclosed above is based on the price that the company will pay

after four years when the minimum revenue guarantee has ended, however that is not considered an appropriate rate from the outset due to

existing volume commitments.

The liability is held at amortised cost within trade and other payables on the balance sheet (see note 11 and 12) - the carrying amount at 31

March 2024 has reduced to £465m (FY23: £660m) after payments made to the Sports JV on the minimum revenue guarantee.

Valuation of the company’s ordinary shares in the Sports JV

WBD has the option to acquire the company's 50% interest in the Sports JV at specified points during the first four years of the Sports JV. If

the Call Option is not exercised, the company will have the ability to exit its shareholding in the JV either through a sale or IPO.

The company has valued its equity interest in the Sports JV based on the estimated fair value at exit and using the following key

assumptions:

– the company expects to realise its interest in the Sports JV through exit rather than ongoing value in use;

– the company expects WBD to exercise its option to acquire BT’s 50% interest in the Sports JV at the end of the first four years of the

Sports JV; and

– an earnings multiple has been applied to the expected year 5 EBITDA per the jointly-agreed business plan - the multiple is at the lower

end of a possible range identified from comparable peers and transactions in the premium sports subscription and broadcasting market.

The investment will be subsequently held at deemed cost being the initial fair value, subject to impairment testing at each reporting period.

See note 7 for further details.

Discounting of cash flows

All cash flows expected to be received or paid over time have been discounted at a rate applicable to the risks associated with the cash

flows:

– Deferred payments due to the company from WBD have been discounted at an appropriate post-tax cost of debt;

– the company's earn-out from the Sports JV has been discounted at the weighted average cost of capital for the Sports JV at completion

date; and

– the company's commitments under the minimum guarantee have been discounted at the group’s post-tax cost of debt.

We do not consider the net present value of the transaction would be materially affected by a reasonable change in the discount rate.

Assets and liabilities held for sale

At 31 March 2024 there are no assets and liabilities classified as held for sale.

Assets held for sale at 31 March 2023 relate to Pelipod Limited, a connected-locker business used in our UK supply chain operations. This

divestment completed during FY24.


	2024	2023
At 31 March	£m	£m
Assets
Investment in subsidiary	—	4
Assets held for sale	—	4

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

22. Divestments and assets & liabilities classified as held for sale continued

137

23. Post balance sheet events

On 3 April 2024, the company issued a EUR 750m hybrid bond due on 3 October 2054 under our European Medium Term Note

programme with a coupon of 5.125% until the first call date of 5.5 years.

Notes to the parent company financial statements continued

138


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Held directly
Bermuda
Century House, 16 Par-la-Ville Road, Hamilton, HM08, Bermuda
Communications Global Network Services Limited	100%	ordinary
China
Building 16, 6th Floor, Room 602-B, No. 269 Wuyi Road, Hi-tech Park, Dalian, 116023, China
BT Technology (Dalian) Company Limited	100%	registered
Italy
Via Tucidide 14, 20134, Milano, Italy
BT Italia S.p.A.	99%	ordinary
Jersey
26 New Street, St Helier, JE2 3RA, Jersey
Ilford Trustees (Jersey) Limited	100%	ordinary
Luxembourg
12 rue Eugene Ruppert, L 2453, Luxembourg
BT Global Services Luxembourg SARL	100%	ordinary
Netherlands
Herikerbergweg 2, 1101 CM, Amsterdam, Netherlands
BT Nederland N.V.	100%	ordinary
Republic of Ireland
5th Floor, 2 Grand Canal Plaza, Upper Grand Canal Street, Dublin 4, Ireland
The Faraday Procurement Company Limited	100%	ordinary
United Kingdom
1 Braham Street, London, E1 8EE, United Kingdom
Autumnwindow Limited	100%	ordinary
Autumnwindow No.2 Limited	100%	ordinary
Autumnwindow No.3 Limited	100%	ordinary
BPSLP Limited	100%	ordinary
BT (RRS LP) Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Corporate Trustee Limited	100%	limited by guarantee
BT European Investments Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Holdings Limited	100%	ordinary
BT IoT Networks Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Ninety-Seven Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Nominees Limited	100%	ordinary
BT OnePhone Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Property Holdings (Aberdeen) Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Property Limited	100%	ordinary
BT SLE Euro Limited	100%	ordinary
BT SLE USD Limited	100%	ordinary


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
BT Solutions Limited	100%	ordinary
EE Group Investments Limited	100%	ordinary
Radianz Limited	100%	ordinary
Redcare Limited	100%	ordinary
Southgate Developments Limited	100%	ordinary
Alexander Bain House, 15 York Street, Glasgow, Lanarkshire, G2 8LA, Scotland
BT Corporate Limited	99%	ordinary
BT Falcon 1 LP	51%	–
Holland House (Northern) Limited	100%	ordinary
BDO LLP, 5 Temple Square, Temple Street, Liverpool, L2 5RH, United Kingdom
BT Lancashire Services Limited	100%	ordinary
Kelvin House, 123 Judd Street, London, WC1H 9NP, United Kingdom
Openreach Limited	100%	ordinary
Endeavour, Sheffield Digital Campus,1a Concourse Way, Sheffield, S1 2BJ, United Kingdom
Plusnet plc	100%	ordinary
Held via other group companies
Algeria
20 Micro zone d’Activités Dar El Madina, Bloc B, Loc N01 Hydra, Alger, 16000, Algeria
BT Algeria Communications SARL	100%	ordinary
Argentina
Maipu No 1210, piso 8 (C1006), Buenos Aires, Argentina
BT Argentina S.R.L.	100%	ordinary
Australia
Level 20, 420 George Street, Sydney, NSW 2000, Australia
BT Australasia Pty Limited	100%	ordinary
	100%	preference
Austria
Louis-Häfliger-Gasse 10, 1210, Wien, Austria
BT Austria GmbH	100%	ordinary
Azerbaijan
AZ 1025 The Azure Business Center, 20th Floor, c/ o BDO Azerbaijan LLC, Z1025, Khatai district, Afiyaddin Jalilov 26, apt.177, Azerbaijan
BT Azerbaijan Limited, Limited Liability Company	100%	ordinary
Bahrain


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Suite #2216, Building No. 2504, Road 2832, Al Seef, P.O. BOX 18259, Bahrain
BT Solutions Limited (Bahrain Branch)b	100%	–
Bangladesh
UTC Building, 19th Floor, Kawran Bazar, Dhaka, 1215, Bangladesh
BT Communications Bangladesh Limited	100%	ordinary
Barbados
3rd Floor, The Goddard Building, Haggatt Hall, St. Michael, BB11059, Barbados
BT (Barbados) Limited	100%	ordinary
Belarus
58 Voronyanskogo St, Office 89, Minsk 220007, Belarus
BT BELRUS Foreign Limited Liability Company	100%	ordinary
Belgium
Telecomlaan 9, 1831 Diegem, Belgium
BT Global Services Belgium BV	100%	ordinary
Global Security Europe Limited – Belgian Branchb	100%	–
Rue de L’Aêropostale 8, 4460 Grâce-Hollogne, Belgium
IP Trade SA	100%	ordinary
Bolivia
Avda. 6 de Agosto N° 2700, Torre Empresarial CADECO, Piso 4, La Paz, Bolivia
BT Solutions Limited Sucursal Boliviab	100%	–
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Trg Heroja 10/1, Sarajevo, 71000, Bosnia and Herzegovina
BTIH Teleconsult Drustvo sa organicenom odgovornoscu za posredovanje i zastupanje d.o.o. Sarajevo	100%	–
Botswana
Plot 2482b, Tshekedi Crescent, Extension 9, Gaborone, 211008, Bontleng, Botswana
BT Global Services Botswana (Proprietary) Limited	100%	ordinary
Brazil
Avenida Dr. Ruth Cardoso, 4777 – 14 andar, Pinheiros, São Paulo, SP, 05477-000, Brazil
BT Communications do Brasil Limitada	100%	quotas
BT Global Communications do Brasil Limitada	100%	quotas
Bulgaria
51B Bulgaria Blvd., fl. 4, Sofia, 1404, Bulgaria
BT Bulgaria EOOD	100%	ordinary
BT Global Europe B.V. – Bulgaria branchb	100%	–
Canada

Related undertakings

139


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
100 King Steet West, Suite 6200, 1 Canadian Place, Toronto ON M5X 1B8, Canada
BT Canada Inc.	100%	common
Chile
Rosario Norte 407, Piso 6, Las Condes, Santiago, Chile
Servicios de Telecomunicaciones BT Global Networks Chile Limitada	100%	ordinary
China
No. 3 Dong San Huan Bei Lu, Chao Yang District, Beijing, 100027, China
BT Limited, Beijing Officeb	100%	–
Room 2101-2103, 21/F, International Capital Plaza, No. 1318 North Sichuan Road, Hong Kou District, Shanghai, 200080, China
BT China Limited- Shanghai Branch Officeb	100%	–
1502-1503, AVIC Center, No. 1008, Huafu Road, Futian District, Shenzhen, 518000, China
BT China Limited – Shenzhen Branchb	100%	–
Room 3, 4, F7, Tower W3, Oriental Plaza, 1 East Chang An Avenue, Dongcheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
BT China Limited	100%	registered
Unit 1537B, Floor 15th, No. 55, Xili Road, Shanghai Free Trade Zone, Shanghai, China
BT China Communications Limited	50%	ordinary
Colombia
Calle 113, 7-21,Torre A Oficina 1015 Teleport Business, Bogota, Colombia
BT Colombia Limitada	100%	quotas
Costa Rica
Heredia-Belen La Ribera, Centro Corporativo El Cafeta, Edificio B, segundo piso, Oficinas de Deloitte, San José, Costa Rica
BT Global Costa Rica SRL	100%	ordinary
Côte d’Ivoire
Abidjan Plateau, Rue du commerce, Immeuble Nabil 1er étage, 01 BP 12721 Abidjan 01, Côte d’Ivoire
BT Cote D’Ivoire	100%	ordinary
Cyprus
Hadjianastassiou, Ioannides LLC, DELOITTE LEGAL, Maximos Plaza, Tower 3, 2nd Floor, 213 Arch. Makariou III Avenue, Limassol, 3030, Cyprus
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Arch. Makarios III, 213, Maximos Plaza, Tower 3, Floor 2, Limassol, 3030, Cyprus
BT Global Europe B.V.b	100%	–
Czech Republic
Pujmanové 1753 / 10a, Nusle, 140 00, Prague 4, Czech Republic
BT Global Europe B.V., odštěpný závodb	100%	–
Denmark
Norre Farimagsgade 13, 4. th, 1364 Kobenhavn K, Denmark
BT Denmark ApS	100%	ordinary
Dominican Republic


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Av. Abraham Lincoln Esq. Jose Amado Soler, Edif. Progresso, Local 3-A, Sector Ens. Serralles, Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic
BT Dominican Republic, S. A.	100%	ordinary
Ecuador
Av. Amazonas N21-252 y Carrión, Edificio Londres, 4° Piso, Quito, Ecuador
BT Solutions Limited (Sucursal Ecuador)b	100%	–
Egypt
Unit no. 306 Administrative Second Floor, Al Saraya Mall, Al Mehwar Al- Markazy, Giza, Egypt
BT Telecom Egypt LLC	100%	stakes
El Salvador
Edificio Avante Penthouse Oficina, 10-01 Y 10-03 Urbanizacion, Madre Selva, Antiguo Cuscatlan, La Libertad, El Salvador
BT El Salvador, Limitada de Capital Variable	100%	ordinary
Finland
Mannerheimvägen 12 B 6, 00100 Helsinki, Finland
BT Nordics Finland Oy	100%	ordinary
France
Tour Ariane, 5 place de la Pyramide, La Defense Cedex, 92088, Paris, France
BT France S.A.S.	100%	ordinary
Germany
Barthstraße 4, 80339, Munich, Germany
BT (Germany) GmbH & Co. oHG	100%	ordinary
BT Deutschland GmbH	100%	ordinary
BT Garrick GmbH	100%	ordinary
Widdersdorfer Strasse 252, 50933, Cologne, Germany
Global Security Europe Limited – Germany Branchb	100%	–
Ghana
5th Floor, Vivo Place, Cantonments City, Rangoon Lane, P.O. Box MB 595, Accra, Ghana
BT Ghana Ltd	100%	ordinary
Greece
75 Patision Street, Athens, 10434, Greece
BT Solutions Limited- Greek Branchb	100%	–
Guatemala
5ta avenida 5-55 zona 14, Edificio Europlaza World Business Center, Torre IV, nivel 7, oficina 702, Guatemala City, Guatemala
BT Guatemala S.A.	100%	unique
Honduras
Colonia Florencia Norte, Edificio Plaza America, 5to Piso, Tegucigalpa, Honduras
BT Sociedad De Responsabilidad Limitada	100%	–
Hong Kong
Unit 31-105, 31/F, Hysan Place, 500 Hennessy Road, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
BT Hong Kong Limited	100%	ordinary


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Infonet China Limited	100%	ordinary
Hungary
1112 Budapest, Boldizsár utca 4. , Hungary
BT Global Europe B.V. Magyarorszagi Fioktelepeb	100%	–
BT Limited Magyarorszagi Fioktelepeb	100%	–
BT ROC Kft	100%	business
India
11th Floor, Eros Corporate Tower, Opp. International Trade Tower, Nehru Place, New Delhi, 110019, India
BT (India) Private Limited	100%	ordinary
BT e-Serv (India) Private Limited	100%	equity
BT Global Business Services Private Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Global Communications India Private Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Telecom India Private Limited	100%	ordinary
A-47, Hauz Khas, New Delhi, Delhi-DL, 110016, India
Orange Services India Private Limited	100%	ordinary
Indonesia
Menara Astra, 37F. JI. Jendral Sudirman Kav 5-6, Jakarta Pusat, Jakarta, 10220, Indonesia
PT BT Indonesia	100%	ordinary
PT BT Communications Indonesia	95%	ordinary
Isle of Man
Third Floor, St Georges Court, Upper Church Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE, Isle of Man
Belmullet Limited	100%	ordinary
Communicator Insurance Company Limited	100%	ordinary
Priestgate Limited	100%	ordinary
Israel
Beit Oz, 14 Abba Hillel Silver Rd, Ramat Gan, 52506, Israel
B.T. Communication Israel Ltd	100%	ordinary
Italy
Via Mario Bianchini 15, 00142, Roma, Italy
BT Global Services Limitedb	100%	–
Via Tucidide 14, 20134, Milano, Italy
Atlanet SpA	99%	ordinary
Basictel SpA	99%	ordinary
Viale Abruzzi n. 94, 20131, Milan, Italy
Global Security Europe Limitedb	100%	–
Jamaica
Suite #6, 9A Garelli Avenue , Half way tree, St. Andrew, Kingston 10, Jamaica

Related undertakings continued

140


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
BT Jamaica Limited	100%	ordinary
Japan
ARK Mori Building, 12-32 Akasaka, 1-Chome, Minato-Ku, Tokyo, 107 – 6024, Japan
BT Japan Corporation	100%	ordinary
Jersey
PO Box 264, Forum 4, Grenville Street, St Helier, JE4 8TQ, Jersey
BT Jersey Limited	100%	ordinary
Jordan
Wadi AlSer – Dahiet Prince Rashid – King Abdullah Street , Building No. 391 – 3rd Floor, Jordan
BT (International) Holdings Limited (Jordan)	100%	ordinary
Kazakhstan
n.p.38b, Building 5, Kaiym Mukhamedkhanov Street, Nura District, Astana, Index 010000, Kazakhstan
BT Kazakhstan LLP	100%	–
Kenya
L R No, 1870/ 1/176, Aln House, Eldama Ravine close, off Eldama Ravine Road, Westlands, P O Box 764, Sarit Centre, Nairobi, 00606, Kenya
BT Communications Kenya Limited	70%	ordinary
Korea
Level 19, Hana Securities Building, 81, Uisadang- daero, Yeongdeungpogu, Seoul, 07321, Republic of Korea
BT Global Services Korea Limited	100%	common
Latvia
Muitas iela 1A, Riga, LV-1010, Latvia
BT Latvia Limited, Sabiedriba ar ierobezotu atbildibu	100%	ordinary
Lebanon
Abou Hamad, Merheb, Nohra & Chedid Law Firm, Chbaro Street, 22nd Achrafieh Warde Building, 1st Floor, Beirut, P.O.BOX 165126, Lebanon
BT Lebanon S.A.L.	100%	ordinary
Lithuania
Aludariu str 2-33, LT-01113 Vilnius, Lithuania
UAB BTH Vilnius	100%	ordinary
Luxembourg
12 rue Eugene Ruppert, L 2453, Luxembourg
BT Broadband Luxembourg Sàrl	100%	ordinary
Malawi
KEZA Office Park Blocks 3, First Floor, Near Chichiri, Shopping Mall, Blantyre, Malawi
BT Malawi Limited	100%	ordinary


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Malaysia
Level 5, Tower 3, Avenue 7, Bangsar South, No.8, Jalan Kerinchi, 59200 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
BT Global Technology (M) Sdn. Bhd.	100%	ordinary
BT Systems (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd	100%	ordinary
Malta
Level 1, LM Complex, Brewery Street, Zone 3, Central Business District, Birkirkara CBD, 3040, Malta
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Mauritius
c/o Deloitte, 7th Floor Standard Chartered Tower, 19-21 Bank Street, Cybercity, Ebène, 72201, Mauritius
BT Global Communications (Mauritius) Limited	100%	ordinary
Mexico
Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No. 32, 6th Floor, Lomas de Chapultepec III Section, Miguel Hidalgo, Mexico City CP11000
BT LatAm México, S.A. de C.V.	100%	common
Montenegro
Vasa Raickovica 4b, Podgorica, Podgorica, Montenegro
BT Montenegro DOO	100%	–
Morocco
Bd. Abdelmoumen, Immeuble Atrium, n 374, Lot. Manazyl Al Maymoune, 5eme etage, Casablanca, 20390, Morocco
BT Solutions Limited – Morocco Branchb	100%	–
Mozambique
Avenida Kenneth Kaunda, number 660, Sommershield, Maputo City, Mozambique
BT Mozambique, Limitada	100%	quotas
Namibia
Unit 3, 2nd floor, Ausspann Plaza, Dr Agostinho Neto Road, Ausspannplatz, Private Bag, Windhoek, 12012, Namibia
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Netherlands
Herikerbergweg 2, 1101 CM, Amsterdam, Netherlands
BT Global Europe B.V.	100%	ordinary
BT (Netherlands) Holdings B.V.	100%	ordinary
BT Professional Services Nederland B.V.	100%	ordinary
Global Security Europe Limitedb	100%	–
New Zealand
c/o Deloitte, Level 18, 80 Queen Street, Auckland Central, Auckland, 1010, New Zealand
BT Australasia Pty Limited – New Zealand Branchb	100%	–
Nicaragua
De donde fué el Restaurante Marea Alta Ahora quesillos, El Pipe, 2 cuadras al este, 10 Metros al norte, frente al, Hotel El Gran Marquez, Casa #351, Nicaragua, 2815, Nicaragua
BT Nicaragua S.A.	100%	capital
Nigeria
Civic Towers, Plot GA1, Ozumba Mbadiwe Avenue, Victoria Island, Lagos, Nigeria


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
BT (Nigeria) Limited	100%	ordinary
North Macedonia
Str. Dame Gruev no.8, 5th floor, Building “Dom na voenite invalidi”, Skopje 1000, North Macedonia
BT Solutions Limited Branch Office in Skopje b	100%	–
Norway
Munkedamsveien 45, Oslo, 0121, Norway
BT Solutions Norway AS	100%	ordinary
Oman
Maktabi Building, Building No. 458, Unit No. 413 4th Floor, Road No – R41, Block No. 203, Plot No. 107, Zone No. SW41, Complex No. 271, Al Watiyah, Bausher, Muscat, Sultanate of Oman, Oman
BT International Holdings Limited & Co. LLC	100%	ordinary
Pakistan
Cavish Court, A-35, Block 7&8, KCHSU, Shahrah-e-Faisal, Karachi, 75350, Pakistan
BT Pakistan (Private) Limited	100%	ordinary
Panama
50th and 74th Street, San Francisco, PH 909, 15th and 16th Floor, Panama City, Panama
BT de Panama, S.R.L.	100%	ordinary
Paraguay
Av. Brasilia N° 767 casi Siria, Asunción, Paraguay
BT Paraguay S.R.L.	100%	quotas
Peru
Av. La Mar 662 Of. 201 – Miraflores, Lima, Peru
BT Peru S.R.L.	100%	ordinary
Philippines
11th Floor, Page One Building, 1215 Acacia Ave Madrigal Business Park, Ayala Alabang, Muntinlupa, Metro Manila, 1780, Philippines
IT Holdings, Inc	100%	ordinary
40th Floor, PBCom Tower 6795, Ayala Avenue cor. Rufino St, Makati City, 1226, Philippines
BT Communications Philippines Incorporated	100%	ordinary
c/o Sun Microsystems Phil Inc., 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, Philippines
PSPI-Subic, Inc	51%	ordinary
Poland
126/134 Marszalkowska St., Room 128, 00-008, Warsaw, Poland
BT Poland Spółka Z Ograniczoną Odpowiedzialnością	100%	ordinary

Related undertakings continued

141


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Portugal
Rua D. Francisco Manuel de Melo 21-1, 1070-085 Lisboa, Portugal
BT Portugal – Telecomunicaçöes, Unipessoal Lda	100%	ordinary
Puerto Rico
Corporation Service Company Puerto Rico Inc., c/ o RVM Professional Services LLC, A4 Reparto Mendoza, Humacao, 00791, Puerto Rico
BT Communications Sales, LLC Puerto Rico branchb	100%	–
Qatar
1413, 14th Floor, Al Fardan Office Tower, Doha, 31316, Qatar
BT Global Services (North Gulf) LLC	49%	ordinary
Republic of Ireland
BDO Block 3 Miesian Plaza, 50-58 Baggot Street Lower, Dublin 2, Dublin, D02 Y754, Ireland
BT Global Communications (Ireland) Limited	100%	ordinary
2 Grand Canal Plaza, Upper Grand Canal Street, Dublin 4, Republic of Ireland
BT Communications Ireland Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Communications Ireland Group Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Communications Ireland Holdings Limited	100%	ordinary
Whitestream Industries Limited	100%	ordinary
Romania
Cladirea A1, Biroul Nr. 52, Nr 35-37, Str. Oltenitei, Sector 4, Bucharest, Romania
BT Global Services Limited Londra Sucursala Bucurestib	100%	–
Russia
Room 62, prem xx, Floor 2, Pravdy, 26, 127137, Moscow, Russian Federation
BT Solutions Limited Liability Company	100%	–
Serbia
Dimitrija Georgijevica Starike 20, Belgrade, 11070, Serbia
BT Belgrade d.o.o	100%	ordinary
Sierra Leone
84 Dundas Street, Freetown, Sierra Leone
BT (SL) Limited	100%	ordinary
Singapore
Level 3, #03-01/02 & #03-04, Block B, Alexandra Technopark, 438B Alexandra Road, Singapore, 119968
BT (India) Private Limited Singapore Branchb	100%	–
BT Global Solutions Pte. Ltd.	100%	ordinary
BT Singapore Pte. Ltd.	100%	ordinary
Slovakia


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Pribinova 10, 811 09, Bratislava , mestskó èast’ Staré Mesto, Slovakia
BT Global Europe B.V., o.z.b	100%	–
BT Slovakia s.r.o.	100%	ordinary
Slovenia
Cesta v Mestni Log 1, Ljubljana, 1000, Slovenia
BT GLOBALNE STORITVE, telekomunikacijske storitve, obdelava podatkov, podatkovnih baz; d.o.o.	100%	ordinary
South Africa
BT Building, Woodmead North Office Park, 54 Maxwell Drive, Woodmead, Johannesburg, 2191, South Africa
BT Communications Services South Africa (Pty) Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Limitedb	100%	–
Spain
C/ María Tubau, 3, 28050 de Madrid, Spain
BT Global ICT Business Spain SLU	100%	ordinary
Sri Lanka
Level 03, No 11, Castle Lane, Colombo, 04, Sri Lanka
BT Communications Lanka (Private) Limited	100%	ordinary
Sudan
Alskheikh Mustafa Building, Parlman Street, Khartoum, Sudan
Newgate Communication (Sudan) Co. Ltd	100%	ordinary
Sweden
c/o 7A, Vasagatan 28, 111 20, Stockholm, Sweden
BT Nordics Sweden AB	100%	ordinary
Switzerland
Richtistrasse 5, 8304 Wallisellen, Switzerland
BT Switzerland AG	100%	ordinary
Taiwan
11F, No. 1 Songzhi Rd, Xinyi Dist., Taipei City, 110411, Taiwan (Province of China)
BT Limited Taiwan Branchb	100%	–
Tanzania
Region Dar Es Salaam, District Kinondoni, Ward Msasani, Street Msasani Peninsula, Road 1 Bains Singh Avenue, Plot number 1403/1, Ground Floor, 14111, United Republic of Tanzania
BT Solutions Limited – Tanzania Branchb	100%	–
Thailand
No.63 Athenee Tower, 23rd Floor (CEO Suite, Room No.38), Wireless Road, Kwaeng Lumpini, Khet Pathumwan, Bangkok, 10330, Thailand
BT Siam Communications Co., Ltd	49%	class B
BT Siam Limited	69%	ordinary
	69%	preference
Trinidad and Tobago
2nd Floor CIC Building, 122-124 Frederick Street, Port of Spain, Trinidad and Tobago
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Tunisia


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Rue de I’, Euro Immeuble Slim, Block A-2nd floor-Les berges du Lac, Tunis, 1053, Tunisia
BT Tunisia S.A.R.L	100%	ordinary
Turkey
Acıbadem Mahallesi Çeçen Sk. Akasya A , Kule Kent Etabı Apt. No: 25 A/28- , Üsküdar, Istanbul, Turkey
BT Bilisim Hizmetleri Anonim Şirketi	100%	ordinary
BT Telekom Hizmetleri Anonim Şirketi	100%	common
Uganda
Engoru, Mutebi Advocates, Ground Floor, Rwenzori House, 1 Lumumba Avenue, Kampala, 22510, Uganda
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Ukraine
Office 702, 34 Lesi Ukrainky Boulevard, Kyiv 01042, Ukraine
BT Ukraine Limited Liability Company	100%	stakes
United Arab Emirates
Office No G03, Ground Floor, EIB Building No 04, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
BT MEA FZ-LLC	100%	ordinary
Office no.206 BLOCK B, Diamond Business Center 1, Al Barsha South Third, Dubai, P.O. BOX 25205, United Arab Emirates
BT UAE Limited – Dubai Branch (1)b	100%	–
BT UAE Limited – Dubai Branch (2)b	100%	–
United Kingdom
1 Braham Street, London, E1 8EE, United Kingdom
Belmullet (IoM) Limitedb	100%	–
Bruning Limited	100%	ordinary
BT (International) Holdings Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Communications Ireland Group Limited – UK Branchb	100%	–
BT Fifty-One	100%	ordinary
BT Fifty-Three Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Global Security Services Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Global Services Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Limited	100%	ordinary
BT Sixty-Four Limited	100%	ordinary
BT UAE Limited	100%	ordinary
Communications Global Network Services Limited – UK Branchb	100%	–
Communications Networking Services (UK)	100%	ordinary
EE (Group) Limited	100%	ordinary
EE Limited	100%	ordinary
EE Pension Trustee Limited	100%	ordinary
ESAT Telecommunications (UK) Limited	100%	ordinary
Extraclick Limited	100%	ordinary
Global Security Europe Limited	100%	ordinary

Related undertakings continued

142


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Mainline Communications Group Limited	100%	ordinary
Mainline Digital Communications Limited	100%	ordinary
Newgate Street Secretaries Limited	100%	ordinary
Numberrapid Limited	100%	ordinary
Orange Furbs Trustees Limited	100%	ordinary
Orange Home UK Limited	100%	ordinary
Orange Personal Communications Services Limited	100%	ordinary
Tudor Minstrel	100%	ordinary
United States
c/o Corporation Service Company, 251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington DE 19808, United States
BT Americas Holdings Inc.	100%	common
BT Americas Inc.	100%	common
BT Communications Sales LLC	100%	units
BT Federal Inc.	100%	common
BT Procure L.L.C.	100%	units
BT United States L.L.C.	100%	units
Infonet Services Corporation	100%	common
Uruguay
Rincón 487 Piso 11, Montevideo, ZIP CODE 11.000, Uruguay
BT Solutions Limited Sucursal Uruguayb	100%	–
Venezuela
Calle Guaicaipuro, Urbanizacion El Rosal, Municipio Chacao, Oficina 11B, Piso 11, Torre Forum, Caracas, Venezuela
BT LatAm Venezuela, S.A.	100%	ordinary
Vietnam
16th Floor Saigon Tower, 29 Le Duan Road, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, 710000, Socialist Republic of Vietnam
BT (Vietnam) Co. Ltd.	100%	ordinary
Zambia
Plot No. 11058, Haile Selassie Avenue, Zimbabwe, Lusaka, Lusaka Province, 34972, Zambia
BT Solutions Limitedb	100%	–
Zimbabwe
6th Floor, Goldbridge Eastgate, Sam Nujoma Street Harare, Post Box 10400, Zimbabwe
Numberrapid Limitedb	100%	–

Associates


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Held directly
United Kingdom
2nd Floor, Aldgate Tower, 2 Leman Street, London, E1 8FA, United Kingdom
Youview TV Limited	14%	voting
Held via other group companies
Mauritius
IFS Court, Bank Street, TwentyEight Cybercity, Ebene, 72201, Mauritius
Mahindra – BT Investment Company (Mauritius) Limited	43%	ordinary
Philippines
32F Philam Life Tower, 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, Philippines
ePLDTSunphilcox JV, Inc	20%	ordinary
SunPhilcox JV, Inc	20%	ordinary
United Kingdom
24/25 The Shard, 32 London Bridge Street, London, SE1 9SG, United Kingdom
Digital Mobile Spectrum Limited	25%	ordinary
10 Stadium Business Court , Millennium Way, Pride Park , Derby, DE24 8HP, United Kingdom
Midland Communications Distribution Limited	35%	ordinary
Phoneline (M.C.D) Limited	35%	ordinary

Joint ventures


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Held directly
United Kingdom
Chiswick Park Building 2, 566 Chiswick High Road, London, W4 5YB, United Kingdom
TNT Sports Broadcasting Limitedc	50%	ordinary
6th Floor, One London Wall, London, EC2Y 5EB, United Kingdom
Internet Matters Limited	25%	-
Held via other group companies
United Kingdom
80 Fenchurch Street , London, EC3M 4AE, United Kingdom
Rugby Radio Station (General Partner) Limited	50%	ordinary
Rugby Radio Station (Nominee) Limited	50%	ordinary
St Helen’s, 1 Undershaft, London, EC3P 3DQ, United Kingdom
Rugby Radio Station LP	50%	-

All joint ventures are governed by a joint

venture agreement.

Joint operations


Company name	Group interest in allotted capitala	Share class
Held via other group companies
United Kingdom
450 Longwater Avenue, Green Park, Reading, Berkshire, RG2 6GF, United Kingdom
Mobile Broadband Network Limited	50%	ordinary

EE Limited and Hutchison 3G UK Limited

(together ‘the Companies’) each have a

50% share in the joint operation Mobile

Broadband Network Limited (‘MBNL’).

MBNL’s ongoing purpose is the operation

and maintenance of radio access sites for

mobile networks through a sharing

arrangement. This includes: (i) the efficient

management of shared infrastructure and

a 3G network on behalf of the Companies,

(ii) acquiring certain network elements for

shared use, and (iii) coordinating the

deployment of new sites, infrastructure

and networks on either a shared or a

unilateral basis (unilateral elements being

network assets or services specific to one

company only). The group is committed to

incurring 50% of costs in respect of

restructuring the shared MBNL network, a

broadly similar proportion of the operating

costs (which varies in line with usage), and

100% of any unilateral elements.

MBNL is accounted for as a joint operation.

Guarantees for the joint operation are

given by British Telecommunications plc

and CK Hutchison Holdings Limited.

The principal place of business of the joint

operation is in the UK.

aThe proportion of voting rights held corresponds to the

aggregate interest in percentage held by the holding

company and subsidiaries undertaking.

bNo shares issued for a branch.

cBT Ninety-Five Limited name changed to TNT Sports

Broadcasting Limited. In addition to the 50% ordinary

A shares we also hold A preference shares and C

preference shares, see note 21 for more details.

Related undertakings continued

143

The following subsidiary undertakings have taken the exemption from the requirements of audit of individual accounts

by parent guarantee under section 479A-479C of the Companies Act 2006:


Subsidiary	Registered number	Subsidiary	Registered number	Subsidiary	Registered number
Autumnwindow Limited	4109614	BT Global Services Limited	2410810	BT Solutions Limited	4573373
Autumnwindow No.2 Ltd	4312827	BT Holdings Limited	2216773	BT UAE Limited	4726666
BPSLP Limited	11251566	BT IoT Networks Limited	2329342	ExtraClick Limited a	4552808
Bruning Limited	4958289	BT Limited	2216369	Global Security Europe Limited	12290726
BT (International) Holdings Limited	2216586	BT Ninety-Seven Limited	14017603	Holland House (Northern) Limited	SC390251
BT (RRS LP) Limited	4109640	BT Onephone Limited	8043734	Mainline Communications Group Limited	2862068
BT European Investments Limited	4276882	BT Property Holdings (Aberdeen) Limited	10255933	Mainline Digital Communications Limited	2973418
BT Fifty-One	3621755	BT Sixty-Four Limited	4007415	Numberrapid Limited	4825279
BT Fifty-Three Limited	3621745	BT Sle Euro Limited	7573610	Radianz Limited	3918478
BT Global Security Services Limited	11786115	BT Sle USD Limited	7573644	Tudor Minstrel	3747023

a ExtraClick Limited has a 30 September 2023 year-end

Subsidiaries exempt from audit

144

Alternative performance measures

Introduction

We assess the performance of the group using a variety of

alternative performance measures that are not defined under IFRS

and are therefore termed non-GAAP measures. The non-GAAP

measures we use are: adjusted revenue, adjusted operating costs,

adjusted finance expense, adjusted EBITDA, adjusted operating

profit, adjusted profit before tax, adjusted earnings per share,

return on capital employed, normalised free cash flow and net

debt. We also reference adjusted revenue and adjusted EBITDA on

a Sports JV pro forma basis. The rationale for using these

measures, along with a reconciliation from the nearest measures

prepared in accordance with IFRS, is presented below.

The alternative performance measures we use may not be directly

comparable with similarly titled measures used by other

companies.

Specific items

Our income statement and segmental analysis separately identify

trading results on an adjusted basis, being before specific items.

The directors believe that presentation of the group’s results in this

way is relevant to an understanding of the group’s financial

performance as specific items are those that in management’s

judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or

incidence.

This presentation is consistent with the way that financial

performance is measured by management and reported to the

Board and the Executive Committee and assists in providing an

additional analysis of our reporting trading results.

In determining whether an event or transaction is specific,

management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors.

Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and

which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or

prior years include significant business restructuring programmes

such as the current group-wide cost transformation and

modernisation programme, acquisitions and disposals of

businesses and investments, impairment of goodwill, charges or

credits relating to retrospective regulatory matters, property

rationalisation programmes, historical property-related provisions,

significant out of period contract settlements, net interest on our

pension obligation, and the impact of remeasuring deferred tax

balances. In the event that items meet the criteria, which are

applied consistently from year to year, they are treated as specific

items. Any releases to provisions originally booked as a specific

item are also classified as specific. Conversely, when a reversal

occurs in relation to a prior year item not classified as specific, the

reversal is not classified as specific in the current year.

Movements relating to the sports joint venture (Sports JV) with

Warner Bros. Discovery (WBD), such as fair value gains or losses on

the A and C preference shares or impairment charges on the

equity-accounted investment as specific. Refer to note 22 for

further detail.

Details of items meeting the definition of specific items in the

current and prior year are set out in note 9.

Reported revenue, reported operating costs, reported operating

profit, reported net finance expense, reported profit before tax

and reported earnings per share are the equivalent IFRS measures.

A reconciliation from these can be seen in the group income

statement on page 41.

Adjusted EBITDA

In addition to measuring financial performance of the group and

customer-facing units based on adjusted operating profit, we also

measure performance based on adjusted EBITDA. Adjusted

EBITDA is defined as the group profit or loss before specific items,

net finance expense, taxation, depreciation and amortisation and

share of post tax profits or losses of associates and joint ventures.

We consider adjusted EBITDA to be a useful measure of our

operating performance because it approximates the underlying

operating cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation.

Adjusted EBITDA is not a direct measure of our liquidity, which is

shown by our cash flow statement, and needs to be considered in

the context of our financial commitments.

A reconciliation of reported profit for the period, the most directly

comparable IFRS measure, to adjusted EBITDA, is set out below.


	2024	2023
Year ended 31 March	£m	£m
Reported profit for the period	1,566	2,291
Tax	331	(176)
Reported profit before tax	1,897	2,115
Net finance expense	298	447
Depreciation and amortisation,including impairment charges	5,398	4,818
Share of post tax losses (profits) of associates and joint ventures	21	59
Specific revenue	38	(12)
Specific operating costs before depreciation and amortisation	450	503
Adjusted EBITDA	8,102	7,930

Additional Information

145

Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking

statements

Certain information included in this Annual Report and Accounts is

forward looking and involves risks, assumptions and uncertainties

that could cause actual results to differ materially from those

expressed or implied by forward looking statements. Forward

looking statements cover all matters which are not historical facts

and include, without limitation, projections relating to results of

operations and financial conditions and the Company’s plans and

objectives for future operations. Forward looking statements can

be identified by the use of forward looking terminology, including

terms such as ‘believes’, ‘estimates’, ‘anticipates’, ‘expects’,

‘forecasts’, ‘intends’, ‘plans’, ‘projects’, ‘goal’, ‘target’, ‘aim’, ‘may’,

‘will’, ‘would’, ‘could’ or ‘should’ or, in each case, their negative or

other variations or comparable terminology. Forward looking

statements in this Annual Report and Accounts are not guarantees

of future performance. All forward looking statements in this

Annual Report and Accounts are based upon information known to

the Company on the date of this Annual Report and Accounts.

Accordingly, no assurance can be given that any particular

expectation will be met and readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on forward looking statements, which speak only at

their respective dates. Additionally, forward looking statements

regarding past trends or activities should not be taken as a

representation that such trends or activities will continue in the

future. Other than in accordance with its legal or regulatory

obligations (including under the UK Listing Rules and the

Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the Financial

Conduct Authority), the Company undertakes no obligation to

publicly update or revise any forward looking statement, whether

as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. Nothing

in this Annual Report and Accounts shall exclude any liability under

applicable laws that cannot be excluded in accordance with

such laws.


BT Group plc Annual Report 2024	146	Financial statements

146


	Page
Corporate information	2
Strategic report	3
Report of the Directors	27
Statement of directors’ responsibilities	31
Independent auditor's report to the members of British Telecommunications plc	32
Group Income statement	39
Group statement of comprehensive income	40
Group balance sheet	41
Group statement of changes in equity	42
Group cash flow statement	43
Notes to the consolidated financial statements	44
Financial Statements of parent company	109
Additional Information	145